Home

9938 MET/TEMP II

1. UUT being used as reference probe To Serial Port Straight Through Cable Heat Source Being Calibrated To MASTER PORT To Serial Port To PORT A To PORT C Null Modem Cables Figure 80 Example Configuration for Performing a Heat Source Calibration Default Settings Before configuring MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source there are some settings that need to be checked that will affect the calibration process The fol lowing sections describe these settings Writing New Coefficients To Heat Source MET TEMP II has a default setting that determines whether the new calculated values of the calibration coefficients should be written to the heat source This setting must be configured prior to starting the heat source calibration test Se 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 161 lect the Defaults option from the File menu to display the Defaults dialog Se lect the Test tab General Setpoints Setup Gtaph Reports User Jest EEE CAES Test Defaults X Self heat test probes UUT s before taking readings pay Enter number of measurements to average to produce one reading nm e Always discard first reading on each channel when taking measurements X Prompt to calculate coefficients when closing test Heat Source Calibration Options X Write new coefficients to heat source after calibration Set point Override Options If heat source has
2. Select probes to export Report Number Model Serial CE200001005 001 5626 0040 CE200001005 002 5626 0033 Figure 118 Export Coefficients Dialog The Export Coefficients dialog displays a list of all test probes for which coeffi cients have been calculated in the Select probes to export list Select the test probes to export by clicking on the appropriate row s in the Se lect probes to export list To export the coefficients for the selected test probe s click the Export button A prompt is displayed for entering the path and filename for the export file The default path and filename can be changed on the Directories tab of the De faults dialog A message is displayed stating the export operation was success ful if no errors occurred 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 215 The following are examples of coefficients export files Report Number CE199862 668 669 Model 5614 Serial Number 366214 ITS 96 RTPW 166 598947 a4 1 6358267 E 62 b4 1 4001044 E 62 a8 9 3098362 E 63 b8 1 4543333 E 62 Report Number EXAMPLE6 61 Model 5636 Serial Number 123456 Thermocouple cO 5 3863516 E66 c1 1 2586636 E 62 c2 2 3247800 E 05 c3 3 2202880 E 68 c4 3 3146526 E 11 c5 2 5574436 E 14 c6 1 2566896 E 17 c7 2 7144320 E 21 Deviations Delta c1 1 6781629 E 62 Delta c2 6 7945389 E 66 Figure 119 Example Coefficients Export Files Click the OK button to close this dialog
3. 25334 MPGa 29 7646 0 FPin 156 5985 2566987 FPSn 231 928 253654 FPZn 419 527 0 FPA 660 323 0 FPAg 961 78 NOTE Fixed Point reference values are ALWAYS in C Help Cancel Figure 79 Fixed Points Dialog Select the fixed point cell to use and click the OK button If the fixed point cell has not been configured yet a message is displayed indicating the cell must be configured before it can be used Refer to Section 12 1 Configuring Fixed Point Cells for more details If the Prompt to confirm method of realization check box on the Defaults dia log is checked another message is displayed to confirm the currently selected method of realization for the selected fixed point cell Make sure this method is correct before continuing The fixed point set point is added to the set points list indicating the reference value and the current method of realization The Set point Window and Tolerance boxes on the Set point Configuration di alog are disabled when a fixed point set point is selected These settings cannot be changed or do not apply for fixed point set points The Duration setting indicates the amount of soak time that MET TEMP II should allow once a test probe has been inserted into a fixed point cell until readings are taken Insert other fixed point set points by repeating this process Click the OK button to close the Set point Configuration dialog 156 12 Perfor
4. 4 4 2 74 Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog Note The scanner and scanner module if applicable must be configured to start a calibration test Scanner Module Configuration Dialog The Scanner Module Configuration dialog is displayed when the Modules but ton on the Scanner Configuration dialog is clicked This dialog is only applica ble when the selected scanner instrument requires the use of modules or multiplexers Scanner Module Configuration l Scanner Module Configuration 2 IX Scanner module is used for the test Model number Serial number El El Manufacturer Hart Scientific Description Thermocouple Scanner Module MT Asset number Calibration date Recalibration date 0107 2003 01 07 2004 Cancel Figure 34 Scanner Module Configuration Dialog The Scanner Module Configuration dialog is displayed when the Modules but ton is clicked on the Scanner Configuration dialog If the Enable communications during configuration check box is selected when the Modules button is clicked on the Scanner Configuration dialog MET TEMP II attempts to query the selected scanner instrument when possi ble to determine what scanner modules are attached If successful MET TEMP II ensures that the proper drivers are installed for the modules or multiplexer and the tabs
5. 88 necessary Because fixed point set points do not use a heat source the window parameter does not apply to fixed point set points The tolerance and duration parameters define the desired stability of the refer ence probe readings These parameters are used by MET TEMP II to determine when the reference probe has stabilized at the current temperature The toler ance parameter defines how much the reference probe readings may vary and still be considered stable The duration parameter is the length of time that the reference probe readings must be stable before any measurements are taken Fixed point set points do not use the tolerance parameter The duration parame ter is used to determine how long each test probe should be allowed to soak in the fixed point cell before MET TEMP II begins taking measurements The uncertainty parameter is not used by MET TEMP II to determine when measurements are taken In order for the Report of Calibration produced by MET TEMP II to meet the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 specification the uncertainty at each set point must appear on the report The value entered in the uncertainty box for each set point appears on the Report of Calibration when printed To determine the uncertainty at a set point the uncertainty of each piece of equip ment used to take measurements at the set point i e reference readout refer ence probe scanner heat source etc must be known The overall uncertainty is generally the sum o
6. 13 Prompt to Synchronize Technician Name with MET TRACK User Name enc cs ca Da ee ee Se dt ea 14 Example Computer and Instrument Cable Connections 16 MET TEMP II Main Display o o 18 MET TEMP II Introduction Dialog o 21 MET TEMP II Test Display c o 25h 4 cacra rss 22 Equipment Info Dial g ss y ee miesas cerere tiniu ods 25 File Meni s mesce au ra aea EES ee eae Eee eR eae 31 General ab esca See a eee Ee eR EERE 33 Set pownts Ta s i oia a ele eh a ea ee hs A 35 Fixed Points Dialog p je fa eA ee ee e ee Oe 36 Edit Fixed Point Dialog o o e 37 New Fixed Point Dialog s lt o e secs siasat aduk onana 39 Setup Labi hostia oe adie a a eae He eee ad 41 Graph Tab e 4 beth se ee Seou eh Po bin GaSe ES 42 Reports Tabs gts ae wy Hea BR ee Se ee eA 44 Text Editor Dialog s s saspe sci ge AS ee eo OH ee he G 46 User Tabi cs4 ib bv rr 2h beaee eee eee bocce Soe 47 Test Tab 2c eee ev aes eS ee pee ee ee a ee ew os 48 Fonts amp SIZES Tab ict cee ee Se be eRe ORR SE ER Se SE 51 MET TRACK Tab cig 6h ad bee a ee a e A 52 SmartSwitth Tab 2p iew se oo ee a ee Basie dee eed 55 Print Test Report Dialog 2 2 ee 56 Configuration Meda 59 Install Drivers Dialog lt s e s eden a a eG 59 Communications Port Configuration Dialog 61 Check SmartSwitch Dialog 6 port SmartSwitch Selected 62 Check SmartSwitch Dialog 8 Port SmartSwitch Selecte
7. Example Heat Source Report of Calibration Page2 Set points Tab so oae ee ee ee ee A Fixed Pomts Dialog ss ho eG we Rw A a es G A Heat Source Configuration Dialog 04 Set point Configuration Dialog o oo Fixed Pomts Dialog as ema eR ee a a Example Configuration for Performing a Heat Source Calibration Figure 83 Reference Readout Configuration Dialog 163 Figure 84 Test Probes Configuration Dialog 164 Figure 85 Heat Source Configuration Dialog 0 166 Figure 86 Set point Configuration Dialog 00 168 Figure 87 Equipment Info Dialo8 170 Figure 88 Print Test Report Dialog o 172 Figure 89 Locate MET TRACK Asset Dialog 174 Figure 90 MET TRACK 7 Edit a Calibration Record Dialog 176 Figure 91 MET TRACK 7 Full Results Dialog 2 2 177 Figure 92 MET TRACK Export Tolerances Dialog 178 Figure 93 Coefficients and Tables Main Display 183 Figure 94 Platinum Probe Coefficients Dialog ITS 90 185 Figure 95 Platinum Probe Coefficients Dialog Polynomial 186 Figure 96 Thermistor Probe Coefficients Dialog 187 Figure 97 Thermocouple Probe Coefficients Dialog Type K 188 Figure 98 Calculate Coefficients Dialog o oo 190 Figure 99 Insuf
8. After performing a calibration the calibration test data can be exported to the MET TRACK database If characterization coefficients need to be calculated for a probe this must be done prior to exporting the calibration test data to MET TRACK Calculate the coefficients then select the Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK option in the Utilities menu 1 Introduction 15 1 7 1 8 1 8 1 Required DLL and VBX Files MET TEMP II requires certain DLL and VBX files to function properly All required files are shipped on the installation CD A list of these files and their required date stamp can be found in the README TXT file in the folder where MET TEMP II is installed Connection of Instruments Before configuring MET TEMP II for a test the test equipment instruments to be used should be connected MET TEMP II can be configured to use many combinations of instruments The instruments that you use should be deter mined by the requirements of the test probes being calibrated and the desired results The following is a brief description of the test equipment required by MET TEMP II Table 1 Instrument Connections Instrument Status Comments SmartSwitch Required The SmartSwitch is used to connect multiple instruments to a single COM port on the computer Use the cable provided Reference Optional The Reference Readout is typically a thermometer readout with a ref Readout erence probe attached Use a null modem
9. Customer Information Dialog oaa o SmartSwitch Port Conflict Dialog Incomplete Setup Setup Information Dialog Communication Error Dialog ooa Enter Data Dialogs ooe a ei eae a Ga n a RE eee Test Information Dialog 2 e Stability Override Dialog o o Scale Men 2 24 64 ei we eee ee a OEE Se ee Graph Menu sorp Ha a Oe ee ea a eae Graph Settings Dialog o o e Witlities Mente gt pe e y ar ie de RO SRE Maintain Equipment Dialog o o Maintain Test Results Dialog o o Invalid Test Dialog sance win pe reirse oe a E a Edit Test Information Dialog 0 Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Dialog Help Menu atlas eee ia de oe oe Shee dae 4 About MET TEMP II Dialog o Set point Options Dialog o o Enter Order ID Dialog o o Example Default Report of Calibration Temperature vs Resistance Data o o Example Default Report of Calibration Temperature vs Temperature Data o Print Custom Report of Calibration Dialog Example of Custom Pass Fail Report of Calibration Tolerance Dialog 0 2020 2d Ew Ee e N Print Heat Source Report of Calibration Example Heat Source Report of Calibration Pagel
10. 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 187 15 5 1 2 Calculating Thermistor Coefficients To calculate coefficients for Thermistor probes select the Thermistor Probe op tion in the Coefficients menu The Thermistor Probe Coefficients dialog is dis played Thermistor Probe Coefficients xi l Calculation Options Type of coefficients to calculate Polynomial M Steinhart Hart Order 3rd Order M Cancel Figure 96 Thermistor Probe Coefficients Dialog Select the type of coefficients to calculate using the Type of coefficients to cal culate drop down list For Thermistor probes the only choice is Polynomial Both T R and R T polynomial coefficients are calculated The order of the polynomial must be selected using the Order drop down list The application can calculate from 3rd to 6th order polynomials for Thermistor probes Note The number of coefficients calculated is always one more than the order of the polynomial i e for a 3rd order polynomial 4 coefficients are calculated The minimum number of set points required must exceed the order of the polynomial by at least 1 Select whether or not the Steinhart Hart method should be used The coeffi cients are calculated by checking or unchecking the Steinhart Hart check box When this option is selected the third coefficient squared term is set to 0 0 Refer to Section 15 12 4 Polynomial Requirements for more information about the Stein
11. NewFGatures ed ow Be Se Be a E E s 181 15 2 1 Version AiG gis a ara we wl a Goat GS Ae GF Gate BA E ao Re ei A 181 15 2 2 Version On d a wd a alk AG ee ha dd de eh a gS aoe a 182 15 3 Main Display eo suis Sa ee ES 183 154 Toolbars cobrara ad oe ee oe Slee es 183 15 5 Calculating Characterization Coefficients 184 15 5 1 Calculating Coefficients e r om ie a ee oe ee Oe 184 15 5 1 1 Calculating PRT RTD Coefficients os oeta ee A 185 15 5 1 2 Calculating Thermistor Coefficients 0 20 0 000 000 2000 187 15 5 1 3 Calculating Thermocouple Coefficients s s s ss scere 0200020004 188 15 5 1 4 Calculate Coefficients Dialog ooo eee ee ac a G 190 ISSS Select Setpoint Dialogs co a ted Soto weg Ge dee eS Ee BLA eke ola eg 192 15 5 1 6 Coefficients and Residuals Dialog sc rara anent hha a 194 15 5 1 7 Print Reports of Calibration and Tables lt s ss sesa eree a oo 195 15 5 1 8 ReportOptions Dialog s oera a rr as SP Ee See ee 198 15 5 148 1 Report Sections a a e o RA a aed a Qe anda 8 Binds 199 SNES Template Settings Tab weve is A fee ae ears 200 Prahaa Foni A Sizes Tabs ios rai e A ween desta asta egal 201 15 5 1 9 Table Options Dialog ssi h i ods hake ees whos cee ae Re aes BASE cda 202 INS9A Type and Range Tab aii ss cera a herd e Spada Sit cr to sah r dares ro oat aa 203 15 31 9 2 gt Resolutions TAD a aera a a as iva age ee ety Sa aay doe Gud ane gS ea REE 204 15 1 9 3 Other Sett
12. gt 124 Utilities Menu 125 8 6 8 7 8 7 1 indicated by the gt indicator in the far left column of the grid If no match is found the first record in the table is the current record Columns that appear in black text with a light gray background cannot be ed ited Columns that appear in blue text with a white background can be edited All columns can be resized as needed However when switching between ta bles the default column widths are restored To change the information in a certain field position the cursor on the field to edit and type in the new value Copying and pasting are also enabled to facili tate entering a large amount of data into a field such as the paragraph or test notes fields Some fields such as the company address paragraph and test notes allow the lt Enter gt key to be used to create multi line entries When entering new values in certain fields a message may appear stating that the entered data is invalid for the current field For example this message will be displayed if you attempt to enter a number into a field that expects a True or False value Correct the new value to continue Some fields allow NULL values empty field while others require some value A message is displayed if you attempt to leave a field empty that requires some value Important Once the value in a field has been changed or deleted it is per manently gone Be very careful to not change any value
13. 4 5 1 Heat Source Configuration Dialog The Heat Source Configuration dialog is used to select the instrument s to use as heat sources Heat Source Configuration xi Heat Source Configuration Drivers X Enable communications during configuration owes Use heat sources as reference Calibrate heat source i Check Port How many heat sources will be used for this test One O Two Three Four Model number Serial number SmartSwitch port m e ed Manufacturer Controller address Description Furnace Calibratior Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number s NS A23 Test Calibration Compatibility Figure 35 Heat Source Configuration Dialog MET TEMP II can use up to four heat sources to perform a calibration MET TEMP II expects the reference probe and all test probes to be placed in one heat source at a time MET TEMP II only supports a single reference probe therefore only one heat source can be used at a time Multiple heat sources can be used to increase the possible temperature range of a calibration When configuring the set points for the calibration each set point must be as signed to a heat source When using more than one heat source the software prompts the user throughout the calibration process to move the reference probe and the test probes to the appropriate heat source Note When using MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source only one heat source can be c
14. 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 7 File Menu The File menu provides options for exporting data and coefficients setting up program defaults setting up the printer printing a report and table and exiting the program New Ctrl N Open Ctrl 0 Save As Ctrl S Defaults Ctrl D Setup Printer Ctrl R Print Report Ctrl P Recall Saved Report Glose Test trit Exit Figure 120 File Menu The following sections describe each of these options 15 7 1 va Export Data Selecting the Export Data option displays the Export Data dialog for exporting test data acquired by MET TEMP II to text files The process of exporting test data is explained in Section 15 6 1 Export Data 15 7 2 Export Coefficients Selecting the Export Coefficients option displays the Export Coefficients dialog for exporting coefficients calculated to text files The process of exporting coef ficients is explained in Section 15 6 3 Export Coefficients 15 7 3 w Defaults Selecting the Defaults option displays the Defaults dialog for selecting or modi fying default settings Default values or parameters can be set by selecting one of five tabs General Coefficients Reports Tables or Directories These de faults are used each time the application is started Each of the settings on these tabs is described in detail in the following sections 216 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 217 General Tab The General
15. Hart Scientific 9938 MET TEMP Il Automated Calibration Software User s Guide Rev 582401 Rev 582401 Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division Hart warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a pe riod as stated in our current product catalog from the date of shipment This war ranty extends only to the original purchaser and shall not apply to any product which in Hart s sole opinion has been subject to misuse alteration abuse or abnor mal conditions of operation or handling Software is warranted to operate in accordance with its programmed instructions on appropriate Hart products It is not warranted to be error free Hart s obligation under this warranty is limited to repair or replacement of a product which is returned to Hart within the warranty period and is determined upon exam ination by Hart to be defective If Hart determines that the defect or malfunction has been caused by misuse alteration abuse or abnormal conditions or operation or handling Hart will repair the product and bill the purchaser for the reasonable cost of repair To exercise this warranty the purchaser must forward the product after calling or writing Hart for authorization Hart assumes NO risk for in transit damage For service or assistance please contact the manufacturer THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS PURCHASER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF
16. Possible Cause Solution Able to communicate with SmartSwitch but unable to com municate with instruments Wrong type of RS 232 cable be ing used Make sure the RS 232 cable is null modem type cable Instrument baud rate setting incorrect All instruments MUST be configured to operate at 2400 baud Check baud rate setting of instrument Wrong SmartSwitch port selected Select the SmartSwitch port that the RS 232 cable is connected to on the appropriate configuration dialog Make sure LED on SmartSwitch for selected port is on Bad RS 232 cable Try using a known good null modem cable Instrument not turned on or cable not connected Make sure the instrument is powered up and the RS 232 cable is connected Reset the instrument by turning power off and on again SmartSwitch port defective Try using another SmartSwitch port Configuration Problems Unable to successfully open con figuration files from previous ver sions of MET TEMP II formerly known as Calibrate it Configuration files need to be updated Manually create the configuration again and save it to a new configu ration file Correct model does not appear in drop down list for instrument or probe Instrument driver has not been installed Install the driver for the instrument using the Install Drivers option in the Configuration menu Correct reference probe type not selected For refere
17. e Range 4 83 8058 K to 273 1600 K e Range 5 234 3156 K to 302 9146 K High Range e None e Range 6 273 1500 K to 1234 9300 K 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide e Range 7 273 1500 K to 933 4730 K e Range 8 273 1500 K to 692 6770 K e Range 9 273 1500 K to 505 0780 K e Range 10 273 1500 K to 429 7485 K e Range 11 273 1500 K to 302 9146 K A Note The temperature ranges indicated are displayed in Kelvin and are 186 intended for convenience only If Polynomial is selected the order of the polynomial must be selected using the Order drop down list This application can calculate from 3rd to 9th order polynomials for PRT RTD probes Platinum Probe Coefficients xi l Calculation Options Type of coefficients to calculate Polynomial v Le Order 4th Order Es Le Figure 95 Platinum Probe Coefficients Dialog Polynomial Note The number of coefficients calculated is always one more than the order of the polynomial i e for a 4th order polynomial 5 coefficients are calculated The minimum number of set points required must exceed the order of the polynomial by at least 1 If IPTS 68 or Callendar Van Dusen is selected no additional settings are required Click the OK button to continue and display the Calculate Coefficients dialog refer to Section 15 5 1 4 Calculate Coefficients Dialog Click the Cancel button to abort calculating coefficients and return to the Main Display
18. o 10 Using MET TEMP II with MET TRACK 12 Required DLL and VBX Files 15 Connection of Instruments s socpp cce awane w ak pa e 15 1 8 1 Computer to SmartSwitch oea sesa ee ee 15 1 8 2 Reference Readout to SmartSwitch ooa a 16 1 8 3 Scanner to SmartSwitCh e 3 665668 280 aso RES RSG 17 1 8 4 Heat Sources toSmartSwitch oys seaca ee 17 1 8 5 Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer to SmartSwitch 17 MET TEMP II Main Display o o 18 TOO DAE gt ri WS da de e a 19 MET TEMP II Introduction Dialog 20 MET TEMP II Test Display o 21 2 Configuring a Test 24 6 e460 6d eee ee eee 25 2 1 2 2 Comparison Fixed Point and Mixed Calibrations 26 Heat Source Calibrations 27 3 File Menu 31 3 1 3 2 33 3 4 NEW a eoep sede dl a ow a Ae ee E 31 OPM puerco ese amp oe eet a ies Hake eee A 31 Save A Ss UR a OD ee aoe a 32 DetaUltS sii dol 4 i abe e ee he Ee Hw AR BS 32 3 4 1 General Tabs s e sorp ee we a a ee eG wee 33 ij 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 4 2 Setspolts Tabo oda Gas Bis Wier oe GBs Ge We Ricks Soe a aS 35 34 2 1 Fixed Points Dialogs 0 020 il aide a a eR RG Sy aoe 36 3 4 2 1 1 Edit Fixed Point Dialog eee 37 3 4 2 1 2 New Fixed Point Dialog o 39 3 4 3 Setup TaB s si san te bh we Re BR a we ae e
19. 251 Type and Range tab 203 U Uncertainty 35 86 92 94 136 169 Underline 51 201 Units 45 Updates 1 USB 16 User tab 46 Utilities 119 Utilities menu 223 U JUT 27 48 96 120 123 184 229 230 233 234 Index V Validate test 121 224 Version 128 227 View Set points 93 Voltage 184 234 W W 236 Window 35 86 92 93 111 169 X X axis 42 115 Y Y axis 42 115 Z Zoom 33 34 217 240 259
20. 42 00 29 800197 0 1005722 103 00 35 879011 0 0987060 164 00 41 844585 0 0968596 43 00 29 900769 0 1005414 104 00 35 977717 0 0986756 165 00 41 941445 0 0968295 44 00 30 001311 0 1005107 105 00 36 076393 0 0986452 166 00 42 038274 0 0967994 45 00 30 101821 0 1004799 106 00 36 175038 0 0986148 167 00 42 135074 0 0967693 46 00 30 202301 0 1004491 107 00 36 273652 0 0985844 168 00 42 231843 0 0967392 47 00 30 302750 0 1004184 108 00 36 372237 0 0985539 169 00 42 328582 0 0967091 48 00 30 403169 0 1003877 109 00 36 470791 0 0985235 170 00 42 425291 0 0966791 49 00 30 503556 0 1003569 110 00 36 569314 0 0984932 171 00 42 521970 0 0966490 50 00 30 603913 0 1003262 111 00 36 667807 0 0984628 172 00 42 618619 0 0966189 51 00 30 704240 0 1002955 112 00 36 766270 0 0984324 173 00 42 715238 0 0965889 52 00 30 804535 0 1002648 113 00 36 864703 0 0984020 174 00 42 811827 0 0965588 53 00 30 904800 0 1002341 114 00 36 963105 0 0983716 175 00 42 908386 0 0965288 54 00 31 005034 0 1002034 115 00 37 061476 0 0983412 176 00 43 004915 0 0964987 55 00 31 105237 0 1001727 116 00 37 159817 0 0983109 177 00 43 101414 0 0964687 56 00 31 205410 0 1001420 117 00 37 258128 0 0982805 178 00 43 197882 0 0964387 57 00 31 305552 0 1001113 118 00 37 356409 0 0982502 179 00 43 294321 0 0964087 58 00 31 405663 0 1000807 119 00 37 454659 0 0982198 180 00 43 390730 0 0963786 59 00 31 505744 0 1000500 120 00 37 552879 0 0981895 181 00 43 487108 0 0963486 60 00 31 605794 0 1000193 121 00 37 6510
21. 8 7 1 Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Dialog 125 iti 9 Help Men 0 0 oe ee Bw wR a Hw we e 127 9 1 Contents 24 5 bode i eked os ete is eed 127 9 2 Search for Help On o o 127 9 3 Getting Started ck seas ae 127 94 Technical Support s sicr See egal a e E E 127 95 About MET TEMP H ou 25 e248 yk we ee oe ee ors 2 128 10 Configuration Files 129 10 1 Instrument Configuration File 4 129 10 2 Set point Configuration File o 130 10 2 1 Set point Options Dialog 6 4 0 4 ea ae ec ee aa 131 10 3 Test Probe Configuration File 131 10 3 1 Enter Order ID Dialogs sess a a Age ws EE Se A 133 11 Reports of Calibration 2 2 2 2 2 135 11 1 Default Report of Calibration 00 0 135 11 2 Custom Reports of Calibration 139 1121 Pass Fail Report of Calibration o a o o e o 139 12 11 Tolerance Dialogs 00006 les rei a poe Ge eo Gnd alone as 143 11 2 1 2 Changing Tolerance Valdes i sa spea ga a ER Re eee 143 11 2 2 Heat Source Report of Calibration oo ooo 145 12 Performing Calibrations Using Fixed Points 151 12 1 Configuring Fixed Point Cells 151 12 2 Configuring MET TEMP II to Perform Fixed Point Only Calibrations 153 12 2 1 Fixed Point Reference Readout Configuration o
22. A custom logo can also be added to the upper left corner of the Report of Calibration us ing the settings on this tab Reports of Calibration can be saved to a report file from the Print Preview win dow and opened viewed and printed by selecting the Recall Saved Report op tion from the File menu or by running the Report Viewer utility Refer to Section 17 Report Viewer Utility for more details The report number is printed on each page of the Report of Calibration The re port number is a unique number consisting of the test number and the scanner channel to which the test probe was connected These two pieces of informa tion are concatenated together with a dash The test probe information consists of the test probe model number serial num ber and description This information is printed at the top of the first page along with the calibration range received condition excitation current used and test procedure number The paragraph text is the text entered as the paragraph on the Test Information dialog The default paragraph to use can be defined on the Report tab on the Defaults dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 136 The raw data section contains the readings taken by the software If the Stabil ity Override menu option was used on any set point during the test the set point will be marked and a footnote will appear at the bottom of the raw data section stating that the stability parameters were overridden for the
23. Figure 107 Fonts amp Sizes Tab To set the font that is used when printing the title on the default Report of Cali bration change the settings in the Default Report of Calibration Title section To set the font that is used when printing the rest of the text main body on the default Report of Calibration change the settings in the Default Report of Cali bration Body section e Select the name of the font to use from the Select the font to use drop down list e Increase or decrease the size of the font by selecting a setting from the Font Size drop down list e Change the font style options by checking or unchecking the Bold Italics and or Underline boxes e The current settings are displayed in the Example Text box at the bottom of this tab Click the Reset Defaults button to restore the default settings The default set tings are as follows e Title font settings Times New Roman 14 point Bold 201 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide e Body font settings Times New Roman 10 point A Note Changing these settings does not change the font settings used on custom Reports of Calibration that are not included with this application The changes are applied only to the default Report of Calibration which is built into the software 15 5 1 9 Table Options Dialog The Table Options dialog is displayed when the Table Options button is clicked on the Print Reports and Tables dialog x Table Options for ITS 90 tables
24. II does not match the manufacturer information in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer information in the MET TRACK inventory re cord in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP IL Note MET TEMP II cannot calibrate all of the heat source models MET TEMP II performs a check when the OK button is clicked to ensure that MET TEMP II supports calibrating the selected heat source model If the se lected heat source model cannot be calibrated a message is displayed at this time To determine if a particular heat source can be calibrated click the Test Cali bration Compatibility button MET TEMP II will attempt to determine if the connected heat source responds to the commands that are required to success fully calibrate the heat source If the heat source does not respond to the com mands an error message is displayed Otherwise a message is displayed indicating the heat source responded successfully to the commands Clicking the Customer button displays the Customer Information dialog for en tering more information about the heat source being calibrated Click the OK button to close the Heat Source Configuration dialog Configure Set points The last step to configuring MET TEMP II to perform a heat source calibration is to configure the set points to use to calibrate the heat source Click the 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Set points
25. Polynomial Selecting this range allows the software to automatically select the appropriate reference function to use to calculate the EMF at each tem perature Selecting one of the other ranges forces the reference function for the selected range to calculate the EMF for ALL temperatures to be used 6 Each set point for thermocouple probes can have an associated Cold Junction Compensation CJC reading The UUT reading at each set point is adjusted according to the CJC value for that set point prior to calculating coefficients The UUT readings are not adjusted prior to cal culating coefficients if the Do not use CJC in calculations option is selected 7 The residuals are calculated for each set point used in calculating the co efficients For thermocouple probes the residuals are in the same scale as the UUT readings mV or uV 235 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 12 6 15 12 6 1 15 12 6 2 236 Methods Used for Calculating Coefficients The following sections describe the methods used to calculate coefficients General The thermometric expressions used by this software are well known expres sions and as such are described in detail elsewhere This section touches on some specifics as they relate to the methods used to arrive at solutions The coefficients for all solutions with the exception of the IPTS 68 platinum probe are calculated using matrix methods The IPTS 68 platinum probe solu tion is cal
26. To Serial Port Thermometer Readout Scanner Computer Dry Well Heat Source To Serial Port To Serial Port Straight Through Cable Smart Switc pogo TO A a 5 To PORT A Bath To PORT C Heat Source To PORT D To PORT F G or H To Serial Port Null Modem Cables DewK Thermohygrometer To Serial Port Figure 4 Example Computer and Instrument Cable Connections Model G UC232A USB PDA Serial Adapter Not all USB to RS 232 adapters may work in conjunction with the SmartSwitch box The adapter mentioned above has been tested by Hart and determined to work properly 1 8 2 Reference Readout to SmartSwitch Connect the serial port of the instrument to one of the SmartSwitch ports typi cally port A using a null modem cable When configuring the reference read out select the SmartSwitch port to which the instrument is connected 1 Introduction 17 1 8 3 1 8 4 1 8 5 Scanner to SmartSwitch If the same instrument is being used as both the reference readout and the scan ner or if all UUT readings are to be entered manually skip this section No scanner connections are required Connect the serial port of the instrument to one of the SmartSwitch ports typi cally port B using a null modem cable When configuring the scanner select the SmartS
27. Windows Open dialog is displayed Select the configuration file to open and click the OK button Refer to Section 3 2 Open for more information on open ing a configuration file To disable the display of the MET TEMP II Introduction dialog when the soft ware is executed check the Do not display this dialog when program starts check box before clicking the OK button This option can be enabled again on the General tab of the Defaults dialog Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog and displays the MET TEMP II Main Display MET TEMP II Test Display When a test is running the MET TEMP II Test Display window displays infor mation pertaining to the calibration test that is being performed 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Once a calibration test is started the MET TEMP II Main Display changes into the MET TEMP II Test Display 2 MET TEMP II o ME File Calibration Graph Help MERREM Hom E TetSttus Set point 75 00 C Elapsed time 00 16 54 Window 0 250 C nio 785 08220 C ooo Duration 1 min Heat Source 9105 RI QA pp lp pp IA AA Technician Name Cal E Breight 7 2560 12345 __ 3 5614 123456 r Display reading of Test Number CE200301161 2 2562 12345 6 5614 123457 selected test probe Test Date 1 7 2003 125 24870 Ohms Ambient Conditions 79 7 F 32 RH Taken at 10 22 52 AM Friday August 13 2004 10 22 52 AM Figure 7 MET TEMP II Test Display The Test S
28. and temperature vs EMF tables This software also allows data that was acquired during a test as well as calcu lated coefficients to be exported to an ASCII text file This data can then be easily imported into a spreadsheet or other application New Features Version 4 1 A list of new features and enhancements in version 4 1 of the Coefficients and Tables application follows Adjustable Margins and Table Column Widths The top bottom left and right margins on the Report of Calibration are now adjustable To set the margins select the Defaults option in the File menu in MET TEMP II and click on the Reports tab This tab also allows the column widths of the Test Equipment table to be adjusted Print Custom Logo on Report of Calibration A custom logo can now be added to the Report of Calibration The logo ap pears in the upper left corner of the Report of Calibration To set the logo to use select the Defaults option in the File menu in MET TEMP Il and click on the Reports tab Bug Fixes In addition to the new features listed above the following known bugs and other issues have been fixed 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Printing to network printers When attempting to print to a network printer an error would sometimes occur stating the printer was not available This issue has been resolved KB0013 General Protection Fault error When using Windows 2000 XP a GPF er ror in module DWVSTAMP VBX would occur w
29. information is completely filled in See the list below for details of missing or incorrect setup information Reference Readout OK Reference Probe Scanner Serial number Heat Source 1 OK Figure 49 Incomplete Setup Setup Information Dialog If MET TEMP II finds that more than one instrument has been assigned to the same SmartSwitch port the SmartSwitch Port Conflict dialog is displayed The instruments with the conflict are indicated To resolve this issue simply select the correct SmartSwitch port for each instrument using the drop down lists Check the cable connections to ensure correct SmartSwitch port assignments Click the OK button to accept the new settings and continue Clicking the Can cel button aborts starting the calibration test SmartSwitch Port Conflict xi SmartSwitch Port Conflict There is a SmartSwitch port conflict between two instruments Change the port setting for one instrument or the other below to resolve the conflict Reference A Cancel zi Heat Source 1 A M Figure 48 SmartSwitch Port Conflict Dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide A Note The only situation where MET TEMP II allows two instruments to 104 be assigned the same SmartSwitch port is when using a dual well heat source that has two separate controllers but a single communication port After checking the configuration information MET TEMP II attempts to com municate with
30. log are disabled Click the OK button to close the Reference Readout Configuration dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 13 2 4 Configure Scanner The third step to configuring MET TEMP II to perform a heat source calibra tion is to configure the scanner Click the Scanner button on the Equipment Info dialog or select the Scanner option from the Configuration menu The Scanner Configuration dialog is displayed When calibrating a heat source MET TEMP II actually uses the scanner as if it was the reference readout and the test probe is if it was the reference probe Se lect the instrument to use as the scanner If the selected instrument requires the use of modules or a multiplexer click the Modules button to configure the modules or multiplexer Refer to Section 4 4 1 Scanner Configuration Dialog for more information on configuring the scanner Click the OK button to close the Scanner Configuration dialog 13 2 5 Configure Test Probes The fourth step to configuring MET TEMP II to perform a heat source calibra tion is to configure the test probe Click the Test Probes button on the Equip ment Info dialog or select the Test Probes option from the Calibration menu The Test Probes Configuration dialog is displayed Test Probe Configuration xj Test Probe Configuration Modules Channels 12560 16 2 Clear All Channels Clear Channel Model number Serial number 5614 350384 Probe type Report unit
31. resistance vs temperature relationships and the polynomials used are exponen tial expressions in terms of resistance vs temperature The polynomials can be of any order up to 9th for platinum probes and up to 6th for thermistor probes The software allows for over determined solutions Thermocouple probes re quire polynomials expressed in terms of mV vs temperature Table Temperature Range Chart Due to the nature of the equations used to generate tables the temperature range that can or should be used to generate a table depends on the type of co efficients used Table 3 provides details on the temperature range for specific coefficients Table 3 Temperature Range Recommendations ITS 90 c F K Range Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp 4 189 0 0 0 308 2 32 0 84 2 273 2 5 39 0 30 0 38 2 86 0 234 2 303 2 6 0 0 962 0 32 0 1763 6 273 2 1235 2 7 0 0 660 0 32 0 1220 0 273 2 933 2 8 0 0 420 0 32 0 788 0 273 2 693 2 9 0 0 232 0 32 0 449 6 273 2 505 2 237 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 10 0 0 157 0 32 0 314 0 273 2 430 2 11 0 0 30 0 32 0 86 0 273 2 303 2 IPTS 68 c F K Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp 230 0 2650 0 382 0 4802 0 43 2 2923 2 CVD c F K BETA Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp No 0 0 2650 0 32 0 4802 0 273 2 2923 2 Yes 260 0 2650 0 436 0 4802 0 13 2 2923 2 POLYNOMIAL c F K Probe Type Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp M
32. run MET TEMP II to verify all existing test data was successfully copied from the Calibrate it database to the MET TEMP II database Calibrate it and Generate it can now be uninstalled from your computer You will have to manually delete the HART9932 folder and all subfolders from your hard drive using Windows Explorer Uninstalling MET TEMP II To uninstall the software use the Windows Add Remove Programs icon in the Control Panel Follow the instructions given The program files are removed from your system with the following exceptions e USERDRVR MDB database in the DATABASE folder contains test data 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide e DRIVERS MDB database in the DATABASE folder e Any configuration files CFG TPC STC STF etc in the CONFIG folder e Any Report files RPT in the REPORTS folder e Any Paragraph or Notes files PGH TXT in the REPORTS folder e Any other files created by the software since it was installed The files mentioned above along with the folders that these files are in must be manually deleted using Windows Explorer to remove them from your system A Important Before deleting the USERDRVR MDB file make sure that you do not need to keep any of the data from tests that have been performed Once this file is deleted all test data is lost 1 5 Running MET TEMP Il A Important To use MET TEMP II Windows login accounts must be granted full access to the folder to
33. select the Use custom report template option on the Print Test Report dialog Click the Browse button and select the PASSFAIL EXE file in the REPORTS subfolder Clicking the Print button on the Print Test Report dialog launches this custom report 11 Reports of Calibration 141 Reports of Calibration can be saved to a report file from the Print Preview win dow and opened viewed and printed by selecting the Recall Saved Report op tion from the File menu or by running the Report Viewer Utility Refer to Section 17 Report Viewer Utility for more details The layout of this custom report is nearly identical to the default report ex plained in section 11 1 Default Report of Calibration Notable differences are indicated below e This custom report requires the test probe readings to be taken in the same scale as the reference probe readings C or F If the test probe readings are taken in resistance or voltage this report cannot be printed e The Tolerance column in the raw data section of this report displays the values entered by the user on the Tolerance dialog The scale of the values in this column is based on the scale of the values in the UUT column C or F Each set point on the report has its own associated tolerance value e The Result column in the raw data section of this report displays the pass fail status of the test probe at each set point This column displays ei ther the word Pass if the value in the Error col
34. serial number reference value method of real ization manufacturer description and calibration and recalibration dates can be edited 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 38 The serial number for all fixed point cells defaults to 0 Before a fixed point cell can be used by MET TEMP II its serial number must be set Enter the se rial number for the fixed point cell in the Serial number box Enter the reference value for this fixed point cell in the Reference value box By default this value is set to the nominal value for each fixed point cell Note The reference value must ALWAYS be entered in degrees C regardless of the scale being used for the test MET TEMP II will convert the reference value to degrees F as needed Select the method of realization for this fixed point cell using the Method of re alization drop down list Many fixed point cells can be used at either the melt ing point MP freezing point FP or triple point TP This setting is printed on the Report of Calibration Enter the manufacturer and description information for this fixed point cell in the boxes provided The Calibration and Recalibration dates are optional and can be selected using the drop down calendars provided If the Calibration and Recalibration dates are not entered NCR appears on the Report of Calibration in the Recall Date column Click the Reset button to clear dates from these boxes When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset n
35. set points indicated The raw data section may be different depending on the type of test probe being calibrated the units of the readings taken and the in struments used to take the readings e The Nominal Value Actual Value UUT and Measurement Uncertainty columns always print e The Error column prints only if the units for the Actual Value and UUT columns are in temperature and are the same scale e The CJC column prints only if the test probe is a thermocouple type probe and CJC readings were taken e The Method of Realization column prints only if the test was performed using MET TEMP II v4 0 or later The Test Equipment section lists each of the instruments that were used to per form the calibration Each instrument s manufacturer model description serial number and recall date is indicated For instruments that do not require calibra tion NCR is printed in the Recall Date column The notes text is the text entered as the notes on the Test Information dialog The calibration date is the date the test started This date is entered on the Test Information dialog The recall date is the date the test probe or test equipment is due for recalibration For the test probe this date is calculated by adding the calibration interval entered on the Test Probe Configuration dialog to the calibration date For the test equipment the user enters this date on the configuration dialogs Recall date is synonymous with recalibration
36. 1 30 100 C 38 834 C 0012 156 599 C 231 928 C o l 0 0 0 6 2340 Ohms 21 5675 Ohms 25 5495 Ohms 41 1268 Ohms 48 3559 Ohms 1 30 00 C 39 00 C 0 01 C 156 00 C 232 00 C 3 0 0 0 0 0 1 FT Edt Normal Pivot Figure 91 MET TRACK 7 Full Results Dialog 14 1 Tolerances The Tolerances dialog allows the user to enter a tolerance value for each set point for a UUT This dialog is displayed when exporting temperature vs temperature calibration data to the MET TRACK database if the Prompt for tol 177 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide erance and determine Pass field setting automatically option on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog is selected x l Tolerances Enter the tolerance values for asset number 5614 367543 Setpoint Actual Error Tolerance 0 0518 0 01 0 0102 0 0002 25 00 25 0231 0 0112 50 00 50 0212 0 0305 75 00 75 0049 75 0021 0 0028 100 00 99 9709 ehh ae 0 0276 125 00 124 9844 125 0321 0 0477 Cancel Figure 92 MET TRACK Export Tolerances Dialog A Note This dialog is only displayed the first time the calibration data for a UUT is exported The entered tolerance values are stored in the MET TEMP II database and used automatically if the same data is ex ported again Enter the tolerance value at each set point for the indicated asset The tolerance values are
37. 12 12 1 A Performing Calibrations Using Fixed Points MET TEMP II now includes the capability of performing calibrations using fixed point cells MET TEMP II can perform calibrations using fixed point cells only or fixed point set points can be mixed in with comparison set points Important MET TEMP II allows calibrations to be performed using fixed point cells only or by mixing fixed point set points with comparison set points as a convenience to the user It is assumed that if you are using these features you are familiar with the process and theory of performing calibrations using fixed point cells This User s Guide does not provide any detailed information as to how to perform fixed point calibrations and shall not be used as a substitute for proper training and source of infor mation on such topics For more information on performing calibrations using fixed point cells please refer to the currently available literature Hart periodically offers training seminars on using fixed point cells NIST is also a good source of information on this topic Configuring Fixed Point Cells Before MET TEMP II can perform calibration tests using fixed point cells the fixed point cells to use must be configured MET TEMP II ships with built in support for many fixed point cells Support for any fixed point cell can be added to MET TEMP II at any time 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide To configure fixed point cells select the Defaults
38. 13 3 13 4 Finish configuring the test information on this dialog for the heat source cali bration Refer to Section 5 5 2 Test Information Dialog for more details Note When selecting the resolution setting for the readings it is recommended that a setting of 3 decimal places or more be used The set point resistance readings from the heat source are typically formatted to 3 decimal places Using less resolution will most likely decrease the quality of the calibration Click the OK button to close this dialog and start the calibration test Performing Heat Source Calibrations Heat source calibrations are performed in a similar manner to comparison cali brations MET TEMP II sets the heat source to the first set point waits until the display of the heat source reaches the set point and stabilizes counts down the duration time and takes readings This process is repeated for all configured As Found set points Since MET TEMP II must be configured to use the heat source as the reference to perform heat source calibrations the graph and display show the current heat source temperature as indicated on the heat source s display When MET TEMP II takes the readings the readings that are taken from the test probe in temperature are stored in the database as the reference readings MET TEMP II then takes set point resistance readings from the heat source and stores them in the database as the UUT readings After MET TEMP II has tak
39. 149 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Report of Calibration Report No CE200205119 004 Page 2 of 2 Model 9105 Serial A21345 As Found Data Test Data Set point Actual Error Tolerance Set point Calibration Coefficients C C C C Pass Fail Resistance RO 100 398 25 00 24 940 0 060 0 010 F 90 646 ALPHA 0 00381830 0 00 0 070 0 070 0 010 F 100 397 DELTA 1 5229 75 00 74 990 0 010 0 010 P 129 259 BETA 2 0705 140 00 139 830 0 170 0 010 F 153 738 As Left Data Test Data Set point Actual Error Tolerance Set point Calibration Coefficients C C C C Pass Fail Resistance RO 100 370 140 00 140 000 0 000 0 010 P 153 800 ALPHA 0 00382448 125 00 124 990 0 010 0 010 P 148 178 DELTA 1 4368 100 00 99 990 0 010 0 010 P 138 756 BETA 2 9080 75 00 74 990 0 010 0 010 P 129 265 50 00 49 990 0 010 0 010 P 119 700 25 00 25 010 0 010 0 010 P 110 067 0 00 0 010 0 010 0 010 P 100 372 25 00 25 020 0 020 0 010 F 90 621 0 00 0 000 0 000 0 010 P 100 372 25 00 25 020 0 020 0 010 F 110 067 50 00 50 000 0 000 0 010 P 119 700 75 00 74 990 0 010 0 010 P 129 265 100 00 99 990 0 010 0 010 P 138 756 125 00 124 990 0 010 0 010 P 148 178 140 00 139 990 0 010 0 010 P 153 800 This report shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval of Temp Tech Co Figure 74 Example Heat Source Report of Calibration Page 2 150 12 Performing Calibrations Using Fixed Points 151
40. 153 12 2 2 Fixed Point Heat Source Configuration s ooo oo o 154 12 23 Fixed Point Set point Configuration sooo oo o 155 12 3 Fixed Point Calibration Process o a 157 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 159 13 1 Heat Source Calibration Process o a 159 13 2 Configuring MET TEMP II to Perform Heat Source Calibrations 159 13 2 1 Default Setungs e s o 6 4 e whew al gh 8 le We eh ee Bw 160 13 2 1 1 Writing New Coefficients To Heat Source gt sss oa ee ee 160 13 2 1 2 Reportof Calibration i ssamen nepra A EAS 162 13 2 2 Configure Communications Port o o o ooo oo 162 13 2 3 Configure Reference Readout o o e 163 13 2 4 Configure Scanners scr is ae y e a o a w a 164 13 2 5 Configure Test Probes r sci miin ie wesw ek BOS we A aR we we 164 13 2 6 Configure HeatSource imc a a RR a a a 165 13 2 7 Configure Set poitits a e si ok aoe Eh ea a Ew ER a a Se 167 13 2 8 Start Heat Source Calibration 2 2 2 a 170 iv 13 3 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 171 13 4 Printing Heat Source Reports of Calibration 171 14 MET TRACK Export Process 173 14 1 Tolerances 22522 beh dH eRe ewe eee ed 177 14 2 Changing Coefficients Export Field 179 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 181 15 1 What is the Coefficients and Tables Application 181 15 2
41. 165 167 169 171 Heat Source Report of Calibration 145 162 169 171 Heat sources 17 26 27 60 64 76 83 86 131 154 165 Help 127 Help balloons 33 217 Help menu 226 High range 185 194 230 Incomplete setup 100 102 Increment 204 In house calibration 101 Insert fixed point 91 Insert set point 91 Install Drivers 59 Installation 8 Instruments 5 Insufficient Data 191 International settings 209 Internet 1 Interval 42 90 Introduction 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 33 Invalid test 122 Invalid test probe 225 Inverse difference 204 IPTS 68 185 203 236 237 IPTS 68 requirements 230 Ttalics 51 201 ITS 90 185 194 203 236 ITS 90 requirements 229 ITS 90 subranges 185 229 L license diskette 12 Limitations 242 Liquid in Glass 72 98 106 159 Locate test number 124 logo 45 135 140 147 228 255 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Low range 185 194 229 M Maintain equipment 120 Maintain test results 121 223 Manufacturer 38 40 64 67 69 72 75 97 Mapping 179 margins 45 135 140 147 227 MASTER PORT 8 Maximum temperature 203 Maximum value 70 81 Measurements 48 Melting point 38 39 Menu 18 183 MET TRACK 18 33 119 125 126 Method of realization 38 39 136 152 228 Methods 229 236 Minimum temperature 203 Minimum value 70 81 Model number 37 39 56 64 67 69 72 75 97 190 196 Moving Set points 93 N New 31 39 46 New
42. 4 2s 308 moe BA Si we BSE RS dw Be oe Ber 217 Figure 122 Coefficients Tab 2 2 ee a aei e a 218 Figure 123 Reports Taba ida od bw he e a e a eis 4 219 Figure 124 Tables Tabs o 2 266465 5 54 24Gb a ee ee 220 Figure 125 Directores Tabs Veras a wae ee S 221 Figure 126 Coefficients Menu 20 0 000000 0 eee eee 222 Figure 127 Utilities Men se crv ek ee ee Oe e bee ER 223 Figure 128 Maintain Test Results Dialog o 224 Figure 129 Invalid Test Probe Dialog p os oe ess po o 225 Figure 130 Help Menu e cross bo 65444044 b2 253 Ed weed 226 Figure 131 About MET TEMP II Coefficients and Tables Application Dialog 227 Figure 132 Example Default Report of Calibration ITS 90 Coefficients 231 Figure 133 Example Default Table Temperature vs Resistance 232 Figure 134 Print Preview Window o a 239 Figure 135 Report Viewer Utility o o e eniti 241 Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Instrument Connections Temperature Range of Thermocouple Types Temperature Range Recommendations xi 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Introduction What is MET TEMP II MET TEMP II formerly Calibrate it and Generate it is temperature sensor calibration software that interfaces reference thermometers scanners and heat sources to perform typical comparison calibrations of RTDs thermistors thermocoup
43. 40 65 68 69 72 75 79 Calibration interval 42 98 136 228 Callendar Van Dusen 185 203 237 Callendar Van Dusen requirements 233 Channels 70 96 Characterization 184 192 Check standard 102 208 CJC readings 189 234 235 CJC settings 98 99 Close test 58 Coefficients 159 160 171 179 183 184 190 192 194 214 218 229 236 Coefficients menu 222 Coefficients tab 218 CoefficientsField 179 Cold junction 189 column widths 45 135 140 147 227 COM port 6 7 18 26 60 83 102 104 162 247 Communication error 104 247 253 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Communications 6 41 61 62 64 71 73 74 77 79 102 162 Compact database 119 223 Company address 47 Company name 47 Comparison 26 Comparison calibration 26 Comparison set points 89 91 CONFIG folder 129 132 Configuration 21 25 31 32 58 59 63 66 68 71 74 77 82 86 96 102 151 159 216 Configuration file 27 31 32 41 83 88 91 100 129 131 133 Configure 211 Configure export fields 211 Conflict 11 35 90 103 Connections 15 Contents 127 226 Control panel 209 Controller address 79 Current 98 99 custom logo 45 135 140 147 228 Custom report template 44 57 139 200 219 Custom table template 206 220 Customer address 102 Customer information 99 101 Customer name 102 Customer service 127 226 245 Customizing export data 211 D Database 119 124 223 Defaults 32 160
44. 84 00 33 997808 0 0992851 145 00 39 998526 0 0974326 24 00 27 984628 0 1011273 85 00 34 097093 0 0992546 146 00 40 095959 0 0974024 25 00 28 085755 0 1010964 86 00 34 196348 0 0992241 147 00 40 193361 0 0973722 26 00 28 186852 0 1010655 87 00 34 295572 0 0991936 148 00 40 290733 0 0973420 27 00 28 287917 0 1010346 88 00 34 394766 0 0991631 149 00 40 388075 0 0973118 28 00 28 388952 0 1010037 89 00 34 493929 0 0991325 150 00 40 485387 0 0972816 29 00 28 489955 0 1009728 90 00 34 593061 0 0991021 151 00 40 582669 0 0972514 30 00 28 590928 0 1009420 91 00 34 692163 0 0990716 152 00 40 679920 0 0972213 31 00 28 691870 0 1009111 92 00 34 791235 0 0990411 153 00 40 777141 0 0971911 32 00 28 792781 0 1008803 93 00 34 890276 0 0990106 154 00 40 874332 0 0971609 33 00 28 893662 0 1008494 94 00 34 989287 0 0989801 155 00 40 971493 0 0971308 34 00 28 994511 0 1008186 95 00 35 088267 0 0989496 156 00 41 068624 0 0971006 35 00 29 095330 0 1007878 96 00 35 187216 0 0989192 157 00 41 165725 0 0970705 36 00 29 196117 0 1007569 97 00 35 286135 0 0988887 158 00 41 262795 0 0970403 37 00 29 296874 0 1007261 98 00 35 385024 0 0988582 159 00 41 359835 0 0970102 38 00 29 397600 0 1006953 99 00 35 483882 0 0988278 160 00 41 456846 0 0969801 39 00 29 498296 0 1006645 100 00 35 582710 0 0987973 161 00 41 553826 0 0969499 40 00 29 598960 0 1006337 101 00 35 681508 0 0987669 162 00 41 650776 0 0969198 41 00 29 699594 0 1006030 102 00 35 780274 0 0987365 163 00 41 747695 0 0968897
45. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IM PLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OR MECHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE HART SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT INCI DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSS WHETHER IN CON TRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE Microsoft MS DOS Windows Window for Workgroups and Windows 95 98 ME NT 2000 and XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division 799 E Utah Valley Drive American Fork UT 84003 9775 USA Phone 1 801 763 1600 Telefax 1 801 763 1010 Email support hartscientific com www hartscientific com Subject to change without notice Copyright 2005 Printed in USA Table of Contents 1 Introduction 1 1 1 1 2 13 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 What is MET TEMPII o 1 Features New to Version 4 o e 1 1 2 1 NELSON AS a BS ee oa SE e ee gl det amp See gl 1 1 2 2 VETSINA Die edie NN 1 1 2 3 Vers a as 2 1 2 4 Version 4 0 E E E E E 4 Requirements s sa se wee eae be Pe ee EH 6 1 3 1 Communications Requirements 0 00 000000 eee 6 1 3 2 Computer Hardware Requirements o o a 7 1 3 3 Computer Software Requirements 0 000002 eee 8 1 3 4 Firmware Requirements o o 8 Installati n vo its a 8 Running MET TEMP IL aoaaa oo
46. Auto scaling always keep min and max readings on the graph Use averaging when graphing reference probe last 10 readings Reset Axes To Defaults Save As Defaults Figure 56 Graph Settings Dialog Cancel a The X axis of the graph is always displayed in time The graph s X axis time range can be changed using the X axis time box The graph can be set to show from 1 minute to 480 minutes 8 hours on the X axis A Note Changing the X axis time setting causes the graph to be cleared and reset The Y axis of the graph is always displayed in the current test temperature scale C or F There are four options for setting the range of the Y axis e Use reference probe range Sets the Y axis minimum and maximum values to the minimum and maximum temperature values entered on the Reference Probe Configuration dialog e Fixed range Sets the Y axis to the minimum and maximum values en tered by the user in the boxes provided These boxes are enabled when this option is selected 116 7 Graph Menu 117 7 2 7 3 7 4 e Show band around current reading Allows the user to enter a value of a band to show around the most recent reference reading This box is en abled when this option is selected e Auto scaling always keep min and max readings on the graph Maintains the minimum and maximum values of the visible plot on the graph during the time shown If the Use averaging when graphing
47. Cancel button on the Select Set points dialog to abort calculating co efficients and return to the Calculate Coefficients dialog 15 5 1 6 Coefficients and Residuals Dialog The Coefficients and Residuals dialog is displayed when the Calculate button is clicked on the Select Set points dialog Coefficients and Residuals xj Results of Coefficient Calculations These are the results of the coefficient calculations for test probe model 5614 serial number 358254 Coefficients Set points and Residuals RTPW 25 549296 Low Range 90 1000 C 0 0001 C al4 8 0074745 E 06 38 8340 C 0 0001 C b 4 3 7630372 E 04 High Range a 8 1 6577511 E 04 156 5990 C 0 0001 C b 8 2 1866045 E 06 231 9280 C 0 0001 C 300 0000 C 0 0001 C Figure 102 Coefficients and Residuals Dialog A Note If the Preview before writing to database check box on the Calcu late Coefficients dialog was not selected this dialog does not appear and the calculated coefficients and residuals are automatically written to the database The calculated coefficients are displayed in the Coefficients list The set points used to calculate the coefficients and the resulting residuals are displayed in the Set points and Residuals list If ITS 90 coefficients were calculated the set points used for the low and the high ranges as applicable are displayed in separate sections The Triple Point 194 15 Coefficients and Tables Applicat
48. Dialog s ass cea bes Bia bee aa HRS 107 5 6 Stop Test ce SS we eee ee ba eee eee ee Ee A 109 5 7 Pause Vest gt ee ss ee ke SG RE A ee RoE Ge 109 5 8 Resume Vest e ha 2 6844 b4 5 54 2 BSG ob PS oes 110 5 9 Stability Override 2 ee ee 110 5 9 1 stability Override Digloe acs ce ea AS oS Ge isa HES a PS 110 6 Scale Menu 113 61 o oo 4 gee bea de a ee eo 113 62 Seo Ena vast oe oe es oe eee ee ae re nee 113 7 Graph Ment 5 2 4 ee Sew Hs oR oo BES 7 1 Graph Settings ares oa daa e tseeed 115 7 1 1 Graph Settings Dialog s s sa d oa ea o ee ee 115 Tad Pont Graphs siii eR AS ea SRE RS 117 73 Start Display 6 424 08004603 eo eee se bee eed 117 74 Stop Display 22 4 ors 2 44 ks ee ek aoe eae OS Se SS 117 8 Utilities Menu 119 8 1 Compact Database o o 119 8 2 Repair Database 4 oe eh hp res o 119 8 3 Maintain Equipment e o 120 8 3 1 Maintain Test Equipment Dialog o o o ooo o 120 8 4 Maintain Test Results o e a e e 121 8 4 1 Maintain Test Results Dialog 2 2 o ooo e e 121 Sl invalid Test Dialog ii A iS ae Ree A 122 8 5 Edit Test Information 0 0 000000008 123 8 5 1 Edit Test Information Dialog o oo e 124 8 6 Coefficients and Tables 0 0 2000004 125 8 7 Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK 125
49. Enter the information for the Reference Probe What type of probe is the reference RTD 392 4 wire El Model number Serial number Module channel e e Manufacturer Report units Description Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number 12 04 2002 o3 04 2003 5614 Min temperature Max temperature 200 00 Sc 420 00 Lc Figure 32 Reference Probe Configuration Dialog The reference probe type must be selected before any other information can be entered The reference probe type defaults to the probe type selected on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog If the default probe type is not one of the available probe types for the selected reference readout or reference module then this box is left blank and must be selected from the available choices Select the reference probe model number using the Model number drop down list The manufacturer and description information is filled in automatically when a model is selected If the appropriate model number does not appear on the list enter the model number in the Model number box Enter the manufac turer and description for the reference probe in the Manufacturer and Descrip tion boxes MET TEMP II records model numbers manufacturer and description information to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over Next select the serial number from the Serial number drop down list or enter the serial number in the Serial number b
50. Fixed Points for more information If MET TEMP II was configured to take ambient temperature and humidity readings from a Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer the DewK is queried at regular intervals throughout the entire test When the test is complete or aborted the average of the ambient temperature and humidity readings over the entire test period are calculated and written to the database 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Closing a Test When testing is complete a message is displayed indicating the test completed successfully The test controls remain on screen until the test is closed using the Close Test option in the File menu When closing a test a prompt may be displayed asking if the Coefficients and Tables application should be launched to calculate characterization coefficients depending on the appropriate settings on the Test tab of the Defaults dialog Click Yes to launch the Coefficients and Tables application or click No to continue A Note This prompt is never displayed when closing a heat source calibra tion Next a prompt may also be displayed to export the calibration data to the MET TRACK database This prompt is only displayed if the Coefficients and Tables application was not launched the appropriate option on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog is checked and the link to the MET TRACK database is active Click Yes to export the calibration data now or click No to abort All test con
51. II dialog e Detailed description doing when the problem arose e The exact wording and or number of any error message received e Any other information that may help to solve the problem 246 18 Troubleshooting Communication Error 18 2 Communication Error If MET TEMP II is unable to communicate with an instrument for any reason a communication error occurs To resolve the communication error please check the following Is the COM port in use Make sure that the COM port is not currently being used by another application If there is a hot sync adapter for a PDA connected to your computer make sure the software that uses the adapter is closed or that it is not trying to use the same COM port Is the correct COM port selected Make sure that the communication cable is connected to the selected COM port on the computer Is the instrument set to the right baud rate Make sure that the in strument s baud rate is set to 2400 baud Refer to the instrument s User s Guide for more details on how to set the baud rate Is the right type of cable being used MET TEMP II requires that a null modem cable be used to connect instruments to the SmartSwitch box and a straight through parallel cable to connect the SmartSwitch to the computer s COM port Is the instrument turned on Make sure that the instrument is turned on Use the buttons on the front panel of the instrument to exit from any open
52. TEMP II Coefficients and Tables main display consists of the menu toolbar and a workspace area M MET TEMP II Coefficients and Tables loj x File Coefficients Utilities Help lv NNN Figure 93 Coefficients and Tables Main Display The menu bar allows access to the various features of the software A general description of the options in each menu is given below File Export test data and coefficients change default settings access printing options exit the software Coefficients Calculate coefficients from test data Utilities Compact repair and maintain databases Help Display help topics and About dialog Toolbar The toolbar provides quick access to many of the most common functions such as exporting test data to a text file printing reports and tables viewing and edit ing default settings and calculating the different types of probe coefficients The function of each toolbar button can be found by placing the mouse pointer over the button and waiting for approximately 1 2 second A help balloon ap pears indicating the function of the button If a help balloon does not appear make sure the Show help balloons check box on the General tab of the Defaults dialog is selected The following buttons are available on the toolbar 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide pra a Export Export data to a text file 8 Print Reports and Tables Print a Report of Calibration and or Table Y Defaults Setup defau
53. Template Settings Type and Range Type and Range Select type of table Temperature scale Temperature vs Resistance M ec OF OK Min temperature Max temperature Step size PX Print first derivative dr dT Figure 108 Table Options Dialog The Table Options dialog allows the user to specify options for the table for each type of coefficients by selecting either of the five tabs Type and Range Resolutions Other Settings Template Settings and Export Settings This software remembers the last settings used for each type of coefficients When this dialog is displayed the last settings for the indicated type of coeffi cients are shown Change the settings as desired then click the OK button to save the settings and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes made and close this dialog 202 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 203 15 5 1 9 1 Type and Range Tab The Type and Range tab allows the type of table temperature scale range and step size settings to be selected Template Settings Export Settings Type and Range Other Settings Type and Range Select type of table Temperature scale Temperature vs Resistance z Oc OF OK Min temperature Max temperature Step size X Print first derivative dr dT Figure 109 Type and Range Tab Select the type of table to generate using the Select type of table drop down list The
54. This setting is only used when printing a table by itself and is ig nored when printing a table and a Report of Calibration at the same time The Select font to use drop down list allows the user to select the font to use when printing the table The list of fonts consists of all fonts supported by the default printer The Size points drop down list allows the user to select the font size Allowable font sizes are from 6 point to 14 point A sample of the se lected font is displayed below the font selection Template Settings Tab The Template Settings tab allows the user to specify the template to use when generating tables Resolutions Other Settings Export Settings Type and Range Template Settings Template Settings Use default table template O Use custom table template Custom table template Po Figure 112 Template Settings Tab If the Use default report template option is selected the built in table template is used The Custom report template box and Browse button are disabled The software also allows custom report templates to be used when generating tables If the default report template isn t exactly the type of table required for your application contact Hart application specialists for information on obtain ing custom report templates designed to your specifications If a custom report template has been purchased from Hart the Use custom report template option allows the use
55. and the selected number of readings are averaged to produce the 3 File Menu 49 values printed on the Report of Calibration This technique is used to eliminate potentially bad readings The Prompt to calculate coefficients when closing test option determines whether MET TEMP II should display a prompt when closing a test to launch the Coefficients and Tables application to calculate characterization coeffi cients This prompt is never displayed after performing heat source calibrations The Take Reference readings in ohms volts as well as temperature option deter mines whether MET TEMP II should take measurements from the reference probe in raw units ohms or volts in addition to temperature at each set point for each UUT This feature was added for custom reporting purposes and should usually be left unchecked Note The Take Reference readings in ohms volts as well as temperature option may not apply to all reference instruments Also this feature does not apply when using the heat source s as the reference Warning mes sages will appear when starting a test if this feature conflicts with the cur rent test configuration and or instruments being used The Heat Source Calibration Options settings indicate how MET TEMP II should operate when calibrating a heat source The Write new coefficients to heat source after calibration indicates whether the new calculated calibration coefficients for the heat source should be written
56. button on the Equipment Info dialog or select the Set points option from the Calibration menu The Set point Configuration dialog is displayed Set point Configuration x M Set point Configuration 9105 As Found Auto Generate Set points 9105 As Found 9105 As Found Insert Set point 9105 4s Found 9105 As Left Insert Fixed Point Save As 9105 As Left 9105 As Left Set Defaults Remove Set point Remove All Set points Set point Uncertainty 0 001 to 10 000 or N A am Je pio Jeje Window 0 001 to 100 000 poo Be Tolerance 0 0001 to 20 0000 0200 4 c gt minutes Duration 0 to 240 Figure 86 Set point Configuration Dialog When calibrating a heat source all of the controls on this dialog are initially disabled A heat source set point configuration file must be opened to configure the initial set points to use to perform the heat source calibration Note Fixed point set points cannot be used when calibrating a heat source The Insert Fixed Point button is always disabled Also set points cannot be auto generated The Auto Generate Set Points button is also disabled The Re move All Set points button is always disabled Click the Open button to open a set point configuration file MET TEMP II ships with one default set point configuration file in degrees C for each heat source model that MET TEMP II can calibrate These set point configuration files are i
57. by direct measurement of generated temperatures using the reference standards listed in the Test Equipment table at the bottom of this report The internal calibration coefficients and the data abtained are shown on page 2 A Test Uncertainty Ratio TUR of at least 4 1 was maintained unless otherwise indicated This calibration is traceable to NIST or natural physical constants and is in compliance with ANSI NCSL Z540 1 and MIL STD 45662A Nominal Actual Value UUT Measurement Set point Reference Test Sensor Error Uncertainty Method of C C C C C Realization 25 00 24 9713 25 0231 0 0518 0 050 COMP 0 01 0 0100 0 0102 0 0002 0 010 TP 25 00 25 0119 25 0231 0 0112 0 050 COMP 50 00 49 9907 50 0212 0 0305 0 050 COMP 75 00 75 0049 75 0021 0 0028 0 050 COMP 100 00 99 9709 99 9985 0 0276 0 050 COMP 125 00 124 9844 125 0321 0 0477 0 050 COMP Test Equipment Manufacturer Model Description Serial Number Recall Date Hart Scientific Inc 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer 2 RTD 2 TC A23564 6 30 2002 Hart Scientific Inc 5614 Secondary Reference Temperature Std 1 4 360984 1 17 2003 x 12 Hart Scientific Inc 5901 TPW 123456 2 1 2003 Hart Scientific Inc 9105 Drywell Low Temperature A23765 NCR Notes This test was performed in accordance with the test procedure indicated above Calibration Date 6 3 2002 Technician Recall Date 6 3 2003 Cal E Breight Temperature 21C Humidity 25 Approved By Customer Order 5454
58. configure MET TEMP ll as if the probe was connected only to channel 3 and leave channel 13 blank Problems Exporting Test Data or Coefficients Cannot create export file Export path does not exist Use Windows Explorer to create the folder or use the Browse button on the Directories tab of the Defaults dialog to select the default ex port path and filename Insufficient access rights to ex port path Login to Windows with sufficient rights to create files in the speci fied path or export to a different folder Incorrect data being exported Export data not properly configured Use Configure Export Fields dialog to define data to be exported MET TEMP II calibration test did not complete or records deleted Data cannot be exported Use Maintain Test Results option in Utilities menu of MET TEMP II to validate test Export data not properly configured Use Configure Export Fields dialog to define data to be exported Problems Calculating Coefficients Insufficient data to calculate coefficients The minimum requirements for data to calculate the selected co efficients could not be met Select another type of coefficients to calculate Recalibrate test probe to acquire sufficient data to calculate coefficients Error occurs calculating coefficients Data at one or more points is invalid Recalibrate test probe to acquire new data Select other points to use to calculate coefficient
59. connected to one of the available SmartSwitch ports 3 File Menu 35 Set points Tab The Set points tab is for selecting defaults specific to the set points Fonts amp Sizes Gere Setpoint eaw Jon f l Set point Defaults Window Duration 0 001 to 100 000 0 to 240 Tolerance Uncertainty 0 0001 to 20 0000 0 001 to 10 000 or N A ry ES aco Bo m Be X Prompt for heat source conflicts Fixed Point Options X Prompt to confirm method of realization Require calibration and recalibration dates on fixed point cells Setup Fixed Points Figure 11 Set points Tab The default settings for the set point window tolerance duration and uncer tainty can be set on this tab The set point window tolerance duration and un certainty values are used when automatically or manually generating set points Use the spin buttons to change the values of each setting or type the new value into the box provided To set the uncertainty to N A clear the contents of the box and then click on another box or use the spin down button If the Prompt for heat source conflicts check box is selected the user is prompted when opening a set point configuration file when generating set points automatically or when displaying the Set point Configuration dialog after the heat source configuration has changed Also if this option is selected the user is prompted to enter a proportional band value for each set point if
60. date Note If the calibration interval is set to 0 on the Test Probe Configuration dialog the recall date is omitted from the Report of Calibration for that test probe The technician is the name of the person who performed the test This informa tion is entered on the Test Information dialog Examples of default Reports of Calibration can be seen in Figures 67 and 68 on pages 137 and 138 Reports of Calibration Report of Calibration Report No CE200206126 002 Temp Tech Co Page of 1 105 Celcius Drive Out Town USA 34567 8998 Model 5614 Customer Our Customer Serial 365232 One Customer Way Description Probe Secondary Standard Technology Drive Any Town USA 23456 Calibration Range Full Received Condition New Current 1 0 mA Procedure HST000 0 The above referenced instrument was calibrated by direct measurement of generated temperatures using the reference standards listed in the Test Equipment table at the bottom of this report The internal calibration coefficients and the data abtained are shown on page 2 A Test Uncertainty Ratio TUR of at least 4 1 was maintained unless otherwise indicated This calibration is traceable to NIST or natural physical constants and is in compliance with ANSI NCSL Z540 1 and MIL STD 45662A Nominal Actual Value UUT Measurement Set point Reference Test Sensor Uncertainty Method of C C Ohms C Realization 25 00 24 9697 89 2564 0
61. difficulty meeting Tolerance specification Continue trying until specification is met Abort test after time specified below Prompt user to override settings after time specified below Override settings and continue test after time specified below How much time should the heat source be given po a min Figure 81 Test Tab The Write new coefficients to heat source after calibration check box deter mines whether MET TEMP II will attempt to write the new calculated values for the calibration coefficients to the heat source prior to taking readings at the As Left set points If this option is selected MET TEMP II attempts to write the new coefficient values to the heat source and verify that the heat source accepted the new val ues before proceeding to take readings at the As Left set points If this option is not selected MET TEMP II will not attempt to write the new coefficient values to the heat source If there are any As Left set points config ured readings will be taken at these set points using the same calibration coef ficients that were in the heat source when the As Found readings were taken It is recommended that this option always be selected if As Left set points are configured Click the OK button to close the Defaults dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 13 2 1 2 Report of Calibration MET TEMP II ships with a custom Report of Calibration that was designed specifically to print t
62. each instrument If communication with any instrument fails a communication error dialog is displayed MET TEMP II will automatically re try the communication every 5 seconds or when the Retry button is clicked Read this dialog and check the indicated items to determine why MET TEMP II cannot communicate with the instrument Clicking the Cancel button aborts starting the calibration test AA aa E Q Communication with the 1560 on SmartSwitch port A is not working properly Make sure that the correct COM port is selected the correct cables are being used the SmartS witch is plugged in the 1560 is connected to port the 1560 is turned on the 1560 is set to the correct baud rate For Hart Scientific instruments manufactured prior to 1993 contact Hart Scientific Inc Technical Support Cancel Communication will automatically be retried every 5 seconds Figure 50 Communication Error Dialog Note MET TEMP II will not attempt to communicate with External heat sources fixed point cells or non interfaced scanner or other readout in struments If communication failure is persistent click the Cancel button and go to the ap propriate configuration dialog for the instrument that is not communicating Click the Check Port button to attempt to establish communications with the in strument Make sure the LED on the SmartSwitch for the selected SmartSwitch port is on or try another SmartSwitch port If failure persist
63. features 4 New set point 91 Notes 46 108 Null modem cable 8 247 O Open 21 31 46 58 83 88 100 Options 32 216 Order 186 187 213 234 256 Order ID 41 102 132 133 Other Settings tab 205 Over determined solution 236 Override 94 110 Oversampling 48 Overwrite 218 P Page number 206 228 Paragraph 44 46 108 Partial range 107 Pass field 54 Pass Fail Report of Calibration 139 Pause test 109 Platinum probe 185 193 222 229 230 233 Polynomial 185 187 193 203 237 Polynomial requirements 233 Preheat heat sources 108 Preview 33 34 57 190 194 196 217 218 239 Print graph 117 Print preview 33 34 196 217 239 241 243 Print report 56 197 Print reports and tables 221 Print Reports of Calibration 195 Print Tables 195 Printer 33 55 117 207 217 221 242 Probe type 42 69 97 Proportional band 86 88 91 92 130 131 PRT RTD probe 185 222 229 230 233 R R T coefficients 187 R TPW 236 Range 43 70 77 80 107 116 185 189 203 229 235 237 Index Ratio 203 Raw data 199 228 Readings 48 211 README TXT file 6 15 Recalibration date 38 40 41 65 68 69 72 75 79 Recall saved report 58 Received condition 101 Reference 16 26 63 78 97 163 Reference module 60 66 83 Reference probe 42 64 68 77 83 117 120 153 229 230 233 234 Reference readout 60 63 72 83 Reference value 38 39 Regional settings 209 Remov
64. following types of tables can be generated e Temperature vs Resistance For ITS 90 IPTS 68 Callendar Van Dusen and Polynomial coefficients e Temperature vs Ratio For ITS 90 and IPTS 68 coefficients only e Temperature vs EMF uV For Thermocouple coefficients only e Temperature vs EMF mV For Thermocouple coefficients only Select the temperature scale for the table The software allows tables to be gen erated in any of the following temperature scales e C e F e K The Min temperature and Max temperature boxes indicate the temperature range for the table in the selected temperature scale Change these settings as desired The minimum temperature and maximum temperature values are lim ited to 273C and 2650C 459F and 4802F respectively However the equa tions used to generate table values may not be able to calculate values over the full range If a message is displayed during calculations stating that a calcula tion error occurred you may need to increase the minimum temperature or de 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 5 1 9 2 204 crease the maximum temperature Refer to Section 15 12 7 Table Temperature Range Chart for the recommended ranges for generating tables for different types of coefficients Note Changing the selected temperature scale converts the minimum and maximum temperature values to that scale automatically Enter the step size to use when generating the table in the Step size bo
65. for this test number PX Preview report Select probes Probe model number Probe serial number 21345 Report Template O Use default report template Use custom report template Custom report template C METTEMP2 REPORTS HEATSAC EXE Figure 88 Print Test Report Dialog When this dialog is displayed the test number for the last calibration test should already be selected If not select the appropriate test number using the Test number drop down list The heat source that was calibrated should be dis played in the Select probes list In the Report Template section select the Use custom report template option The Custom report template box and the Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button and select the file HEATSRC EXE file in the REPORTS folder Click the Print button to launch the custom heat source Report of Calibration template Refer to Section 11 2 2 Heat Source Report of Calibration for more details on the options available for printing heat source Reports of Calibration Click the Exit button to close the Print Heat Source Report of Calibration dialog Click the Cancel button to close the Print Test Report dialog 172 14 MET TRACK Export Process 173 14 MET TRACK Export Process MET TEMP II can export calibration data to the MET TRACK database when the link to MET TRACK is active For more details on activating the link to MET TRACK refer to Section 3 4 9 MET T
66. locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog Scanner Selecting the Scanner option displays the Scanner Configuration dialog This dialog can also be displayed by clicking the Scanner button on the Equipment Info dialog Scanner Configuration Dialog The Scanner Configuration dialog is used to select the instrument to which the test probes are connected Scanner Configuration xi Scanner Configuration X Enable communications during configuration 7 Do not use scanner prompt to manually enter all readings Check Port Enter the scanner information Model number Serial number SmartSwitch port m aee JB y Manufacturer Description Test Probes Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number MM DD YYYY MM DDAYYYY 1560 423543 Figure 33 Scanner Configuration Dialog The Enable communications during configuration check box is provided to en able verifying communications with test equipment during the configuration process The default state of this check box is determined by the state of the 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 72 Enable communications during configuration check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog When calibrating test probes th
67. may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II 3 File Menu 39 3 4 2 1 2 Click the OK button to accept the new settings and close this dialog or click the Cancel button to abort making changes to this fixed point cell New Fixed Point Dialog The New Fixed Point dialog is displayed when the New button is clicked on the Fixed Points dialog This dialog allows the settings for a new fixed point cell to be entered New Fixed Point xi New Fixed Point Enter the fixed point information Model number Serial number 901 2345 Reference value Method of realization E Triple Point z a o 2 1 Le Hart Scientific 0 D vw SE 2 2 Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number O A e NOTE Fixed Point reference values are ALWAYS in Cl Help Figure 14 New Fixed Point Dialog The fixed point model number serial number reference value method of real ization manufacturer description and calibration and recalibration dates must be entered Enter the model and serial numbers for this fixed point cell in the Model num ber and Serial number boxes provided Enter the reference value for this fixed point cell in the Reference value box Note The reference value must ALWAYS be entered in degrees C regardless of the scale being used for the test MET TEMP II will convert the reference value to degrees F as needed Select
68. menu Is the correct model selected Make sure that the selected instrument model matches the model of the instrument being used 18 3 Troubleshooting Common Problems The following table outlines some possible problems that may arise when using MET TEMP II and some possible solutions to those problems Problem Possible Cause Solution Communication Problems Cannot select correct COM port Another application is using the Close all other applications that use COM ports including Hot Sync COM port manager modem software etc COM port is not enabled or con Use Windows Device Manager to check COM port settings Check figured correctly computer s BIOS Setup to ensure COM port is enabled Unable to communicate with Wrong COM port selected Make sure the cable is connected to the correct COM port Do not SmartSwitch SmartSwitch LEDs do not indicate correct port 247 connect cable to computer s 25 pin parallel printer port Wrong type of RS 232 cable be Make sure the cable is a straight through cable ing used Cable not connected to MASTER Make sure the cable from the computer s COM port is connected to PORT the SmartSwitch MASTER PORT SmartSwitch not plugged in Make sure SmartSwitch is plugged in and the POWER light is on SmartSwitch may need to be Power surges can destroy the SmartSwitch Contact technical sup replaced port for replacement 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Problem
69. number in the Serial number box if it has not been entered previously MET TEMP II records serial numbers calibration dates and recalibration dates to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over The Calibration and Recalibration date information is only required if the Use Heat Sources as reference check box is selected Otherwise this information is optional If the recalibration date has passed and the Show recalibration date notification messages check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog is selected the user is warned and must change the calibration and recalibration dates before the in strument can be used Select the SmartSwitch port to which the instrument is connected using the SmartSwitch port drop down list If the instrument is connected and powered up at this time make sure the Enable communications during configuration check box is selected and click the Check Port button MET TEMP II will at tempt to establish communications with the instrument If MET TEMP II is not able to communicate with the instrument an error message is displayed Other wise a message is displayed stating communication was established with the instrument The SmartSwitch port box is disabled if the selected model number is External or Fixed Point Note For dual well heat sources such as the Model 9009 dry well each well must be configured as a separate heat source Model 9009C and Model 9009H with both heat sources assigned to
70. option in the File menu The Defaults dialog is displayed Select the Set points tab Y YE METIA Gered JSetpomo eee Joh Jae Set point Defaults Window Duration 0 001 to 100 000 0 to 240 Tolerance Uncertainty 0 0001 to 20 0000 0 001 to 10 000 or N A a 4h aco Be a Be X Prompt for heat source conflicts Fixed Point Options X Prompt to confirm method of realization Require calibration and recalibration dates on fixed point cells Setup Fixed Points Figure 75 Set points Tab The Prompt to confirm method of realization check box indicates whether MET TEMP II will show a message every time a fixed point set point is added to a calibration configuration indicating the current method of realization for the selected fixed point cell If this check box is not selected no prompt is displayed 152 ml 2 Performing Calibrations Using Fixed Points 153 12 2 12 2 1 To configure fixed point cells click the Setup Fixed Points button The Fixed Points dialog is displayed Fixed Points Fixed Points Select the fixed point standard to use for this set point 0 01 5901 12345 0 o 25334 o 2566987 253654 0 0 NOTE Fixed Point reference values are ALWAYS in C Figure 76 Fixed Points Dialog To edit the current settings for a fixed point cell select the fixed point cell from the list and click the
71. option permanently removes the entire test from the database Selecting the Remove selected probes option al lows the user to remove information specific to one or more test probes from a test while leaving the other test probes and the test itself intact To use this op tion select the test probe s that should be removed from the list on the lower left Clicking the OK button performs the selected option and continues on to the next test or returns to the Maintain Test Results dialog Clicking the Cancel but ton closes this dialog and ignores the selected option Edit Test Information Selecting the Edit Test Information option displays the Edit Test Information dialog This dialog allows some information for tests that have already been performed to be edited including the technician name ambient conditions cali bration range setting the paragraph and test notes test procedure company name and address manufacturer and description information order ID re ceived condition check standard setting MET TRACK asset number uncer 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide tainty method of realization setting and heat source calibration coefficient labels 8 5 1 Edit Test Information Dialog The Edit Test Information dialog allows some information for tests that have al ready been performed to be edited including the technician name ambient con ditions calibration range setting the paragraph and test notes test procedure company
72. range calibration Pattial range calibration Name of person performing test Test date Cal E Breight 01 07 2003 Test procedure HST234 1 Preheat heat sources Reference UUT readings resolution 5 decimal places M Example 123 45679 X Generate test number automatically Paragraph Test number Enter the ambient conditions Temperature Humidity ns poc Or s 6 Figure 52 Test Information Dialog The Full range calibration and Partial range calibration options are used to specify whether the test probes are being calibrated over their full range or over a partial range Select the appropriate option Enter the name of the technician performing this test in the box provided This name is automatically filled in using the name from the User tab on the De faults dialog This name appears on the Report of Calibration below one of the signature lines 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 108 The Test date is the date the test begins and defaults to today s date If the date is incorrect check the clock on the computer To change the test date use the drop down calendar and click on the appropriate date In the Test procedure box enter the name or document control number of the in house document that describes the method or procedure followed when per forming this test Select the Preheat heat sources check box if you want MET TEMP II to preheat each heat source prior to being used in the te
73. records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II A Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II Click the Ref Probe button to configure the reference probe information The Reference Probe Configuration dialog is displayed Refer to Section 4 3 3 Ref erence Probe Configuration Dialog for more details The Drivers button allows the user to install instrument drivers If there are no models available in the Model number drop down list you must install drivers by clicking the Drivers button Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog 4 3 3 Reference Probe Configuration Dialog The Reference Probe Configuration dialog is displayed when the Ref Probe 68 4 Configuration Menu 69 button on the Reference Readout Configuration dialog or on the Reference Module Configuration dialog is clicked Reference Probe Configuration x Reference Probe Configuration
74. removing the set points Click Yes to re move all set points or click No to abort removing the set points Note When calibrating a heat source the set points used to calibrate the heat source As Found cannot be removed The Remove Set point button is dis abled when one of these set points is selected The Remove All Set points but ton is always disabled when calibrating a heat source 5 1 1 5 Editing Set points The parameters associated with each set point can be edited as needed To edit the parameters associated with a set point select the set point in the list Make the necessary changes to the set point window tolerance duration uncertainty heat source assignment and proportional band parameters as needed To edit the parameters for multiple set points simultaneously hold down the lt CTRL gt key while clicking on set points in the list Make the necessary changes to the window tolerance duration and uncertainty parameters as needed The set point heat source assignment and proportional band settings cannot be edited when multiple set points are selected 92 5 Calibration Menu 5 1 1 6 5 2 5 2 1 Moving Set points Set points can be moved and reordered in the set point list by selecting the set point to move and clicking either the Move Up or Move Down button Only one set point can be moved at a time If multiple set points are selected the Move Up and Move Down buttons are disabled Note When calibr
75. set point at or near OC when calcu lating thermocouple coefficients may cause erroneous results For best re sults use at least two set points that are not near OC more than 5C 2 The UUT test probe readings must be in voltage mV or uV At least 2 set points must be used but no more than 10 set points can be used 3 The CJC readings if used can be in either temperature C or F or volt age mV or uV If no CJC readings are needed a scale does not need to be selected 4 The thermocouple type must be selected The following types can be selected 234 15 Coefficients and Tables Application a Type B b TypeE c TypeJ d Type K e Type N f TypeR g TypeS h TypeT m Type AuPt Gold Platinum 5 The temperature range for the thermocouple type must be selected The following ranges can be selected Table 2 Temperature Range of Thermocouple Types Type Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Other Type B 0 to 630 615C 630 615 to 1820C N A N A Type E 270 to 0C 0 to 1000C N A N A Type J 210 to 760C 760 to 1200C N A N A Type K 270 to 0C 0 to 1372C N A N A Type N 270 to 0C 0 to 1300C N A N A Type R 50 to 1064 18C 1064 18 to 1664 5C 1664 5 to 1768 1C 50C to 1768 10 using extrapolation Type S 50 to 1064 18C 1064 18 to 1664 5C 1664 5 to 1768 1C 50C to 1768 10 using extrapolation Type T 270 to 0C 0 to 400C N A N A Type AuPt 0 to 1000C 0 to 1000C N A N A 8th order Canadian 9th order American Polynomial
76. set points at least one heat source must be configured and the Fixed Points Pseudo driver does not need to be configured Click the OK button to close the Heat Source Configuration dialog 12 2 3 Fixed Point Set point Configuration When MET TEMP II has been configured with only the Fixed Points heat source pseudo driver as indicated in the previous section only fixed point set points can be added to the set point configuration Select the Set points op tion in the Calibration menu to display the Set point Configuration dialog Set point Configuration xi l Set point Configuration 0 01 C Fixed Point TP 29 7646 C Fixed Point MP 231 928 C Fixed Point FP 419 527 C Fixed Point FP lt new set point gt Insert Fixed Point Remove Set point Set Defaults Move Down Remove All Set points Set point Uncertainty 0 001 to 10 000 or N A4 ry ma Blc Auto Generate Set points Insert Set point ITOE Duration 0 to 240 Cancel 30 S minutes Figure 78 Set point Configuration Dialog The Auto Generate Set points and Insert Set point buttons are always disabled 155 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Click the Insert Fixed Point button to add a new fixed point set point to the set point configuration The Fixed Points dialog is displayed Ix Fixed Points Fixed Points Select the fixed point standard to use for this set point TPW 0 01 TE 5901 12345 TPW 0 01 TPW 0 01 TPW 0 01
77. tab is for selecting general software defaults or preferences General Ear Default Settings X Show help balloons X Enable print preview window X Select printer before printing reports and tables X Maximize print preview window Print preview window zoom setting so E Figure 121 General Tab The Show help balloons check box turns on and off the help balloons Help bal loons are displayed when the mouse pointer is placed over a button on the toolbar The Enable print preview window check box forces the reports and tables to be displayed in a preview window on screen when printing If this check box is not selected reports and tables are printed directly to the printer when the print button is clicked The Select printer before printing reports and tables check box forces the soft ware to display the Select Printer dialog when printing The user can then select the printer to which reports and tables are printed If this check box is not se lected reports and tables are printed on the default printer To change the de fault printer use the Setup Printer option in the File menu The Maximize print preview window check box determines whether the Print Preview window is maximized when displayed If this check box is selected the Print Preview window is maximized when it is displayed The Print preview window zoom setting determines the default size of the re port or table within the Print Preview windo
78. test is closed To close a test select the Close Test option from the File menu Test reports may be printed once the test has been stopped or finished success fully To print a test report select the Print Report option from the File menu When printing reports from the MET TEMP II Test Display the graph of the reference probe readings should be paused first 2 Configuring a Test 25 Configuring a Test MET TEMP II was designed to be very flexible The user may select from a va riety of test equipment and has control over most aspects of a test Before MET TEMP II can perform a test the software must know the following information e What test equipment is being used e How is the test equipment connected e What is being calibrated e What temperature set points should be used e What scale the readings should be taken in The easiest way to create a new configuration is to use the Equipment Info dia log This dialog visually displays the current configuration information and al lows access to all of the dialogs necessary to create a configuration The Equipment Info dialog is displayed when the Create new configuration option is selected on the MET TEMP II Introduction dialog or by selecting the Equip ment Info option in the Configuration menu Equipment Info x Equipment Info Step 2 Step 4 Reference Save As Readout Model 1560 Heat Source 1 a Model 1560 S N 423543 Model 9105 S
79. the heat source is a bath The Fixed Point Options settings are used to indicate how MET TEMP II works with fixed point cells The Prompt to confirm method of realization check box determines whether MET TEMP II displays a message to confirm the currently selected method of realization every time a fixed point set point is added on the Set point Configu ration dialog If this check box is not selected the currently configured method of realization is used 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 36 3 4 2 1 The Require calibration and recalibration dates on fixed point cells determines whether MET TEMP II requires a fixed point cell s calibration and recalibration dates to be entered before it can be used to perform calibrations If this check box is not checked the dates are not required To manage the fixed point cells supported by MET TEMP II click the Setup Fixed Points button The Fixed Points dialog is displayed Refer to Section 3 4 2 1 Fixed Points for more information on setting up fixed points Important MET TEMP II allows calibrations to be performed using fixed point cells only or by mixing fixed point set points with comparison set points as a convenience to the user It is assumed that if you are using these features you are familiar with the process and theory of performing calibrations using fixed point cells This User s Guide does not provide any detailed information as to how to perform fixed point calibratio
80. the highlighted test probe s in the Select probe list If the Preview before writing to database check box is selected the coefficients and residuals are displayed on the Coefficients and Residuals dialog after being calculated The user is asked whether to save the coefficients Otherwise the coefficients are automatically saved in the database after being calculated 190 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 191 Click the Continue button to proceed The application will verify that the read ings for the selected test probe meet the requirements for the selected type of coefficients If all requirements are met the Select Set points dialog is dis played If the requirements are not met the Insufficient Data dialog is dis played indicating that the selected type of coefficients cannot be calculated using the available data for the selected test probe Click the OK button to close the Insufficient Data dialog and return to the Calculate Coefficients dialog Insufficient Data q xj Set points There are not enough set points to calculate TS 90 coefficients Requirements At Least 5 Set points One set point at or near 0 01 C TPw Between 2 and 10 set points Range 4 189 3442 C to 0 0100 C Between 2 and 10 set points Range 8 0 0000 C to 419 5270 C See the User s Guide or help file search on keyword ITS 90 for requirements Figure 99 Insufficient Data Dialog Click the Cancel button to close
81. the same SmartSwitch port MET TEMP II allows the same SmartSwitch port to be assigned to more than one instrument for dual well heat sources The Controller address is used only when the selected heat source is a Hart 9112 or 9113 furnace The controller used in these instruments requires a 2 digit address when communicating through the serial port Enter the control ler address in the Controller address box For more details see the Model 9112 or 9113 User s Guide When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this instrument An in ventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this instru ment before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations If the calibration and recalibration dates are required a current calibration re cord must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will au tomatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Defaults dialog the description and calibration and recalibration dates may be synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset cannot be found in the MET TRACK database a message is displayed Click Y
82. time ap proximately one minute after the heat source set point is changed This option may be recommended when the user is attempting to determine the best set tings to use for specific set points The Prompt user to override settings after time specified below option causes MET TEMP II to display a message box which pauses the test until the user clicks the OK button prompting the user to override the settings for the current set point if the tolerance specification is not met within a specific time frame This time frame can be specified using the How much time should the heat source be given box MET TEMP II begins to count down this time approxi mately one minute after the heat source set point is changed The user can override the current set point settings by selecting the Stability Override option from the Calibration menu This option may be recommended when tests are not left unattended for long periods of time The Override settings and continue test after time specified below option causes MET TEMP II to ignore the tolerance specification for the current set point if not met within a specific time frame and start taking measurements This time frame can be specified using the How much time should the heat source be given box MET TEMP II begins to count down this time approximately one minute after the heat source set point is changed This option may be recom mended when tests are left unattended for long periods of time The Ho
83. with MET TRACK User Name Once successfully logged into the MET TRACK database the MET TRACK features are enabled The MT Asset number box appears on all appropriate configuration dialogs and all MET TRACK menu options are enabled When configuring a test or opening a configuration file MET TEMP II at tempts to locate an inventory record in the MET TRACK database for each piece of test equipment or probe based on the model serial number and manu facturer If a match is found the asset number is read in and displayed in the MT Asset number box Otherwise a prompt is displayed indicating no match ing asset record was found If no asset record exists for this instrument yet launch MET TRACK by clicking Yes and add an inventory record for this in strument If this instrument requires calibration add a calibration record for this instrument also Refer to the MET TRACK documentation for help on adding records to the database Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer must match EXACTLY If an asset record exists but MET TEMP II is unable to locate it you may need to modify the manufacturer information in the MET TRACK database Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the manufacturer description calibration and recalibration dates in MET TEMP II can be automatically synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database
84. 0 0998661 126 00 38 141561 0 0980075 5 00 26 057325 0 1017163 66 00 32 205450 0 0998355 127 00 38 239568 0 0979772 6 00 26 159042 0 1016852 67 00 32 305286 0 0998049 128 00 38 337545 0 0979469 7 00 26 260727 0 1016541 68 00 32 405091 0 0997742 129 00 38 435492 0 0979166 8 00 26 362381 0 1016230 69 00 32 504865 0 0997436 130 00 38 533409 0 0978863 9 00 26 464004 0 1015920 70 00 32 604608 0 0997130 131 00 38 631295 0 0978560 10 00 26 565596 0 1015609 71 00 32 704322 0 0996824 132 00 38 729151 0 0978258 11 00 26 667157 0 1015299 72 00 32 804004 0 0996518 133 00 38 826977 0 0977955 12 00 26 768687 0 1014989 73 00 32 903656 0 0996212 134 00 38 924773 0 0977652 13 00 26 870186 0 1014678 74 00 33 003277 0 0995907 135 00 39 022538 0 0977349 14 00 26 971653 0 1014368 75 00 33 102868 0 0995601 136 00 39 120273 0 0977047 15 00 27 073090 0 1014058 76 00 33 202428 0 0995295 137 00 39 217977 0 0976744 16 00 27 174496 0 1013748 77 00 33 301957 0 0994989 138 00 39 315652 0 0976442 17 00 27 275871 0 1013439 78 00 33 401456 0 0994684 139 00 39 413296 0 0976139 18 00 27 377215 0 1013129 79 00 33 500925 0 0994378 140 00 39 510910 0 0975837 19 00 27 478528 0 1012819 80 00 33 600362 0 0994073 141 00 39 608494 0 0975535 20 00 27 579810 0 1012510 81 00 33 699770 0 0993767 142 00 39 706047 0 0975232 21 00 27 681061 0 1012200 82 00 33 799146 0 0993462 143 00 39 803570 0 0974930 22 00 27 782281 0 1011891 83 00 33 898493 0 0993157 144 00 39 901063 0 0974628 23 00 27 883470 0 1011582
85. 050 COMP 0 01 0 0100 100 0235 0 010 TP 25 00 25 0155 110 2354 0 050 COMP 50 00 49 9895 123 5642 0 050 COMP 75 00 75 0045 132 2514 0 050 COMP 100 00 99 9692 138 2563 0 050 COMP 125 00 124 9835 145 0251 0 050 COMP Test Equipment Manufacturer Model Description Serial Number Recall Date Hart Scientific Inc 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer 2 RTD 2 TC A23564 6 30 2002 Hart Scientific Inc 5614 Secondary Reference Temperature Std 1 4 360984 1 17 2003 x 12 Hart Scientific Inc 5901 TPW 123456 2 1 2003 Hart Scientific Inc 9105 Drywell Low Temperature A23765 NCR Notes This test was performed in accordance with the test procedure indicated above Calibration Date 6 3 2002 Technician Recall Date 6 3 2003 Cal E Breight Temperature 21C Humidity 25 Approved By Customer Order 54543 5448 This report shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval of Temp Tech Co Figure 67 Example Default Report of Calibration Temperature vs Resistance Data 137 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Report of Calibration Report No CE200206126 001 Temp Tech Co Page of 1 105 Celcius Drive Out Town USA 34567 8998 Model 5614 Customer Our Customer Serial 367543 One Customer Way Description Probe Secondary Standard Technology Drive Any Town USA 23456 Calibration Range Full Received Condition New Current 1 0 mA Procedure HST000 0 The above referenced instrument was calibrated
86. 1 gt Check Port ALL INSTRUMENTS MUST BE SET TO OPERATE AT 2400 BAUD Cancel Figure 27 Communications Port Configuration Dialog The Enable communications during configuration check box is provided to en able verifying communications with test equipment during the configuration process The default state of this check box is determined by the state of the Enable communications during configuration check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog The drop down list contains a list of all of the available COM ports If a port is being used by another device the port will not appear in the drop down list If there are no ports available a message will be displayed and this software will not be able to perform a test After selecting the COM port click the Check Port button to verify communi cations The Check SmartSwitch dialog is displayed Refer to Section 4 2 2 Check SmartSwitch Dialog for more details Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 4 2 2 Check SmartSwitch Dialog The Check SmartSwitch dialog is displayed when the Check Port button is se lected on the Communications Port Configuration dialog Check SmartSwitch xi Check SmartSwitch The LEDs on the SmartSwitch should be activated as indicated below Click Yes if the LEDs on the SmartS witch
87. 216 Delimiter 207 208 Demo version 1 Description 38 40 64 67 69 72 75 97 254 DewK 2 15 17 22 34 83 105 108 Directories tab 221 dr dT 204 Drivers 59 60 64 68 73 76 154 dT dW 204 Dual well heat sources 79 104 Duration 35 86 92 93 111 169 E Edit 37 44 Edit test information 123 Editing Set points 92 EMF 203 Ending date 208 Ending set point 90 Enter data 105 106 Enter Order ID 133 Equipment info 82 Error 204 Exact solution 236 Excitation current 98 99 Exit 58 221 Export 54 126 177 179 207 208 214 216 Export coefficients 208 214 216 Export data 208 216 Export fields 211 Export file 207 EXPORT folder 221 Export probe data 209 210 Export Settings tab 207 Export table 207 Export test data 125 208 EXPORT INI file 213 EXPORT INX file 213 EXPORT TXT file 221 Index External heat source 17 81 104 105 108 External Heat Source Model 78 F File menu 31 216 Firmware 8 First derivative 204 Fixed point calibration 4 26 153 157 Fixed Point Set point 91 Fixed point set points 155 Fixed points 4 6 26 36 37 39 79 81 87 105 151 154 156 Folders 221 Fonts amp Sizes tab 50 201 Freezing point 38 39 Full range 107 Furnace 79 86 G General tab 33 217 Generate table 197 Graph 115 Graph settings 115 Graph tab 42 H Hardware 7 Header 211 Heat source calibration 5 27 72 77 88 91 93 95 145 159 161 163
88. 28 nected The SmartSwitch must be connected to an available COM port on the computer and the baud rate for all instruments must be set to 2400 baud Configure MET TEMP II to use the heat source as the reference When prompted if you are calibrating a heat source click Yes No further con figuration is needed for the reference Define the test equipment to use as the scanner When performing heat source calibrations the scanner will actually act as the reference instru ment with the test probe UUT acting as the reference probe Define the heat source to calibrate Make sure the Calibrate heat source check box on the Heat Source Configuration dialog is checked Fill in the calibration interval and click the Customer button to indicate the sta tus and owner of the heat source Click the Test Calibration Compatibil ity button to make sure MET TEMP II can calibrate the heat source Optional Save the current instrument configuration Once the above in formation has been entered the current configuration can be saved The configuration does not need to be saved to start a test However if the same equipment is going to be used to perform future tests saving the configuration provides a quick method to setup the equipment Define the set points for the test The set points are the temperatures at which the heat source will be calibrated As Found and the set points at which As Left data will be taken When calibrating a heat source
89. 3 5448 This report shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval of Temp Tech Co Figure 68 Example Default Report of Calibration Temperature vs Temperature Data 138 11 Reports of Calibration 11 2 Custom Reports of Calibration MET TEMP II supports using custom reports of calibration If the default re port template isn t exactly the type of report required for your application con tact Hart sales representatives for information on obtaining custom report templates designed to your specifications MET TEMP II ships with two custom reports of calibration These reports are described in the following sections 11 2 1 Pass Fail Report of Calibration MET TEMP II comes with a custom Report of Calibration that is designed to print a tolerance and a pass fail status associated with each set point on the report A Note The tolerance that prints on this report is not the same as the toler ance specified on the Set point Configuration dialog when the test was configured This report prompts for the tolerance to be entered the first time the report is printed for each test probe To print the Pass Fail Report of Calibration select the Use custom report tem plate option on the Print Test Report dialog and select the PASSFAIL EXE re port template Click the Print button The Print Custom Report of Calibration dialog is displayed Print Pass Fail Report of Calibration x Select a Test Se
90. 4 9697 C 89 2564 Ohms C Ohms N A C 0 050 C N A COMP CE200206126 002 5614 365232 Probe secondary standard 365 ohms 5614 365232 0 01 C 0 0100 C 100 0235 ohms C Ohms N A C 0 010 C N A TP CE200206126 002 5614 365232 Probe Secondary Standard 365 ohms 5614 365232 50 00 C 49 9895 C 123 5642 ohms C ohms N A C 0 050 C N A COMP CE200206126 002 5614 365232 Probe Secondary Standard 365 ohms 5614 365232 100 00 C 99 9692 C 138 2563 ohms C Ohms N A C 0 050 C N A COMP CE200206124 Ca1 E Breight 6 3 2002 9 39 28 AM 6 3 2002 10 19 53 AmM 12 40 09 HSTOOO O 1529 A23564 Hart Scientific 5614 360984 Hart Scientific 5901 123456 Hart Scientific 9105 423765 Hart Scientific Inc Chub E4 Thermometer 2 RTD 2 TC 5 1 2002 6 30 2002 Inc Secondary Reference Temperature Std 1 4 x 12 1 17 2002 1 17 2003 Inc TPw 2 1 2002 2 1 2003 Inc Drywell Low Temperature CE200206124 002 5614 5453 Probe Secondary Standard 365 C SAMPLE 10 0 01 C 0 0100 C 0 0442 C C C 0 0542 C 1 000 C N A TP CE200206124 002 5614 5453 Probe Secondary Standard 365 C SAMPLE 10 50 00 C 50 0268 C 0 0441 C C C 50 0709 C 1 000 C N A COMP CE200206124 002 5614 5453 Probe Secondary Standard 365 C SAMPLE 10 100 00 C 100 0579 C 0 0433 C C C 100 1012 C 1 000 C N A COMP CE200206124 003 TYPE K 001 Type CE200206124 003 TYPE K 001 Type CE200206124 004 TYPE K 012 Type CE200206124 004 TYPE
91. 68 0 0981591 182 00 43 583457 0 0963186 Figure 133 Example Default Table Temperature vs Resistance 232 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 233 15 12 3 15 12 4 4 The residuals are not calculated when calculating IPTS 68 coefficients Callendar Van Dusen Requirements The following requirements must be met when Callendar Van Dusen is selected as the type of coefficients to calculate for platinum probes For more informa tion concerning the method used to calculate the Callendar Van Dusen coeffi cients refer to Section 15 12 6 Methods Used for Calculating Coefficients 2 3 The reference probe readings must be in temperature C F or K The UUT test probe readings must be in resistance Ohms or kOhms At least 3 set points must be used but no more than 10 set points can be used If any one of the set points is more than 5 degrees below OC 9 de grees below 32F or 5 degrees below 273 15 K at least 4 set points must be used Note This software automatically determines if the BETA coefficients need to be calculated based on the following criteria e The reference reading closest to OC is not used to determine whether BETA is calculated e If any other reference reading is below OC BETA will be calculated e Otherwise BETA will not be calculated One of the set points used should be close to OC This is not a require ment however results of the calculations become less relia
92. 73 15 K to 933 473 K iv Range 8 273 15 K to 4692 677 K v Range 9 273 15 K to 505 078 K vi Range 10 273 15 K to 429 7485 K vii Range 11 273 15 K to 302 9146 K b All Ranges require the Triple Point of Water TPW set point and the following i Range 6 requires at least 4 and no more than 10 set points ii Range 7 requires at least 3 and no more than 10 set points iii Ranges 8 and 9 require at least 2 but no more than 10 set points iv Ranges 10 and 11 require at least 1 but no more than 10 set points c All set points should fall within the temperature range of the selected high range 7 Selecting None for both the low range and the high range is not permitted 8 The residuals are calculated for each set point used in calculating the co efficients with the exception of the Triple Point of Water TPW set point Residuals are always in the same scale as the reference probe readings 15 12 2 IPTS 68 Requirements The following requirements must be met when IPTS 68 is selected as the type of coefficients to calculate for platinum probes For more information concern ing the method used to calculate the IPTS 68 coefficients refer to Section 15 12 6 Methods Used for Calculating Coefficients 1 The reference probe readings must be in temperature C F or K 2 The UUT test probe readings must be in resistance Ohms or kOhms 3 Exactly 4 set points must be used a One set point must be within a few degrees
93. Click the Cancel button to abort calculating coefficients and return to the Main Display 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 5 1 4 Calculate Coefficients Dialog The Calculate Coefficients dialog is displayed when the OK button is clicked on the Coefficient Calculation dialog Calculate ITS 90 Coefficients E xi Select a Test Probe Select a test probe based on 8 Test number O Model number Test number CE 200206126 El Select all with this test number IX Preview before writing to database Select probe for 1TS 90 coefficients Figure 98 Calculate Coefficients Dialog To calculate coefficients for a test probe you must select either a test number or a model number on which to base the test probe selection If the test number option is selected a list of test numbers becomes available Select a test number Once the test number is selected the probe model num bers and serial numbers appear in the Select probe list If the model number option is selected a list of probe model numbers becomes available Select a model number Once the model number is selected the probe serial numbers and test numbers for this model appear in the Select probe list Select the test probes from the Select probe list If the Select all with this test number check box is selected coefficients are calculated for all probes associ ated with this test number If not selected coefficients are calculated only for
94. Configuration dialog is not closed Clicking the Cancel button discards any changes made and closes this dialog 100 5 Calibration Menu 101 5 4 1 1 Customer Information Dialog The Customer Information dialog is used to enter additional test probe informa tion and can only be displayed by clicking the Customer button on the Test Probe Configuration dialog or the Heat Source Configuration dialog when cali brating a heat source Customer Information x Customer Information Model number 5614 Serial number 123457 Received condition In house calibration N Y a al Check standard Customer order ID Customer name Arz putero Customer address One Customer Way Technology Drive Any Town USA 23456 Cancel X Save this customer to the database Figure 47 Customer Information Dialog The Customer Information dialog displays the UUT test probe or heat source model and serial number the received condition in house and check standard settings and customer order ID name and address information This informa tion is printed on the Report of Calibration for this test probe The information on this dialog is required and must be entered before a calibra tion test can be started The Received condition is the condition of the UUT prior to this calibration The choices are e In Tolerance e Out of Tolerance e New e Recalibration The In house calibration check box is for des
95. E 200205122 PX Preview report Select heat source Model SerialNo Heat Source Report of Calibration Options X Print As Found section on report X Print Tolerance and Pass Fail data in As Found amp As Left sections X Print Set point Resistance data in As Found amp As Left sections Figure 72 Print Heat Source Report of Calibration To use this custom report you must select either a test number or a model num ber on which to base the heat source selection 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 146 If the test number option is selected a list of test numbers becomes available Once a test number is selected the heat source model number and serial num ber appear below From the list entitled Select heat source select the heat source model number and serial number If the model number option is selected a list of heat source model numbers be comes available Once a model number is selected the heat source serial num bers and test numbers appear below From the list entitled Select heat source select the heat source test number and serial number Select the heat source in the Select heat source list If the Preview report checkbox is selected the report is displayed in the Print Preview window If the Preview report check box is not selected the report is sent directly to the printer Selecting the Print As Found section on report option indicates that the As Found section on the second
96. ET TEMP II will display a warning message Use this option to re pair the corrupt database After the database is repaired the database is then compacted following the same process outlined in the previous section 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 8 3 8 3 1 120 Maintain Equipment Selecting the Maintain Equipment option displays the Maintain Equipment dia log This option can be used to remove unused test equipment reference probe and test probe information from the database Maintain Test Equipment Dialog The Maintain Test Equipment dialog can be used to remove unused test equip ment reference probe and test probe information from the database Removing an item from the database prevents that item from appearing in drop down lists when configuring a test Maintain Equipment l l Maintain Equipment Test instruments and reference probes Test probes UUTs Instruments Model Serialmumber 1529 A23564 E A2354 4343242 A23786 423456 423212 3434324 343242 360984 Remove Remove All Figure 58 Maintain Equipment Dialog Select the Test equipment and reference probes option to view a list of the ref erence readout reference module reference probe scanner scanner module and heat source instruments that have been used by MET TEMP II Select the Test probes UUTs option to view a list of the test probes that have been cali brated by MET TEMP II To remove one or more in
97. ET TRACK asset number for each test probe or heat source that was calibrated for the selected test If no MET TRACK asset num ber has been assigned to an instrument the MT Asset column indicates lt not as signed gt This will be the case for all instruments that were calibrated using prior versions of MET TEMP II Calibrate it as well as for all tests that were performed when the link to the MET TRACK database was not active Important If you want characterization coefficients to be exported along with the calibration data you must calculate the coefficients using the Co efficients and Tables utility prior to exporting the calibration data To begin the export process click the Export button Calibration data for all UUTs are exported to the MET TRACK database Refer to Section 14 MET TRACK Export Process for more information on the export process After exporting the calibration data click the Close button to close this dialog 9 Help Menu 127 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 Help Menu The Help menu provides access to the MET TEMP II help file The Technical Support contact information and About MET TEMP II dialog are also available from the Help menu Contents Search for Help on Getting Started Technical Support About Figure 63 Help Menu Contents Selecting the Contents option opens the MET TEMP II help file and displays the contents topic Search for Help On Selecting the Search for Help on o
98. Edit button The Edit Fixed Point dialog is displayed To add a new fixed point cell to MET TEMP II click the New button The New Fixed Point dialog is displayed To delete a fixed point cell select the fixed point cell to delete from the list and click the Delete button Refer to Section 3 4 2 1 Fixed Points for more detailed information on config uring fixed point cells Configuring MET TEMP II to Perform Fixed Point Only Calibrations MET TEMP II can be configured to perform calibrations using fixed point cells only The only differences between configuring MET TEMP II to perform fixed point only calibrations and performing comparison calibrations are in the heat source and set point configurations Fixed Point Reference Readout Configuration Even though MET TEMP II does not actually store readings taken from a refer ence probe when configured for fixed point set points only a reference readout and reference probe must still be configured as if performing comparison cali brations This is because Calibrate it continuously takes readings from and graphs the reference probe Configure the reference readout and reference probe as indicated in Section 4 3 Reference 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Because MET TEMP II must always be able to take readings from the refer ence MET TEMP II cannot be configured to use the heat sources as the reference 12 2 2 Fixed Point Heat Source Configuration To configure MET TEMP II to perfo
99. If calibrating the heat source enter the calibration interval in the box provided If the link to MET TRACK is active the calibration interval should be filled in automatically when the asset number is located If calibrating the heat source click the Customer button to configure the cus tomer information for this heat source Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog Note The heat source information is required and must be entered to start a calibration test If you are using a Hart instrument as a heat source set the scan hold mode and program control to OFF where applicable and set the cut out value to a temperature higher than the maximum set point for the heat source before starting a test Also the user should be aware of the approach set ting See the instrument s User s Guide for details on setting these functions 4 5 2 Temperature Range Configuration Dialog The Temperature Range Configuration dialog is displayed when the Range but ton on the Heat Source Configuration dialog is clicked This dialog is used to 80 4 Configuration Menu 81 specify the useable temperature range and to specify a cool down temperature for the selected heat source Temperature Range Configuration xi Temperature Range Configuration Select the range of set points for which the 9105 is used Select the minimum s
100. It determines only if a test valid based on the presence or absence of information for the test in the database 8 4 1 1 Invalid Test Dialog The Invalid Test dialog displays information about the test that is being vali dated The Test is invalid for the following reasons list shows the reasons why the test is considered to be invalid If no readings were found for one or more 122 8 Utilities Menu 123 8 5 test probes the Probes associated with this test list shows all test probes UUTs associated with the test Invalid Test 3 xi Invalid Test Test number CE 2002051 03 is invalid for the following reasons No readings for test probe model TYPE K serial number 001 found No readings for test probe model TYPE K serial number 002 found No readings for test probe model PT200 serial number O06 found No readings for test probe model PT100 serial number 009 found Probes associated with this test gt Options TYPE K 001 TYPE K 002 Do not remove test a aD f 0 O Remove this test PT 4wire 010 TYPE K 011 Remove selected probes _ Cancel TYPE K 012 Figure 60 Invalid Test Dialog Based on the information provided the user must decide what to do with the test The options available to the user are to not remove the test remove the test or remove selected probes Selecting the Do not remove test option leaves the test as is Selecting the Remove this test
101. K 012 Type Probe 180 mV SAMPLE 87 0 01 C 0 0100 C 0 0127 mv C mv N A C 1 000 C 29 1290 TP Probe 180 mv SAMPLE 87 50 00 C 50 0218 C 0 0132 mV C mV N A C L 000 C 29 4800 COMP Probe 180 C SAMPLE 5500 0 01 C 0 0100 C 673 8723 C C C 673 8623 C 1 000 C N A TP Probe 180 C SAMPLE 5500 50 00 C 50 0203 C 685 0152 C C C 634 9949 C 1 000 C N A COMP K K CE200206124 003 TYPE K 001 Type K Probe 180 mv SAMPLE 87 100 00 C 100 0523 C 0 0126 mV C mV N A C 1 000 C 29 6420 COMP K K K CE200206124 004 TYPE K 012 Type Probe 180 C SAMPLE 5500 100 00 C 100 0443 C 662 8405 C C C 562 7962 C 1 000 C N A COMP Figure 117 Example Export Data File 212 When MET TEMP II is installed the header and test equipment sections are blank and the readings section is configured so that the exported data is com patible with previous versions of this software To customize the data to be exported in each section select the table containing the data to be exported using the Select table drop down list Available tables are e TestStart Contains general test data that applies to all UUTs such as test number ambient conditions paragraph test procedure technician name etc e TestEquipment Contains information about the test equipment used to perform the calibration test such as model and serial numbers calibration amp recall dates etc e TestProbeEquipment Contains information about e
102. MET TRACK to add or update a calibration record for the asset Exporting calibration data to MET TRACK database fails Could not locate asset record Make sure the asset exists in MET TRACK Calibration data was already ex ported to MET TRACK Do not need to export calibration data again 250 If calibration data was exported in error previously use MET TRACK to delete the existing calibration record and try again 18 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Common Problems Problem Possible Cause Solution Hydra Series Datalogger Issues When starting a test nothing happens No readings are being Hydra channels not configured Make sure all channels with probes connected are configured to read the proper scale displayed Hydra not scanning channels Make sure the Hydra is operating in scan mode MET TEMP II is not able to take readings from a Hydra channel Actual and UUT columns on Re port of Calibration indicate No Reading at one or more set points Hydra channel not properly con figured prior to starting calibration test Make sure all Hydra channels have been configured prior to starting a calibration test MET TEMP II does not take cor rect readings for 4 wire probes Incorrect channel configuration For 4 wire probes MET TEMP II should be configured to use the lower of the two channels being used by the probe i e if the 4 wire probe is connected to channels 3 and 13
103. Menu 83 The Equipment Info dialog indicates which configuration steps still need to be completed before a test can be started All incomplete steps are indicated in red text When the configuration of a step is complete the text turns black The test equipment set points and test probes can all be configured through this dialog To configure the test equipment set points and test probes follow the steps indicated by the Step n labels 1 The communications port can be configured by clicking the COM Port button Refer to Section 4 2 COM Port for more details The box on the right side of the COM Port button displays the currently selected COM Port 2 The reference readout reference module if applicable and reference probe can be configured by clicking the Reference button Refer to Sec tion 4 3 Reference for more details The box below the Reference but ton displays the current reference readout reference module if applicable and reference probe configuration information 3 The scanner and scanner modules if applicable can be configured by clicking the Scanner button Refer to Section 4 4 Scanner for more de tails The box below the Scanner button displays the current scanner and scanner module if applicable configuration information 4 The heat sources can be configured by clicking the Heat Sources button Refer to Section 4 5 Heat Sources for more details The box below the Heat Sources button displays the
104. N 423543 Port A S N 12345 Port A Port C Module Heat Source 2 Model 6045 Step 1 Step 5 Step 6 COM Port f com Figure 8 Equipment Info Dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide The Equipment Info dialog also indicates which configuration items still need to be completed before a test can be started All incomplete steps are high lighted in red text When the configuration of a step is complete the text turns black MET TEMP II now includes the ability to perform calibrations using fixed point cells and also supports calibrating certain heat sources The follow ing sections outline the general configuration process for each of the types of calibrations that MET TEMP II supports 2 1 Comparison Fixed Point and Mixed Calibrations The following section outlines the steps necessary to configure a test to cali brate probes using comparison and fixed point realization 1 Define the communication settings for the instruments The communica tion settings consist of the COM port to which the SmartSwitch is con nected The SmartSwitch must be connected to an available COM port on the computer and the baud rate for all instruments must be set to 2400 baud Refer to Section 4 2 1 Communications Port Configuration for details on configuring the communication settings 2 Define the test equipment to use as the reference MET TEMP II requires a reference For comparison calibrations the reference is the st
105. Probe Validation Results of coefficient calculations are stored in a table in the database Other in formation required to print a Report of Calibration for the test probes is stored in many separate tables within MET TEMP IP s database in a relational manner If a test has been removed from MET TEMP II it may no longer be possible to 224 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 225 print a Report of Calibration for a test probe using this application If the data base became corrupt some of the data for a particular test probe may have been lost These are a couple of the reasons why test probe data may not be valid The validation feature can be used to determine if there are records for every test in every required table Clicking the Validate or Validate All buttons on the Maintain Test Results dia log performs a check on the selected test probes to see if the required informa tion to print a Report of Calibration exists in each of the database tables for the test probe If the software determines that required records are missing a test probe is invalid the Invalid Test Probe dialog is displayed Otherwise a mes sage appears stating the validity of the test probes Invalid Test Probe xi M Invalid Test Probe Report number CE200001 005 001 is invalid for the following reasons No general test data found No test equipment information found No test probe information found Dptions 8 Do not remove r
106. RACK Tab The first step to exporting calibration data to MET TRACK is to identify the data to export Click the Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK option in the Utilities menu Select the test containing the data to export and click the Export button The calibration data for ALL instruments calibrated are exported to MET TRACK When a calibration test is closed MET TEMP II can be configured to either au tomatically export calibration data or to prompt to export the calibration data If characterization coefficients need to be calculated for a probe the coefficients must be calculated before exporting the calibration data to MET TRACK MET TEMP II creates a calibration record for each UUT and exports the fol lowing information to the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II Data Calibration Field Calibration date 2301 Calibration time 2333 Technician name 2307 Ambient temperature 2311 Ambient humidity 2312 Order ID 2314 Test procedure 2320 User defined commentst 2329 Procedure end date 2342 Procedure end time 2343 Aborted flag 2363 Pass flagt 2323 Characterization coefficients or 23418 heat source calibration coefficients iThe user defined comment can be entered on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog The Pass flag field 2323 setting is determined by the options on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog SBy default coefficients are exported to field 2341 Refer to Section 14 2 Changing Coefficients Export Fiel
107. Section 10 Configuration Files Defaults Selecting the Defaults option displays the Defaults dialog for selecting or modi fying default settings Default values or parameters can be set by selecting one of eight tabs General Set points Setup Graph Reports User Test or Fonts amp Sizes These defaults are used each time MET TEMP II is started Each of the settings on these tabs is described in detail in the following sections 3 File Menu 33 General Tab The General tab is for selecting general software defaults or preferences User Test Fonts amp Sizes MET TRACK General EEC Seu Jon Renate General Defaults FT Show introduction dialog on startup X Show help balloons X Produce audible beep when prompting user to enter UUT data O Use default system beep Play WAY file EAWINNTWWEDIACHIMES Way TA Enable print preview window PX Maximize preview window Print preview window zoom setting so a X Select printer before printing reports Channel SmartSwitch port X Get ambient conditions from DewK 1 y F Figure 10 General Tab If the Show introduction dialog on startup check box is selected the MET TEMP II Introduction dialog is displayed each time the software runs The Show help balloons check box turns on and off the help balloons Help bal loons are displayed when the mouse pointer is placed over a button on the toolbar The Produce audible beep when prompting user
108. Set point Configuration xi Set point Configuration Use 9105 Fixed Point TP Use 9105 Use 9105 Auto Generate Set points Insert Set point Pla Use 6045 Use 6045 Use 6045 Use 9112 Set point Uncertainty 0 001 to 10 000 or N44 75 00 E 0 052 2 E Window 20 001 to 100 000 Heat Source to use Insert Fixed Point Remove Set point Set Defaults 0 010 a c 9105 Extemal 6045 Tolerance 0 0001 to 20 0000 E X Enable proportional band Duration 0 to 240 Proportional band Cancel D gt 2 minutes 0 002140 2 Figure 40 Set point Configuration Dialog Up to 40 set points can be configured MET TEMP II allows set points to be set to 2 decimal places of precision Most Hart heat sources can handle 2 deci mal places Some heat sources however cannot The set points for the Model 9112 and 9113 furnaces are always rounded to the nearest degree Set points are entered in the same temperature scale C or F as the heat sources and reference scale To change this scale refer to Section 6 Scale Menu The default value for this scale can be changed on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog Set points appear in the list in the order in which they will be used during the test By selecting a set point in the set point list the set point value window toler ance duration and uncertainty associated with that set point appear in the ap propriate boxes If more than one heat source can
109. Setup tab on the Defaults dialog Selecting this option does not change the default scale El Set to F Selecting the Set to F option converts the current test scale to degrees Fahrenheit Note Although this option can be selected after the instruments and set points have been configured the scale should be selected before con figuring a test To change the scale that is selected by default when MET TEMP II runs see the Setup tab on the Defaults dialog Selecting this option does not change the default scale 7 Graph Menu 115 7 1 Graph Menu The Graph menu provides options for changing the scale of the graph s X axis and Y axis printing the graph and for starting the display and graph of the ref erence probe Graph Settings Print Graph Stop Display Figure 55 Graph Menu ga Graph Settings Selecting the Graph Settings option displays the Graph Settings dialog This option is only enabled when the graph is displayed Graph Settings Dialog The Graph Settings dialog displays the current graph X axis and Y axis set 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide tings These settings default to the graph settings configured on the Graph tab on the Defaults dialog Graph Settings xi l Graph Settings Axis SRA Changing X Axis time o E minutes resets graph Y Axis O Use reference probe range O Fixed range 50 095 rN 30 00 rN e 8 O Show band around current reading 2 10 310 e nad
110. TEMP Il with MET TRACK MET TEMP II is designed to operate as either a stand alone system or it can be configured to interface with the MET TRACK database When configured to operate as a stand alone system MET TEMP II keeps track of all test equipment and calibration test results in its own database just like prior versions formerly Calibrate it and Generate if When configured to interface with the MET TRACK database MET TEMP IT still keeps track of all test equipment and calibration test results in its own data base but additionally requires that all instruments being used to perform a cali bration as well as all instruments being calibrated have corresponding inventory records in the MET TRACK database For instruments that require calibration the MET TRACK database must also contain up to date calibration records Also all calibration test results can be exported to the MET TRACK database including probe characterization coefficients and heat source calibration coefficients To configure the operating mode for MET TEMP II refer to Section 3 4 9 MET TRACK Tab A Important Before configuring MET TEMP II to interface with the MET TRACK database a MET TEMP II license must be applied to the MET TRACK database A MET TEMP II license diskette is sold separately from MET TEMP II To apply the license refer to the MET TRACK docu mentation A Important In order to interface with the MET TRACK database MET TRACK v7 01
111. TF can be opened When opening a set point configuration file all cur rent set points will be overwritten Refer to Section 10 2 Set point Configura tion File for additional information on opening a set point configuration file Note When calibrating a heat source a set point configuration file that con tains the set points to use to calibrate the heat source must be opened before 5 Calibration Menu 89 5 1 1 1 any set points can be inserted Default set point configuration files for all sup ported heat sources are provided Refer to Section 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations for more information Also the Auto Generate Set points and In sert Fixed Point buttons are disabled and cannot be used to insert set points To save set points to a set point configuration file click the Save As button The Windows Save As dialog is displayed The current set points and all as sociated information window tolerance duration uncertainty etc are saved to the configuration file The extension of the set point configuration file is STC for set points saved in degrees C and STF for set points saved in degrees F Refer to Section 10 2 Set point Configuration File for additional informa tion on saving set points Clicking the Set Defaults button displays the Set points tab on the Defaults dia log This allows the default values for the window tolerance duration and un certainty parameters to be configured The default
112. TRACK database a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II If enabled click the Modules button to configure the modules or multiplexers to which the test probes are connected The Scanner Module Configuration dia log is displayed Refer to Section 4 4 2 Scanner Module Configuration Dialog for more details Otherwise click the Test Probes button to configure the test probe information The Test Probe Configuration dialog is displayed Refer to Section 5 4 1 Test Probe Configuration Dialog for more details Note The Test Probes button is not shown on this dialog when MET TEMP II is being configured to calibrate a heat source The Drivers button allows the user to install instrument drivers If there are no models available in the Model number drop down list you must install drivers by clicking the Drivers button 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide
113. The default table includes the date table title report number and pagination information on the top of every page Pages of the table are automatically num bered If a Report of Calibration is being generated and printed with the table the page numbering is continuous i e the Report of Calibration pages are num bered 1 to i where i is the number of pages in the Report of Calibration and the table pages are numbered i 1 to n where n is the sum of the number of pages in the Report of Calibration and the table 228 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 229 15 12 15 12 1 If the table is being printed by itself the pages are numbered starting with the starting page number specified on the Other Settings tab of the Table Options dialog The table is formatted into three columns Each row in each column consists of up to 3 sets of data depending on the selected options The first set of data is the temperature value The second set is the resistance ratio or EMF value de pending on the type of table being generated The third column is the first de rivative inverse difference or error value depending on the type of table being generated The table s minimum and maximum temperatures temperature scale and the increment step between each temperature value is set on the Type and Range tab of the Table Options dialog To see an example of the default table refer to Figure 133 Requirements and Methods The follow
114. User Tab The User tab is for configuring the default name company name and address 46 3 File Menu 47 of the technician performing the test This information prints on the Report of Calibration Use MET TRACK matSwich User Defaults Enter the technician name company name and company address as they are to appear on the Report of Calibration Technician name Cal E Breight Company name Temp Tech Co Company address 105 Celcius Drive Out Town USA 34567 8998 Figure 19 User Tab The information on this tab pertains to the technician performing the test and the technician s company name and address This information was entered when the software was installed but may be changed at any time Changing this information only affects calibrations that are performed from that point on Calibrations that were performed previously will retain the tech nician company name and address information that was configured at the time each test started 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 48 3 4 7 If the link to the MET TRACK database is active the Technician name can be synchronized to the MET TRACK user name when logging into the database For more information refer to Section 3 4 9 MET TRACK Tab Test Tab The Test tab is for selecting defaults specific to the test process Ue Jest MET TRACKsnarSvich Test Defaults FT Self heat test probes UUT s before taki
115. a set point configuration file MUST be opened to define the set points to use Default configuration files are supplied in degrees C for all sup ported heat sources Customized configuration files can be created by opening a default configuration file changing the settings and saving the file under a different name Optional Save the current set point configuration Once the set point information has been entered the current set point configuration can be saved The set point configuration does not need to be saved to start a test However if the same set points are going to be used to perform fu ture tests saving the set point configuration provides a quick method to setup the set points Define the test probe to use MET TEMP II will actually use the probe configured as the test probe as a reference probe The test probe MUST be configured to read temperature Fill in the test probe s calibration and recalibration dates Note When calibrating a heat source make sure that the test probe reference probe is calibrated and that the scanner has been configured with the probe s calibration coefficients so that the temperature read by the test probe is accurate 9 Optional Save the current test probe configuration Once the test probe information has been entered the current test probe configuration can be 2 Configuring a Test 29 10 11 12 saved The test probe configuration does not need to be saved to
116. ach of the test probes UUTs that were calibrated such as model and serial numbers scale of readings etc 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 213 15 6 3 e TestReadings Contains all of the readings for all test probes UUTs in cluding set points reference readings test probe readings CJC readings uncertainty values method of realization etc Next select the field to be exported in the Select field list Then click the button below the section list to which the field should be added The field is added to the end of the list The order in which the fields appear in the lists is the order that the fields will be exported To move a field up or down in a list select the field to move then click the or button accordingly To remove a field from a list select the field and click the E button Any field may be added to any of the sections Also any field can be added to a single list as many times as needed However use caution when adding fields Be aware that e There is only one record in the TestStart table for each test Adding a field to a section from the TestStart table causes the same value to be written every time e There are multiple records in the TestEquipment TestProbeEquipment and TestReadings records for each test Adding a TestEquipment field to the header section for example will only export that field s value for the first record in the TestEquipment table for this test The inform
117. agram displayed when the Check Port button is clicked on the Communications Port Configuration dialog The 8 port and 6 port SmartSwitches are compatible with each other and either should work regardless of the selection on this tab Setup Printer Selecting the Setup Printer option displays the Print Setup dialog that allows the user to select the default printer to which Reports of Calibration should be printed If you are using the default report template the Orientation must be set to Portrait The Paper Size should be set to Letter 8 1 2 x 11 in 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 3 6 Print Report Selecting the Print Report option displays the Print Test Report dialog x Select a Test Report Fonts amp Sizes Select a test probe based on 8 Test number Model number Test number CE 200205102 e Print all reports for this test number IX Preview report Select probes Probe model number Probe serial number A s T E PT 4wire 010 b TYPEK l Report Template Use default report template Use custom report template Cancel Custom report template Pod Figure 24 Print Test Report Dialog To print a report for a test probe you must select either a test number or a model number on which to base the test probe selection If the test number option is selected a list of test numbers becomes available Once a test number is selected the probe model numbers and serial num
118. alculate The set points you select depend on the type of characterization you choose After a test probe UUT has been calibrated using MET TEMP Il this soft ware can be used to calculate characterization coefficients Launch the applica tion from the Utilities menu in MET TEMP II 184 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 185 15 5 1 1 The following sections describe how to calculate coefficients for PRT RTD Thermistor and Thermocouple probes Calculating PRT RTD Coefficients To calculate coefficients for PRT RTD probes select the Platinum Probe option in the Coefficients menu The Platinum Probe Coefficients dialog is displayed Platinum Probe Coefficients xi F Calculation Options Type of coefficients to calculate ITS 90 ba Le Low range Range 4 83 8058 K to 273 1600 K y Range 8 273 1500 K to 692 6770 K y Figure 94 Platinum Probe Coefficients Dialog ITS 90 Select the type of coefficients to calculate using the Type of coefficients to cal culate drop down list For PRT RTD probes the choices are e ITS 90 e IPTS 68 e Callendar Van Dusen e Polynomial Depending on the type of coefficients selected additional information may or may not be required If ITS 90 is selected the low range and high range options must be chosen us ing the Low range and High range drop down lists ITS 90 coefficients can be calculated for the following subranges Low Range e None
119. and or 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide table select the Print Reports and Tables option in the File menu The Print Re ports and Tables dialog is displayed Print Reports and Tables i x Select a Test Probe Select a test probe based on 8 Test number Model number Test number CE200001005 El T Print all reports for this test number X Preview report Select probe Probe Model Number Probe Serial Number IX Print report IX Generate table Cancel ITS 90 Report Options ITS 90 Table Options Figure 103 Print Reports and Tables Dialog To print a report and or table for a test probe you must select either a test num ber or a model number on which to base the test probe selection If the Test number option is selected a list of test numbers becomes available Once a test number is selected probe model numbers and serial numbers ap pear in the Select probe list If the Model number option is selected a list of test probe model numbers be comes available Once a model number is selected probe serial numbers and test numbers appear in the Select probe list A Note This dialog only displays test probes for which coefficients have been calculated and saved in the database Select the test probes from the Select probe list If the Print all reports for this test number check box is selected all test probes in the Select probes list are selected To display the Reports of Calibrati
120. andard against which the test probes are compared The software must be able to communicate with the reference readout instrument The software can use either a reference readout thermometer readout with a reference probe or it can use the heat source s as the reference Refer to Section 4 3 Reference for details on configuring the reference readout instru ment and the reference probe 3 Define the test equipment to use as the scanner The scanner is the instru ment to which all of the test probes are connected To calibrate LIG bi metallic and other thermometers that cannot be interfaced with a readout device or for test probes that are attached to a readout device that is not supported by MET TEMP II the software can be configured to not use a scanner instrument the user is prompted to manually enter all readings at the appropriate times during a test Refer to Section 4 4 Scanner for details on configuring the scanner instrument 4 Define the instrument s to use as heat source s for the test The heat source s are the instruments into which the reference probe and all test probes are inserted The software can also be configured to use the heat source s as the reference if desired Heat sources are used to hold the temperature of the reference probe and test probes at a constant tempera ture so that comparison measurements can be taken When performing a calibration using only fixed points a special heat source driver needs t
121. are activating as indicated below Click No if they are not Figure 28 Check SmartSwitch Dialog 6 port SmartSwitch Selected This dialog displays a graphic representing the SmartSwitch box The graphic displayed depends on the currently selected SmartSwitch type To change the SmartSwitch type refer to Section 3 4 10 SmartSwitch Tab This dialog displays a graphic representing the SmartSwitch box While this di alog is displayed commands are sent to the SmartSwitch box to change the ac tive port A to H Make sure the LEDs on the SmartSwitch are activating as 62 4 Configuration Menu 63 4 3 4 3 1 indicated on the dialog If the LEDs on the SmartSwitch are not activating as indicated click No Otherwise click Yes Check SmartSwitch xj Check SmartSwitch The LEDs on the SmartSwitch should be activated as indicated below Click Yes if the LEDs on the SmartSwitch are activating as indicated below Click No if they are not Figure 29 Check SmartSwitch Dialog 8 Port SmartSwitch Selected When checking the communications make sure the SmartSwitch and any ap plicable instruments are connected using the appropriate cables Refer to Sec tion 1 8 Connection of Instruments for more information Reference Selecting the Reference option displays the Reference Readout Configuration dialog This dialog can also be displayed by clicking the Reference button on the Equipment Info dialog Reference Read
122. at cannot be connected to a scanner such as Liquid in Glass thermometers or probes that cannot be detached from a pro cess control system or if a scanner instrument that MET TEMP II does not support is to be used select the Do not use scanner prompt to manually enter all readings check box This feature disables the use of the scanner instrument to automate the collection of readings from the test probes The user will be prompted to manually enter all test probe readings at the appropriate times dur ing a test For certain scanner instruments supported by MET TEMP II such as the Models 1575 and 1590 Super Thermometers MET TEMP II allows the test probe s to be connected either to a main channel or to a multiplexer channel If one of these instruments is selected as the reference readout a prompt is dis played asking if the test probes are connected to main channels or multiplexer channels Select the appropriate response based on the configuration of your scanner instrument If the test probes are connected to multiplexer channels the Modules button is enabled and the multiplexer s must be configured Other wise the Test Probes button is enabled MET TEMP II also supports using single channel thermometer readouts such as the Models 1502 1503 and 1504 Tweener thermometer readouts and the Models 1521 and 1522 handheld thermometer readouts to be used as the scan ner instrument to calibrate a single test probe Note When usi
123. at is built into MET TEMP II and the custom Reports of Calibration that ship with MET TEMP II Custom report template files are installed in the REPORTS subfolder of the C MMETTEMP 2 folder or the folder where MET TEMP II was installed Default Report of Calibration The default Report of Calibration in MET TEMP II was designed to meet the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 specification refer to Figure 67 on page 137 The default Report of Calibration contains the report number the test probe in formation calibration range received condition excitation current used if ap plicable test procedure customer name and address calibration test paragraph and notes the actual data collected a list of the test equipment calibration date recall date ambient temperature and humidity customer order ID techni cian name and a place for technician and approval signatures The actual data collected consists of the nominal values set points actual values reference readings UUT values test probe readings error if applicable uncertainty CJC readings if applicable and method of realization The fonts sizes and styles used on the default Report of Calibration can be changed on the Fonts amp Sizes tab of the Defaults dialog The top bottom left and right margins and the column widths for the Test Equipment table on the Report of Calibration can be set using the appropriate controls on the Reports tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog
124. ating a heat source set points used to calibrate the heat source cannot be moved The Move Up and Move Down buttons are disabled when any of these set points are selected 8 View Set points Selecting the View Set points option displays the Set point Status dialog for monitoring the status of the set points during a test Set point Status Dialog The Set point Status dialog displays a list of the currently configured set points with the associated window tolerance duration heat source assignment and status Set point Status l xj l Set point Status Total Set points 22 Set point Window Tolerance Duration Heat Status C 0 C min Source 25 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 0 01 Waiting 25 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 50 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 75 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 100 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 125 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 150 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 175 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 200 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 225 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 250 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 275 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 300 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting 325 00 0 010 0 0100 Waiting Figure 43 Set point Status Dialog The Set point Status dialog displays the current status of each set point The set points appear in the order that they are used during a test The set point 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 94 5 3 5 3 1 number value window tolerance duration the heat source used and the cur rent status of the set point a
125. ating the function of the button If a help balloon does not appear make sure the Show help balloons check box on the General tab of the Defaults dialog is selected The following buttons are available on the toolbar la New Create a new configuration S Open Open a configuration file E Save As Save the current configuration to a file Y Defaults Setup default settings e Print Report Print a Report of Calibration H Close Test Close the current test Ge Install Drivers Install drivers required to use instruments Communications Port Setup the computer s COM port Reference Configure the Reference Readout Reference Module and Reference Probe cala Scanner Configure the Scanner and Scanner Module A Heat Sources Configure the Heat Sources e Equipment Info View the current configuration Set points Setup temperature set points for the test View Set points View the status of the set points 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 1 11 20 a Aes BEE la Test Probes Configure the Test Probes Start Test Start a calibration test Stop Test Stop the current calibration test Pause Test Pause the current calibration test Resume Test Resume the current calibration test Stability Override Override the stability settings for the current set point C Change the temperature scale to degrees C F Change the temperature scale to degrees F Graph Settings Setup the X axis and Y axi
126. ation about the fields to export to each section of the export file is saved in the EXPORT INI file which is located in the C METTEMP2 folder or the folder where MET TEMP II was installed A second file containing an alternate export definition was installed when MET TEMP II was installed This file is named EXPORT INX and is also installed in the folder where MET TEMP II was installed This file can be used as a starting point for creat ing your own export definition To use this file simply rename the current EX PORT INI file to something else and rename the EXPORT INX file to EXPORT INI The next time the Configure Export Fields dialog is displayed this file s definition is read in and displayed Important Never attempt to manually edit the EXPORT INI file This file needs to be accurate for the export feature to function properly Always use the Configure Export Fields dialog to make changes to the export data configuration Click the OK button to save the new export data configuration and close this di alog Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog without saving changes Export Coefficients This software has a feature that allows the calculated coefficients for a test probe to be exported to a text file 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 214 To export coefficients select the Export Coefficients option in the File menu The Export Coefficients dialog is displayed Export Coefficients i xi Export Coefficients
127. ave the new uncertainty settings then click the OK button to close this dialog Clicking the Cancel button discards any changes and closes this dialog Note The uncertainty parameter is not used by MET TEMP II to determine when measurements are taken In order for the Report of Calibration produced by MET TEMP II to meet the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 specification the uncer tainty at each set point must appear on the report To determine the uncertainty at a set point the uncertainty of each piece of equipment used to take measure ments at the set point i e reference readout reference probe scanner heat source etc must be known The overall uncertainty is generally the sum of these individual uncertainties Note When using MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source the value entered as the uncertainty for each set point appears on the custom Heat Source Report of Calibration as the Tolerance and is used to determine the pass fail status at each set point Refer to Section 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations and Section 11 2 2 Heat Source Report of Calibration for more details Test Probes Selecting the Test Probes option displays the Test Probe Configuration dialog for entering information about the test probes to be calibrated This dialog can also be displayed by clicking the Test Probes button on the Equipment Info dia log the Scanner Configuration dialog or the Scanner Modules Configuration dialog Test Probe Configuration Dialo
128. ax Temp Min Temp Max Temp Platinum 260 0 1480 0 436 0 2696 0 13 2 1753 2 Thermistor 10 0 200 0 14 0 392 0 263 2 473 2 THERMOCOUPLE c F K Type Range Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp Min Temp Max Temp B 1 0 0 631 0 32 0 1167 8 273 2 904 2 B 2 631 0 1820 0 1167 8 3308 0 904 2 2093 2 E 1 270 0 0 0 454 0 32 0 3 1 273 2 E 2 0 0 1000 0 32 0 1832 0 273 2 1273 2 J 1 210 0 760 0 346 0 1400 0 63 2 1033 2 J 2 760 0 1200 0 1400 0 2192 0 1033 2 1473 2 K 1 270 0 0 0 454 0 32 0 3 1 273 2 K 2 0 0 1372 0 32 0 2501 6 273 2 1645 2 N 1 270 0 0 0 454 0 32 0 3 1 273 2 N 2 0 0 1300 0 32 0 2372 0 273 2 1573 2 R 1 50 0 1064 0 58 0 1947 2 223 2 1337 2 R 2 1064 0 1664 0 1947 2 3027 2 1337 2 1937 2 R 3 1664 0 1768 0 3027 2 3214 4 1937 2 2041 2 R N 50 0 1768 0 58 0 3214 4 223 2 2041 2 S 1 50 0 1064 0 58 0 1947 2 223 2 1337 2 S 2 1064 0 1664 0 1947 2 3027 2 1337 2 1937 2 S 3 1664 0 1768 0 3027 2 3214 4 1937 2 2041 2 S N A 50 0 1768 0 58 0 3214 4 223 2 2041 2 T 1 270 0 0 0 454 0 32 0 3 1 273 2 T 2 0 0 400 0 32 0 752 0 273 2 673 2 AuPt 8th Order 0 0 1000 0 32 0 1832 0 273 2 1273 2 AuPt 9th Order 0 0 1000 0 32 0 1832 0 273 2 1273 2 This range can be selected by choosing the 50 0C to 1768 1C using extrapolation option 238 16 Print Preview Window 239 16 Print Preview Window The Print Preview window is used to view reports on screen without having to print a hard copy The Print Preview window is activated by s
129. ay select between C and K e If the reference readings are in degrees F the user may select between F and K e If the reference readings are in K coefficients will automatically be calcu lated using K Many readout instruments that accept Polynomial coefficients require that the coefficients be calculated using reference readings in a particular temperature scale This feature allows reference readings to be used as acquired by MET TEMP II with no conversion or to be converted automatically to K by the application Note This application does not provide the option of converting reference readings from degrees F to degrees C nor vice versa Also if reference readings were acquired in K the Select Calculation Scale dialog will not be displayed and Polynomial coefficients will automatically be calculated using K 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide A Note The accepted thermistor model is based upon the logarithmic resis tance temperature characteristic in terms of absolute temperature K The accuracy of a model based upon degrees F or degrees C has not been tested Therefore this software always calculates polynomial coefficients for thermistor probes using K If reference readings are entered in degrees F or degrees C the software converts the readings to their K equivalent values before the fit is computed Click the OK button on the Select Calculation Scale dialog after selecting the appropriate option to continue Click the
130. be used for the set point all heat sources that the set point could be assigned to are displayed If the selected heat source is a bath the Enable proportional band check box is displayed If 86 5 Calibration Menu 87 this check box is selected the Proportional band box is enabled If not selected the Proportional band box is disabled A set point is defined as the temperature that the reference probe should be reading before MET TEMP II begins taking measurements from the reference probe and the test probes Every comparison set point must be assigned to one of the configured heat sources When the test processes a set point the refer ence probe and all test probes must be placed in the selected heat source for that set point MET TEMP II prompts the user at the appropriate time to place all probes in the required heat source Fixed point set points are not assigned to a heat source Set points can be generated automatically by clicking the Auto Generate Set points button or inserted into the set point list manually by clicking the In sert Set Point or Insert Fixed Point buttons Set points can be removed from the set points list by clicking the Remove Set point or Remove All Set points but tons Each of these processes is explained in detail in the following sections Each set point has its own window tolerance duration uncertainty and pro portional band settings that can be set independent from the other set points Th
131. ber box is enabled and the user must enter a test number The test number must be unique MET TEMP II will make sure the entered test number is unique when the OK button is clicked The default state of the Generate test number automatically check box is deter mined by the setting on the Setup tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog Clicking on the Paragraph and Notes buttons allow text files that contain text to appear on the Report of Calibration to be selected When clicking either of these buttons the Text Editor dialog is displayed Refer to Section 3 4 5 1 Text Editor Dialog for more details on using this dialog Note The text for the paragraph and notes must be saved to a file in order to appear on the Report of Calibration A default paragraph file can be defined on the Reports tab of the Defaults dialog The notes must be speci fied for every test If the Get ambient conditions from DewK check box on the General tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog is checked MET TEMP II will attempt to query 5 Calibration Menu 109 5 6 5 7 the ambient temperature and humidity readings from a Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer using the settings defined on the General tab MET TEMP II queries readings from the connected DewK throughout the test process and writes the average ambient temperature and humidity readings to the database when the test is complete If this check box is not checked manu ally enter
132. ber is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the description calibration and recalibration dates may be syn chronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset can not be found in the MET TRACK database a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II Note Since the test probe is being used as if it was the reference make sure the calibration coefficients for the test probe have been entered into the ther mometer readout and the temperature readings are accurate before starting the heat source calibration test Click the OK button to close the Test Probe Configuration dialog Configure Heat Source The fifth step to configuring MET TEMP II to perform a heat source calibra tion is to configure the heat source to calibrate Click th
133. bers appear below From the list entitled Select probes select the probe model num ber and serial number If the model number option is selected a list of probe model numbers becomes available Once a model number is selected probe serial numbers and test num bers appear below From the list entitled Select probes select the probe test number and serial number Select the test probes in the Select probes list A probe may be deselected in the same manner If the Print all reports for this test number check box is selected a Report of Calibration is printed for each of the test probes listed If not selected reports are printed only for the highlighted test probes in the Select probes list 56 3 File Menu 57 If the Preview report check box is selected the report is displayed in the Print Preview window If the Preview report check box is not selected the report is sent directly to the printer If a test is invalid meaning all of the required data to create a Report of Cali bration does not exist in the database a message is displayed and the report cannot be printed Selecting the Maintain Test Results option in the Utilities menu provides information for validating tests Figure 67 on page 137 shows an example of the Default Report of Calibration produced by MET TEMP II The exact layout of this report depends on how the test was performed and the type of data collected If there is more informa tion than will fit o
134. ble when no reading is near OC because the software must extrapolate this reading The residuals are calculated for each set point used in calculating the co efficients Residuals are always in the same scale as the reference probe readings Polynomial Requirements The following requirements must be met when Polynomial is selected as the type of coefficients to calculate for platinum or thermistor probes For more in formation concerning the method used to calculate the Polynomial coefficients refer to Section 15 12 6 Methods Used for Calculating Coefficients 1 The reference probe readings must be in temperature C F or K Note The accepted thermistor model is based upon the logarithmic resis tance temperature characteristic in terms of absolute temperature K The accuracy of a model based upon degrees F or degrees C has net been tested Therefore polynomial coefficients for thermistor probes are always calculated using K If reference readings are entered in degrees F or de grees C the readings are converted to their K equivalent values before the fit is computed The UUT test probe readings must be in resistance Ohms or kOhms 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 3 The order of the polynomial must be selected Allowable choices are from 3rd order to 9th order for platinum probes and from 3rd order to 6th order for thermistor probes 4 For thermistor probes the Steinhart Hart method may be selected Stud ies ha
135. cable not included MET TEMP II will allow the heat source s to be used as the reference Scanner Optional The Scanner is the instrument to which all test probes UUTs are con nected The Scanner can be the same instrument as the Reference Readout if it has multiple inputs Use a null modem cable not in cluded MET TEMP II can be configured to not use a scanner if data needs to be entered manually Heat Source s Required Up to 4 Heat Sources can be configured All test probes and the refer ence probe must be placed in the same heat source at the same time Use a null modem cable not included MET TEMP II can use non in terfaced heat sources MET TEMP II also now supports using any number of Fixed Point cells as heat sources Ambient Condi Optional MET TEMP II supports querying ambient temperature and humidity tions Monitoring readings from a Model 1620 5020A Dewk Thermohygrometer throughout the testing period The example shown in Figure 4 is only for demonstration purposes Computer to SmartSwitch Locate a COM port on your computer Connect the female end of the 9 pin ex tender cable provided to the COM port Connect the male end of the extender cable to the port labeled MASTER PORT on the SmartSwitch If there is no COM port available on the computer but the computer has a USB port you may be able to use a USB to RS 232 adapter such as the IOGEAR 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide
136. ce this check box must be checked Click Yes when asked if a heat source is to be calibrated Select the reference readout model number using the drop down list If the ap propriate model number does not appear on the list click the Drivers button to install the driver for the reference readout instrument Refer to Section 4 1 In stall Drivers for more information on installing drivers The manufacturer and description information is filled in automatically when a model is selected For certain reference readouts such as the Models 1575 and 1590 Super Ther mometers MET TEMP II allows the reference probe to be connected either to a main channel or to a multiplexer channel If one of these instruments is se 64 4 Configuration Menu 65 lected as the reference readout a prompt is displayed asking if the channel to which the reference probe is connected is a main channel or a multiplexer chan nel Select the appropriate response based on the configuration of your refer ence instrument If the reference probe is connected to a multiplexer channel the Module button is enabled and the multiplexer must be configured Other wise the Ref Probe button is enabled Next select the serial number from the Serial number drop down list or enter the serial number in the Serial number box if it has not been entered previously MET TEMP II records serial numbers calibration dates and recalibration dates to avoid having the user reenter the
137. cool down temperature setting allows the user to specify a temperature to set the selected heat source to when MET TEMP II no longer requires that heat 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 82 4 6 4 6 1 source during the calibration process This feature can be used to prevent a heat source from running overnight at high temperatures or to save time by setting the heat source to the first set point that this heat source uses for the calibration following the current calibration To enable this feature select the Set heat source to cool down temperature after using check box and enter the cool down temperature into the box provided Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog Equipment Info Selecting the Equipment Info option displays the Equipment Info dialog Equipment Info Dialog The Equipment Info dialog shows a graphical representation of the current in strument configuration and provides access to the various configuration dialogs Equipment Info xi Equipment Info Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Readout a Model 1560 Heat Source 1 a Model 1560 S N 423543 Model 9105 S N 423543 Port A S N 12345 Port A Port C Module 1 Module Model 2560 Heat Source 2 Model 2560 S N 12345 Model 6045 2 zi ME NX Step 1 Step 5 Step 6 Figure 38 Equipment Info Dialog 4 Configuration
138. cord When the export process is complete a success message is displayed If any er rors occurred during the export process one or more error messages may be displayed To assist Technical Support in determining the cause of the error please write down the exact wording of any error message you receive Refer to the Troubleshooting section for more details on resolving export errors 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide The calibration record can be viewed or edited in MET TRACK using the Edit a Calibration Record dialog as show below or by using the search engine rim Edit a Calibration Record i xj el tl e Cal date Cal Time Pass Due Date Due Time 8 13 2002 2 58 17 puft y 8 13 2002 02 58 17 pm Work Order Temp Humidity Interval Interval Units Failed Tests Marginal Tests 2345432 FG 369 25 0 sof amo Calibration Procedure Used TEST_PROC a Comment RTPW 25 549296 ad 8 0074745 E 06 b4 3 7630372 E 04 a8 1 6577511 E 04 End Date Procedure End Time Cal Aborted 8 13 2002 fa 50 20 pm N Standards Used 1560 65432 Hart Scientific 1560 Black Stack Base Unit 2560 64356 Hart Scientific 2560 SPRT Module 5614 380215 Burns Engineering 5614 Probe Secondary Standard 7100 403120 Hart Scientific 7100 Bath Ultra Low T emp 9112 401343 Hart Scientific 9112 Furnace y LastUsed Any Used STD SEG STD Table Asset Number 5614 358254 Manufacturer Burns Engineering Model 5614 Figure 90 MET TRACK 7 Ed
139. culated using iteration The solutions are either exact solutions or over determined solutions depending on the number of test points used in rela tion to the number of test points required Exact solutions result when the exact number of test points required for simultaneous solution of sets of equations are used i e two coefficients from two test points Over determined solutions result when more test points are used than the unknowns require 1 e two coef ficients from three or more test points ITS 90 The ITS 90 is expressed in terms of resistance ratio W vs temperature K rather than resistance R vs temperature The resistance ratio is defined as the resistance at a temperature R t divided by the resistance at the Triple Point of Water R TPW or W R t R TPW Because ratios are used in the ITS 90 the RTPW is required in addition to the resistance values at the test temperatures thus three test points are required to solve for two coefficients The example below shows a set of four equations representing data at five temperatures RTPW and resistance at four test tem peratures along with the matrix method used to solve the over determined set AW a W 1 b W 1 7 a4 Woo a W 1 b W 1 AW a W 1 b W 1 AW a W 1 b W 1 7 PW W 1 b W L AW 1 b 1 B Matrix Pe Matrix W 1 B W 4 AW 3 W 1 b W 1 AW Wp 1 B W 1 C Solutio
140. current heat source configuration information 5 The Set points button can be used to configure the set points for the cali bration test Refer to Section 5 1 Set points for more details 6 The Test Probes button can be used to configure the test probes to cali brate Refer to Section 5 4 Test Probes for more details Double clicking on an instrument icon also displays the appropriate dialog for configuring the instruments If the ambient conditions logger icon appears next to the PC icon this indicates the ambient conditions are configured to be queried from a Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer throughout the testing period These settings are configured on the General tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog If this icon is not displayed the ambient conditions are entered manually on the Test Infor mation dialog before the test starts An existing instrument configuration file CFG can be opened from this dia log by clicking the Open button The current instrument configuration can be saved by clicking the Save As but ton All current selections pertaining to the communications port reference scanner and heat sources are saved to the instrument configuration file CFG The set points and the test probe configuration information are not saved in this configuration file but can be saved into their own configuration files by click 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 84 ing the Save As buttons from the Set po
141. d 63 Reference Readout Configuration Dialog 64 Reference Module Configuration Dialog 67 Reference Probe Configuration Dialog 69 Scanner Configuration Dialog o ooo oo 71 Scanner Module Configuration Dialog 74 Heat Source Configuration Dialog 77 External Heat Source Model dialog o 78 Temperature Range Configuration Dialog 81 Equipment Info Dial g lt s s e e eoe saeco o e oao t 82 Calibration Menu cos a e wisai oe s me eee es 85 vii viii Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Set point Configuration Dialog aoaaa Example of Duration Tolerance and Window Settings Auto Generate Set points Dialog 0 0 Set point Status Dialog e scs sce ee Adjust Uncertainties Dialog s s e s e sene sa raa Test Probe Configuration Dialog os s s cose sa iori auo eie ee Incomplete Setup Test Probe Information Dialog
142. d MET TEMP II operates as a stand alone system The following settings only apply when the link to the MET TRACK database is active If the Synchronize calibration and recalibration dates with MET TRACK check box is checked MET TEMP II will read in the calibration and recalibration dates where applicable for each instrument from the MET TRACK database and update the MET TEMP II database If the Synchronize instrument description with MET TRACK check box is checked MET TEMP II will also read in the description for each instrument from the MET TRACK database and update the MET TEMP II database If the Synchronize technician name with MET TRACK user name check box is checked every time a user logs into the MET TRACK database from MET TEMP II the current MET TEMP II technician name as found on the User tab is checked against the full name of the MET TRACK user If the names do not match the Technician name in MET TEMP II is updated auto matically If this check box is not checked a prompt is displayed to allow the user to choose whether or not to synchronize the names If the Automatically export calibration data do not prompt when closing test check box is checked calibration data is automatically exported to the MET TRACK database when the Close Test option in the File menu is selected If this check box is not checked a prompt will be displayed to confirm export ing calibration data to the MET TRACK database Note If the use
143. d for information on changing this field The assets test equipment that were used to perform the calibration are also attached to the calibration record 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 174 During the export process if no asset number was previously assigned to the UUT or test equipment the Locate MET TRACK Asset dialog is displayed This dialog allows the user to view the model serial number and manufacturer of the instrument If a matching record cannot be located in the MET TRACK database this gives the user the opportunity to add a record for the instrument in MET TRACK or to modify the information in either MET TRACK or MET TEMP II so that the asset number can be found and assigned to the in strument Locate MET TRACK Asset xi Locate MET TRACK Asset Model number Serial number Manufacturer Hart Scientific Description Probe Secondary Standard Cancel Figure 89 Locate MET TRACK Asset Dialog MT Asset number This dialog will typically appear for any of the following reasons e The calibration was performed with a previous version of MET TEMP II Calibrate it e The link to MET TRACK was not active when the calibration was per formed e The asset record for the UUT or test equipment cannot be located in the MET TRACK database The record has not been created yet The record existed at one time but has been deleted The model serial number and ma
144. der ID number with each test probe Enter Order ID f xj Enter the Order ID number for the following test probe y Model 5614 Serial 123456 Order ID 677 NOP 751 X Use same order ID number for all subsequent probes Figure 66 Enter Order ID Dialog This dialog displays the model and serial numbers of the test probe and allows the order ID number to be entered This number can be a purchase order work order sales order or any other such number This dialog is only displayed if the Prompt for order ID when opening Test Probe Configuration file option on the Setup tab on the Defaults dialog is se lected If this option is not selected no order ID number is associated with the test probes The order ID number for each test probe must be manually entered on the Customer Information dialog Refer to Section 5 4 1 1 Customer Infor mation Dialog for more information Selecting the Use same order ID number for all subsequent probes option causes the same order ID number to be associated with the remainder of the test probes This dialog will not be displayed again If not selected this dialog will be displayed once for every test probe to allow a different number to be entered After entering the order ID number click the OK button to accept it and close this dialog 11 Reports of Calibration 135 11 11 1 Reports of Calibration This section describes in detail the default Report of Calibration th
145. determines whether test numbers will be automatically generated by default when the Test Information dialog is displayed 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 42 3 4 4 The Default reference probe type is used on the Reference Probe Configuration dialog for selecting the default type of reference probe If the selected default reference probe type cannot be used with the configured reference readout the user must select the reference probe type on the Reference Probe Configuration dialog The Default calibration interval setting allows the user to specify the calibration interval that is automatically filled in on the Test Probe Configuration dialog when configuring a new test probe The selection of C or F determines the scale of the reference probe reading dis play and graph as well as the default scale for the set points heat source range and reference probe when the software runs The Scale menu allows the current temperature scale to be changed Graph Tab The Graph tab is for selecting the X Axis and Y Axis defaults User fest Fonts amp Sizes MET TRACK Gere Setrorts Seve Graph Axis gt lt Axis time eo minutes Y Axis O Use reference probe range O Fixed range m gt O Show band around current reading 0 310 C cl Auto scaling always keep min and max readings on the graph X Auto determine number of decimal places to show Use averaging when graphing reference p
146. dition to the new features listed above the following known bugs and other issues have been fixed Printing to network printers When attempting to print to a network printer an error would sometimes occur stating the printer was not available This issue has been resolved KB0013 General Protection Fault error When using Windows 2000 XP a GPF er ror in module DWVSTAMP VBX would occur when launching the application for the first time This issue has been resolved MET TRACK Asset Number When using the 1575 1575A or 1590 as both the Reference and Scanner the MET TRACK asset number would not automat ically be filled in KB0015 Also when using External heat sources the MET TRACK asset number would also not be filled in KB0007 These issues have been resolved SmartSwitch Port Conflict A SmartSwitch port conflict error message would appear when attempting to use a dual well dry well This issue has been resolved Type Mismatch Error When Starting Test An Error 13 Type Mismatch error would sometimes occur when attempting to start a test This issue has been resolved KB0011 CJC Incompatibilities There were some issues regarding CJC readings when using the 1560 Black Stack and 1529 Chub E4 These issues have been re solved KB0002 and KB0019 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 1 2 4 Using Period as Date Separator MET TEMP II would previously not allow the period to be used as the date separator This
147. dow and opened viewed and printed by selecting the Recall Saved Report op tion from the File menu or by running the Report Viewer Utility Refer to Section 17 Report Viewer Utility for more details The layout of this custom report is somewhat different from the default Report of Calibration This custom report is designed in multi page format A descrip tion of the layout of this custom report is indicated below First Page e The report number and pagination information appears in the upper right corner e The report title and company information appear in the top center of the report e The heat source model serial number description calibration range re ceived condition procedure and as left condition are printed on the left side of the report at the top e The customer information is printed on the right side of the report at the top e The paragraph appears immediately below the heat source and customer information e The notes appear below the paragraph and are entitled Remarks e The test equipment information appears below the remarks and includes the instrument configured as the scanner and the test probe reference e The calibration and calibration due dates ambient conditions and order ID are printed on the left side at the bottom of the first page e The technician name and signature lines are printed on the right side at the bottom of the first page Second Page e The report number and pagination
148. drivers in the Available drivers list Click the Add button Multiple drivers can be selected by holding down the lt CTRL gt key while selecting drivers to install 3 Ifa driver for an instrument is already installed a message is displayed asking for confirmation to replace the currently installed driver 4 1 2 Removing Drivers To uninstall remove drivers follow the instructions below 1 Select the type of drivers to uninstall 2 To uninstall all drivers click the lt Remove All button or To uninstall selected drivers select the drivers in the Installed drivers list Click the Remove button Multiple drivers can be selected by holding down the lt CTRL gt key while selecting drivers to uninstall Clicking the OK button closes the Install Drivers dialog Clicking the Cancel button will ignore any changes made and close the Install Drivers dialog 4 2 COM Port Selecting the COM Port option displays the Communications Port Configura tion dialog This dialog can also be displayed by clicking the COM Port button on the Equipment Info dialog 60 4 Configuration Menu 61 Communications Port Configuration Dialog The Communications Port Configuration dialog allows the COM port to be se lected Communications Port Configuration E x Communications Port Configuration Enable communications during configuration Which serial communications port on the computer is the SmartSwitch connected to COM
149. e Heat Sources button 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide on the Equipment Info dialog or select the Heat Sources option from the Con figuration menu The Heat Source Configuration dialog is displayed Heat Source Configuration xj Heat Source Configuration PX Enable communications during configuration IX Use heat sources as reference X Calibrate heat source Check Pott How many heat sources will be used for this test Ore Two Three O Four Model number Serial number SmartSwitch port sus alas Manufacturer Calibration interval Hart Scientific days Description Dry well Low Temperature MT Asset number 9105 423765 Test Calibration Compatibility Figure 85 Heat Source Configuration Dialog When calibrating a heat source MET TEMP II must be configured to use the heat source as the reference The Use heat sources as reference check box should already be selected If not select it now The Calibrate heat source check box is enabled If not already selected select it now Selecting this option automatically sets the number of heat sources to One since MET TEMP II can only calibrate a single heat source at a time Select the heat source model to calibrate using the Model number drop down list Fill in the serial number and calibration interval Click the Customer button to fill in information regarding the status and owner of this heat source Click the Range button to make sure the t
150. e Print button prints the Pass Fail Report of Calibration for the se lected probes If this is the first time this report is being printed using this cus tom report the Tolerance dialog is displayed Clicking the Exit button closes the Print Custom Report of Calibration dialog The Pass Fail Report of Calibration contains the report number the test probe information calibration range received condition excitation current used if applicable test procedure customer name and address calibration test para graph and notes the actual data collected a list of the test equipment calibra tion date recall date ambient temperature and humidity customer order ID technician name and a place for technician and approval signatures The actual data collected consists of the actual values reference readings UUT values test probe readings error tolerance uncertainty result pass fail and CJC readings if applicable The fonts sizes and styles used on the Pass Fail Report of Calibration can be changed on the Fonts amp Sizes tab of the Defaults dialog The top bottom left and right margins and the column widths for the Test Equipment table on the Pass Fail Report of Calibration can be set using the ap propriate controls on the Reports tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog A custom logo can also be added to the upper left corner of the Pass Fail Report of Calibration using the settings on this tab To use this custom report
151. e drivers 60 Remove report 225 Remove test 121 123 224 Removing Set points 92 Repair database 119 223 Report files 58 241 243 Report of Calibration 51 57 88 108 135 139 145 195 201 227 Report options 197 198 Report Sections tab 199 Report template 44 57 200 219 Report units 70 98 Report viewer utility 241 243 REPORTS folder 45 57 135 140 162 172 200 207 219 220 Reports tab 44 162 219 Requirements 6 8 11 15 191 192 229 230 233 234 Reset 38 40 51 117 201 Residuals 194 199 218 230 233 235 Resistance 184 203 229 230 233 Resistance ratio 236 Resolution 108 Resolutions 205 Resolutions tab 204 Resume test 110 S Samples 48 Save As 32 46 83 89 100 Scale 42 70 86 98 113 184 193 195 203 229 230 233 234 Scanner 17 26 60 71 83 164 Scanner modules 60 74 83 Select set points 192 Self heat 48 Serial adapter 16 Serial number 37 39 65 67 69 72 75 79 98 Service Releases 1 Set point options 90 130 131 Set point resistance 146 159 Set point Status 93 Set point value 86 Set points 27 83 85 94 111 167 192 194 195 229 230 233 234 Set points tab 35 152 Settings 32 216 Setup tab 41 SmartSwitch 6 8 15 17 26 62 102 162 SmartSwitch port 65 73 79 103 104 Software 8 Stability 88 Stability override 110 Start display 117 Start test 84 102 170 Starting date 208 Starting page numb
152. e ea Ge ey ee AE ete i 222 15 9 Utilities Menu 2 vice pr eR eB as Gag ws 223 15 9 1 Compact Databases covers Se eal Ree ee ae a Be 223 15 9 2 Repair Database pers 12 ia Je oer ae be e ie we A 223 15 9 3 Maintain Test Results ote a cd ae Gee Ge Se oS ES 223 15 9 3 Maintain Test Results Dialog vicio ica eee Recetas 224 15 9 3 2 West Probe Valid ations s 4 s ans alate a deeds BLE aCe ee de ae oh A 224 15 10 Help Menus stes 0824 be Steed ens ba ok od 226 1S 001 Contents i s oo We a ae oe dG ae ee Ree RR A de a we ae 226 15 102 Search for Help On id a eR ee eS a By 8 226 15 10 3 Getting Started s manr ys Be we eo ee ce ac ae Be 226 15104 Technical Support dso ias artes Wien eek ae eet i ewe 226 1510 5 About gt boar id Goce ee Aa dg Beh a e a A gS 227 15 11 Reports of Calibration and Tables 227 15 11 1 Default Report of Calibration 2 020 0 02022000 227 15 112 We fault Tables siir age ees ees rs ck Betas aed Ga Ba Resear Rete Se 228 15 12 Requirements and Methods o 229 15121 ITS 90 Requifemenis y is a A BA eS ee 229 15 12 2 IPTS 68 Requirements o pos a ata cs a e se 230 15 123 Callendar Van Dusen Requirements o o e 233 15 12 4 Polynomial Requirements o o e 233 15 12 5 Thermocouple Requirements o 234 15 12 6 Methods Used for Calculating Coefficients 236 154126 1 Generale s d sii ssa t
153. e ee Has bie we Woh we ete de he Oa Ge de aes 236 VS 1236 2 AA cg nd ah eats Be a Bend E Ea Hac Sy deh E Sse BML Siegen eed Syd seed 236 15 12 6 3 IPT S 68 02 6 5 3s ai ees bk aed BLK Re a Aa Ae es mes ey a 237 15 12 6 4 Callendat Van Dusen e sor aae t aaia es we Hiss R Re we eG 237 15 12 6 5 Polynomial and Thermocouple ss ss i ea aaa a ee 237 15 12 7 Table Temperature Range Chart o oo a 237 16 Print Preview Window 239 17 Report Viewer Utility 241 Mi Limitations 44 at a e a Shere dlp a Slee DE 242 17 2 Report Files s oc ea 62846 dG cute wom dese ee Y 242 17 3 Making a Report Viewer Utility Setup Diskette 243 18 Troubleshooting oir as na 245 18 1 Hart Authorized Service Centers 245 18 2 Communication Error s o sssr esa wea dra e a 247 18 3 Troubleshooting Common Problems 247 vi Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Shared Files Conflict Dialog o o 11 MET TRACK Database Login Dialog
154. e new calibration coeffi cients are written to the heat source The As Left calibration coefficients are always printed The As Left data is only printed if As Left data was taken If the As Left data does not all fit on the second page a third page may be created The As Left calibration coefficients vary depending on the heat source that was calibrated If MET TEMP II could not successfully write one or more of the calcu lated coefficient values to the heat source during the calibration the coef ficient s will be marked and a footnote appears at the bottom of the As Left calibration coefficients section stating that the indicated coefficients could not be successfully written to the heat source The As Left data consists of the set points actual reference readings er ror tolerance pass fail status and set point resistance columns The tolerance pass fail and set point resistance columns are optional and can be excluded from the As Left data by selecting the appropriate op tions on the Print Heat Source Report of Calibration dialog If the Stability Override menu option was used on any As Left set point during the test the set point will be marked and a footnote will appear at the bottom of the As Left data section stating that the stability parameters were overridden for the set points indicated 11 Reports of Calibration Custom Reports of Calibration Report of Calibration Report No CE200205119 004 Temp Tech C
155. e window and tolerance settings are not applicable to fixed point set points MET TEMP Il uses some of these parameters to determine when measurements can begin Refer to Figure 41 Example of Duration Tolerance and Window Settings Duration 5 min 50 00 _ Set point T Window 7 50 00C y 0 10C Ni EA o di PA f f 1 Heat source 2 Wait until 3 Reference monitored until 4 When Duration elapses compare reference set to set point reference readings stable to within Tolerance 0 02 C to set point 49 73 C 50 00 C 0 27 C of 50 00 C stabilize over period of Duration 5 min If difference is greater than Window If stability exceeds Tolerance 0 27 C gt 0 10 C recalculate and adjust heat repeat this step source set point 50 00 C 0 27 C 50 27 C and repeat process Figure 41 Example of Duration Tolerance and Window Settings The window parameter defines the desired accuracy to the set point value al lowable difference between the set point and the reference probe reading The reference probe must be within the value of the window parameter of the set point value before MET TEMP II will begin taking measurements The ac tual set point of the heat source may be adjusted automatically in order to bring the reference probe readings within this window For External heat sources MET TEMP II prompts the user to adjust the heat source set point manually if 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide
156. eat Source Calibrations 163 13 2 3 from the Configuration menu The Communications Port Configuration dialog is displayed Select the COM port that the SmartSwitch box is connected to Refer to Section 4 2 1 Communications Port Dialog for more information on configuring the COM port Click the OK button to close the Communications Port Configuration dialog Configure Reference Readout The second step to configuring MET TEMP II to perform a heat source calibra tion is to configure the reference readout Click the Reference button on the Equipment Info dialog or select the Reference option from the Configuration menu The Reference Readout Configuration dialog is displayed Reference Readout Configuration xi Reference Readout Configuration Drivers f Enable communications during configuration Check Port X Use heat sources as reference Enter the reference readout information Model number Serial number SmartSwitch port Manufacturer Description i Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number Cancel poorer worn 2 C Figure 83 Reference Readout Configuration Dialog When calibrating a heat source MET TEMP II must be configured to use the heat source as the reference Select the Use heat sources as reference check box All other controls on this dialog are disabled A prompt is displayed ask ing if a heat source is being calibrated Click Yes All other controls on this dia
157. efficients If this check box is not selected the new coefficients automatically overwrite the existing coefficients Only one set of coefficients are allowed to be stored in the data base for each report number 218 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 15 7 3 3 Reports Tab The Reports tab is for selecting default preferences pertaining to Reports of Calibration ered Bepon l Report Template Use default report template C Use custom report template Custom report template Po Figure 123 Reports Tab The options selected on this tab determine the default report template used when printing a Report of Calibration If the Use default report template option is selected the software uses the Report of Calibration template that is built into the application This option is selected by default The software also allows custom report templates to be used when printing re ports If the default report template isn t exactly the type of report required for your application contact Hart sales representatives for information on obtain ing custom report templates designed to your specifications If a custom report template has been purchased from Hart the Use custom report template option allows the user to specify the file that contains the custom report template The Custom report template box and Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button to select the custom report template to use A Note Cu
158. elected the Pass field will always be set to the selected setting Use the drop down list to choose the Pass field setting For temperature vs resistance or temperature vs voltage calibration data use the When exporting other calibration data set Pass field to option The Pass field will always be set to the selected setting Use the drop down list to choose the Pass field setting The Write the following comment to all Calibration Summary records C2329 box allows the user to enter any note comment or remark that should be writ ten to the C2329 field of the calibration summary record when calibration data is exported to MET TRACK This field is limited to 44 characters Leave this box blank if you do not wish to write anything to the C2329 field 3 File Menu 55 3 4 10 3 5 SmartSwitch Tab The SmartSwitch tab is used for selecting the type of SmartSwitch being used with MET TEMP II SmartS witch Type 8 port SmartSwitch Figure 23 SmartSwitch Tab Select the 8 port SmartSwitch option if the SmartSwitch being used has 8 25 pin ports and looks like the switch indicated in the diagram Select the 6 port SmartSwitch option if the SmartSwitch being used has six 9 pin ports and looks like the switch indicated in the diagram Note The selection of the SmartSwitch type determines how many SmartSwitch ports are listed in the SmartSwitch port drop down lists on the configuration dialogs It also determines the di
159. electing the En able print preview check box on the General tab of the Defaults dialog Other settings on the General tab can be changed to manipulate the default behavior of the Print Preview window The Print Preview window is displayed when printing reports if the Enable print preview check box is selected Bape eof Ca lib raci n Depas ia ELOTE EE OS A AS Iba lana U30 Mpio Ibepmoginph mar auton mm esida saima H mph he 301 oor Tm Joao mm Mabad si 1v Emran aie aay mam man toma 21 433 am mua vane Tas Cyn grees Cee JentMembe Te Dink Tink Caine wan vo IFE Neds ame a 19m Jmssimy Theis ZIO Fin ho 210003 E ne Comte i0 Crue Orde Nye rao ee do mi mn e ane AS Figure 134 Print Preview Window 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 240 The toolbar buttons in the Print Preview window allow the user to print the re port save the report to a file navigate through all of the pages of the report as applicable zoom in and out and close the window The current page and total number of pages are displayed on the right side of the toolbar The function of each toolbar button is explained below H Close Closes the Print Preview window Save As Saves the current Report of Calibration to a report file Print Prints all pages of the report in the Print Preview window First Page Navigates to first page of the report if more than one page lt Previous Page Navigates to previ
160. emperature range for this heat source is configured to cover the range of temperatures to use for the calibration The heat source can also be configured to cool down to a specific temperature after the calibration is complete Click the OK button to close the Temperature Range Configuration dialog 166 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 167 13 2 7 When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this heat source An in ventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this heat source before MET TEMP II can calibrate it MET TEMP II will automati cally attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT As set number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the De faults dialog the description may be synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset cannot be found in the MET TRACK data base a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP IL Note When MET TEMP Il attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK da tabase the model serial number and manufacturer information must be an EX ACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP
161. en readings at all As Found set points new calibra tion coefficients are calculated and stored in a database If the Write new coeffi cients to heat source after calibration check box on the General tab on the Defaults dialog is selected MET TEMP II attempts to write the new coefficient values to the heat source These coefficients are then verified to make sure the heat source accepted the new values If the value read from the heat source for a coefficient does not match the calculated value a message is displayed indi cating the calculated value and the value read from the heat source Typically this message indicates that the calculated value of the coefficient exceeded the acceptable range of values for that coefficient If one or more As Left set points were configured MET TEMP II then pro ceeds to take readings at each of the As Left set points in the same manner out lined above until readings have been taken at all set points Printing Heat Source Reports of Calibration When the calibration test is complete select the Close Test option in the File menu to close the test 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide The Report of Calibration can be printed by selecting the Print Report option in the File menu The Print Test Report dialog is displayed Print Test Report xi Select a Test Report Fonts amp Sizes Select a test probe based on Test number O Model number Test number CE 200205119 3 Print all reports
162. eport Remove this report Cancel Figure 129 Invalid Test Probe Dialog The Invalid Test Probe dialog displays information about the test probe that is being validated The Report number is invalid for the following reasons list at the top of the dialog shows the reasons why the test probe is considered to be invalid Based on the information provided the user must decide what to do with the test The options available to the user are to not remove or to remove the se lected test probes Selecting the Do not remove report option leaves the test probe as is Selecting the Remove this report option permanently removes the test probe coefficients data from the database Information about the test test equipment and test readings cannot be removed 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Select the appropriate options and click the OK button to continue Click the Cancel button to close this dialog without making any changes 15 10 Help Menu The Help menu provides access to the on line help file The Technical Support contact information and About MET TEMP II dialog are also available from the Help menu Contents Search for Help on Getting Started Technical Support About Figure 130 Help Menu 15 10 1 Contents Selecting the Contents option opens the on line help file and displays the con tents topic 15 10 2 Search for Help On Selecting the Search for Help on option opens the on line help
163. equired to use MET TEMP Il IBM Compatible 486 PC or better with 8MB RAM Pentium class pro cessor with 16MB RAM or more recommended VGA monitor or better CD ROM drive for installation RS 232 serial COM port Minimum of about 12MB of disk space for installation additional space is required as calibrations are performed The following equipment is required to use MET TEMP II 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide e SmartSwitch box included Supports both 8 port and 6 port models e 9 pin extender cable included to connect SmartSwitch MASTER PORT to computer s COM port e Up to 6 null modem cables to connect test equipment to SmartSwitch ports not included with software Refer to Section 1 8 Connection of Instruments for more information on con necting the test equipment 1 3 3 Computer Software Requirements MET TEMP II requires one of the following operating systems e Windows 95 98 ME e Windows NT with Service Pack 4 or later installed e Windows 2000 e Windows XP If you are planning to use MET TEMP II with MET TRACK you must be running Windows 98 or later MET TRACK version 7 will not run on Win dows 95 A Note To use MET TEMP II Windows login accounts must be granted full access to the folder to which the software is installed and all subfolders If the folders have read only access errors will occur when MET TEMP II attempts to access its database and or configuration files Contact your sy
164. er description and calibration and recalibration dates may be synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset cannot be found in the MET TRACK data base a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II Click the OK button to accept the settings for the new fixed point cell and close this dialog or click the Cancel button to abort creating a new fixed point cell 3 File Menu 41 Setup Tab The Setup tab is for selecting defaults specific to configuring a test a Ted Fete t Sees HET TRACK Genel Jaos Jea oiaoh fi Setup Defaults X Enable communications during configuration IX Show recalibration date notification messages X Prompt for order ID when opening Test Probe Configuration file X Use same order ID for all test probes 7 Auto generate test numbers by default Default reference probe type Defau
165. er 206 Starting set point 90 257 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Status 93 Steinhart Hart 187 234 Stop display 117 Stop test 109 System beep 33 T T R coefficients 187 Table 184 195 212 228 237 Table font 206 Table font size 206 Table options 197 202 Table template 206 220 Table type 203 Tables 124 Tables tab 220 Technical support 127 226 245 Technician 47 107 Temperature range 80 237 Temperature scale 203 Temperature vs EMF table 203 Temperature vs ratio table 203 Temperature vs resistance table 203 Template 44 57 200 206 219 220 Template Settings tab 200 206 Test 21 Test data 121 224 Test date 108 Test equipment 6 8 15 25 26 31 32 60 82 120 129 211 Test information 107 Test number 56 108 190 196 Test probes 27 48 56 71 73 76 77 83 95 106 120 123 164 184 190 196 214 229 233 234 Test procedure 108 258 Test process 48 105 157 171 Test scale 113 Test tab 48 161 TestEquipment table 212 TestProbeEquipment table 212 TestReadings table 213 TestStart table 212 Text editor 46 Thermistor probe 187 222 233 Thermocouple probe 188 222 Thermocouple requirements 234 Thermocouple types 188 234 Thermohygrometer 2 15 17 22 34 83 105 109 Tolerance 35 86 88 92 93 111 139 143 169 177 Toolbar 18 19 183 240 TPW 229 Triple point 38 39 Triple Point of Water 194 229 236 237 Troubleshooting 245 247 249
166. er Utility Setup Diskette e Report files which contain a table from Coefficients and Tables applica tion may contain one or more blank pages before the actual table data starts This is done to preserve the correct page numbering as selected when the table was generated To avoid blank pages start the page num bering for the table at page 1 Otherwise simply discard the blank pages after printing the table 17 2 Report Files MET TEMP II has a feature that allows a Report of Calibration to be saved to a report file which can then be stored on diskette CD ROM or e mailed to some one who may need to view or print the Report of Calibration The Recall Saved Report option in the File menu allows report files to be opened viewed and printed from within MET TEMP II 242 17 Report Viewer Utility 243 17 3 Report files are stored in a proprietary file format Report files cannot be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader word processors or other graphics ap plications For this reason a special report viewer utility is included with MET TEMP II For more information on installing and distributing this utility refer to Section 17 3 Making a Report Viewer Utility Setup Diskette Report files can only be saved from the Print Preview window To save a Report of Calibration to a report file follow the steps below 1 Select the Print Report option from the File menu On the Print Test Report dialog select the appropriate test a
167. erning the commu nications settings reference readout scanner and heat source instruments in cluding model numbers serial numbers and other information required by the software The default extension for an instrument configuration file is CFG These files are usually saved in the CONFIG subfolder Instrument configuration files can be opened by selecting the Open option in the File menu or by clicking the Open button on the Equipment Info dialog Important Opening an instrument configuration file completely replaces the current instrument configuration information When an instrument configuration file is opened MET TEMP II attempts to re trieve the driver and calibration information for each instrument If any con flicts or errors are detected while opening an instrument configuration file messages are displayed providing some information as to the problems found The user must follow the instructions given by the messages to correct the problems before a test can begin Instrument configuration files can be saved at any point during the configura tion process by selecting the Save As option in the File menu or by clicking the Save As button on the Equipment Info dialog The user is prompted to enter a filename for the configuration file All instrument configuration files should be saved in the CONFIG subfolder with a CFG extension The default instrument configuration file 9938LAST CFG is automatically saved every time a te
168. erviceDesk fluke nl Fluke Int l Corporation Service Center Instrimpex Room 2301 Sciteck Tower 22 Jianguomenwai Dajie Chao Yang District Beijing 100004 PRC CHINA Phone 86 10 6 512 3436 Telefax 86 10 6 512 3437 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide E mail xingye han fluke com cn Fluke South East Asia Pte Ltd Fluke ASEAN Regional Office Service Center 60 Alexandra Terrace 03 16 The Comtech Lobby D 118502 SINGAPORE Phone 65 6799 5588 Telefax 65 6799 5588 E mail antngOsinga fluke com When calling or sending a fax please send or have the following information ready e Name of the software MET TEMP II e Software version and build as found on the About MET TEMP II dialog e Detailed description of what you were doing when the problem arose e The exact wording and or number of any error message received e Any other information that may help to solve the problem Check our website on the Internet regularly for answers to Frequently Asked Questions software updates and Service Releases Before contacting Technical Support check the items listed below to see if the problem you are having can be resolved by information contained in these topics e Troubleshooting e Requirements e Installation e Running MET TEMP IT When calling or sending a fax please send or have the following information ready e Name of the software MET TEMP II e Software version and build as found on the About MET TEMP
169. es Menu 119 8 1 8 2 Utilities Menu The Utilities menu allows the user to compact and repair the MET TEMP II da tabases to maintain the tables used for storing the test equipment and test re sults to run the Coefficients and Tables application and to export test data to Fluke s MET TRACK software Compact Database Repair Database Maintain Equipment Maintain Test Results Edit Test Information Coefficients and Tables Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Figure 57 Utilities Menu Compact Database Selecting the Compact Database option allows any deleted records in the MET TEMP II databases to be purged from the database Using this option from time to time can typically reduce the size of the database and make ac cessing the database faster Selecting the Compact Database option displays the Windows Open dialog Select the database file to compact and click the OK button Clicking the Can cel button aborts compacting a database When MET TEMP II compacts a database a copy of the database is made and given a BAK extension If a BAK file with the same name already exists it is deleted and replaced by the new BAK file Repair Database Selecting the Repair Database option allows a corrupted MET TEMP II data base to be repaired A database can become corrupted if there is a power failure or if the software terminates abnormally or crashes Typically if a database is corrupt M
170. es to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II A Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II Click the Range button to change the useable temperature range and to set a cool down temperature for the selected heat source The Temperature Range Configuration dialog is displayed Refer to Section 4 5 2 Temperature Range Configuration for more details When using MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source the Test Calibration Compatibility button is enabled Clicking this button tests the selected heat source to make sure it can be calibrated by MET TEMP II Some older models of heat sources do not support the commands necessary for MET TEMP II to perform the calibration successfully The heat source must be connected and powered up to perform the compatibility test If the test is successful a success message will be displayed If a communication error message is displayed the connected heat source cannot be calibrated by MET TEMP II
171. esired then click the OK button to save the settings and close this dialog Click the Cancel button to discard any changes made and close this dialog 198 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 199 Report Sections Tab The Report Sections tab allows various settings regarding the sections of the Report of calibration to be configured Report Sections Report Sections X Print raw data section X Print residuals in set point section Figure 105 Report Sections Tab The Report Sections tab allows the user to specify whether or not the raw data section is printed on the Report of Calibration If the Print raw data check box is selected the raw data is printed on the Report of Calibration If the Print residuals in set point section check box is selected the raw data section of the report displays a column for the set point residuals This check box is only enabled if the Print raw data check box is selected 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 5 1 8 2 Template Settings Tab The Template Settings tab allows the user to specify a custom report template to use when printing the Report of Calibration Report Sections Template Settings Fonts amp Sizes Template Settings Use default report template O Use custom report template Custom report template Po Figure 106 Template Settings Tab If the Use default report template option is selected the built in Report of Cali bra
172. estStart TechName TestDate StartTime EndD ate ElapsedTime Paragraph TestNotes Ra Figure 116 Configure Export Fields Dialog The export file created can be divided up into three sections header test equip ment and test readings These three sections are represented on this dialog by the three list boxes entitled Header fields to export Equipment fields to export and Readings fields to export The first section of the export file is called the header section The header sec tion generally consists of general test information that applies to all test probes UUTs and all readings taken for that test When the export file is created a one line header section is written to the file for each of the selected tests to export The next section is called the equipment section The equipment section gener ally consists of one record for every piece of test equipment used to perform the calibration test When the export file is created a one line entry is written to the file for each piece of test equipment used to perform the calibration test The last section is called the readings section The readings section generally consists of the test probe UUT information and the actual readings taken When the export file is created a one line entry is written to the file for each reading for each test probe UUT If the data to be exported contains multiple 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide UUTs the firs
173. et point that the 9105 is used for 20 ec Select the maximum set point that the 9105 is used for 140 00 dy X Set heat source to cool down temperature after using Select the cool down temperature for Cancel the 9105 2 00 Sc Figure 37 Temperature Range Configuration Dialog The minimum and maximum temperatures for the selected heat source default to the minimum and maximum temperatures that the heat source is capable of reaching These values can be changed to extend or limit the range that this heat source is to be used for during the calibration process When configuring set points each set point must be assigned to a heat source The temperature range settings on this dialog can be used to restrict which set points can be as signed to the selected heat source Note Although MET TEMP II allows the temperature range for any heat source to be extended beyond its default temperature range be aware that many heat sources will not accept set points that are outside the default temperature range This feature should only be used to restrict the temperature range for a heat source When the External or Fixed Point heat source drivers are selected the tempera ture range defaults to 330 to 2650 degrees These values can be changed if desired To change the minimum or maximum temperature for the selected heat source enter the new value in the appropriate box or use the up down buttons to change the value The
174. etween 10 and 10 seven decimal places e For values between 100 and 100 six decimal places e For values between 1 000 and 1 000 five decimal places e For values between 10 000 and 10 000 four decimal places e For values between 100 000 and 100 000 three decimal places e All other values two decimal places If you want to specify the resolution for the data in each column on the table select the Use custom resolutions option The drop down lists are enabled Select the format for temperature readings with the Temperature drop down list Select the format for resistance ratio or voltage readings with the appropri ate drop down list Select the format for the first derivative inverse difference or error readings with the appropriate drop down list Other Settings Tab The Other Settings tab allows the starting page number and font to use to be se lected Template Settings Export Settings Type and Range Other Settings l Other Settings Starting page number Note The Starting page number setting is only used when printing a Table Bn ad without a Report of Calibration Select font to use Size points Font sample 100 00 139 85241 0 00398547 Figure 111 Other Settings Tab 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 206 15 5 1 9 4 A The Starting page number box allows the user to enter the page number of the first page of the table The starting page number must be between 1 and 100 Note
175. f these individual uncertainties Note When using MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source the value entered in the Uncertainty box for each set point appears on the custom Heat Source Report of Calibration as the Tolerance and is used to determine the pass fail status at each set point Refer to Section 13 Performing Heat Source Calibra tions and Section 11 2 2 Heat Source Report of Calibration for more details The proportional band parameter can be used only when the selected heat source for a set point is a Hart bath The controller for a bath can be fine tuned for optimal performance at a specific set point by adjusting the proportional band parameter By selecting the Enable proportional band check box MET TEMP II will set the proportional band parameter of the bath to the speci fied value when the test begins to process the set point If the Enable propor tional band check box is not checked the proportional band parameter of the bath will not be changed Every time this dialog is displayed each set point is checked to make sure it falls within the range of the heat source that was previously selected for the set point If any of the heat source configuration information has changed the user may be required to reselect the heat source to which each set point is assigned To open a set point configuration file click the Open button The Windows Open dialog is displayed A previously saved set point configuration file STC or S
176. feature supports using either a BMP of WMF type file to display a company logo or any other graphic to print on the Report of Calibration Click the Get Logo button to specify the file containing the graphic to use Note The default Report of Calibration the Pass Fail Report of Calibration and the Heat Source Report of Calibration have all been modified to print the specified logo or graphic in the upper left corner The Report of Calibration created by the Coefficients and Tables application has also been modified to print the specified logo or graphic in the upper left corner Other custom reports may not support this feature The Report of Calibration Margins and Column Widths section can be used to customize the margins and the column widths of the Test Equipment table on the Report of Calibration Enter the margins to use for the Top Bottom Left and Right sides of the report in the appropriate boxes Enter the width of each column of the Test Equipment table in the in the appro priate boxes The total width of the table is calculated and displayed in the lower right corner Select the units of measure to use using the Units drop down list Click the Reset All button to reset all margins and column widths to the default values Note The default Report of Calibration the Pass Fail Report of Calibra tion and the Heat Source Report of Calibration have all been modified to use the margins and column widths specified The Report
177. fer to Section 10 2 1 Set point Options Dialog for more in formation on using this dialog If a bath is selected as the heat source to use the proportional band check box and value are shown If the set point can only be achieved by one heat source the set point is automatically assigned to that heat source If none of the heat sources can achieve the set point a message is displayed and the current set point is not added to the list Auto generation continues with the next set point value Clicking the Cancel button aborts auto generating set points and closes this dialog Inserting Comparison Set points Comparison set points can be manually inserted into the set point list by click ing the Insert Set point button All set points generated using this process are considered comparison set points Note When calibrating a heat source a set point configuration file must be opened before set points can be manually inserted To insert a set point to the set point list manually first select the set point in the set point list that the new set point should come before To add a set point to the top of the set point list select the first set point in the list To add a set point to the end of the list select the lt new set point gt item in the list Click the Insert Set point button The cursor is placed in the set point box En ter the value of the new set point and press lt Enter gt The new set point is in serted into the set poin
178. fficients taking As Found data calculating new calibra tion coefficients writing new coefficients to the heat source and taking As Left data A new custom Report of Calibration has also been created to print heat source calibration reports For more details on using this feature refer to Sec tion 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations Support for New Instruments New drivers have been added to MET TEMP II for the following instruments Reference Readouts e Fluke 2620A Hydra Data Bucket e Fluke 2625A Hydra Data Bucket e Fluke 2635A Hydra Data Bucket Scanners e Fluke 2620A Hydra Data Bucket e Fluke 2625A Hydra Data Bucket e Fluke 2635A Hydra Data Bucket Heat Sources e Fluke 514 Low Temperature Dry well e Fluke 515 High Temperature Dry well e Fluke 517 Low Temperature Dry well e Fluke 518 Dual well Dry well e Hart 7340 Compact Bath e Hart 9011 Dual well Dry well e Hart 9100S Handheld Dry well 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 1 3 1 3 1 e Hart 9102S Handheld Dry well e Hart 9114 Metrology Furnace e Hart 9122A High Capacity Dry well Fixed Points e Hart 590x Fixed Point Cells e Hart 591x Fixed Point Cells e Hart 592x Fixed Point Cells e Hart 593x Fixed Point Cells e Hart 594x Fixed Point Cells Utility to Edit Test Information MET TEMP II now includes a utility that allows some information for tests that have already been performed to be edited including the technician name ambi ent conditions calibration ran
179. ficient Data Dialog 191 Figure 100 Select Set points Dialog o o 192 Figure 101 Select Calculation Scale Dialog 193 Figure 102 Coefficients and Residuals Dialog 194 Figure 103 Print Reports and Tables Dialog 196 Figure 104 Report Options Dialog o o 198 Figure 105 Report Sections Tab c e osa easte oo e 199 Figure 106 Template Settings Tab gt s lt eo soccer enesenn onara 200 Figure 107 Fonts amp Sizes Tab o os sose seo auos enee iene rh pu 201 Figure 108 Table Options Dialog o o 202 Figure 109 Type and Range Tab o o 203 Figure 110 Resolutions Tab 2 2 o o o e a e 204 Figure 111 Other Settings Tab oo en 205 Figure 112 Template Settings Tab o o 206 Figure 113 Export Settings Tab o o 207 Figure 114 Export Data Dialog o e 208 Figure 115 Export Probe Data Dialog o 210 Figure 116 Configure Export Fields Dialog 211 Figure 117 Example Export Data File o ricana 212 Figure 118 Export Coefficients Dialog 00 0 214 Figure 119 Example Coefficients Export Files 215 Figure 120 File Men 200 eee we bes SHO a ee 216 Figure 121 General Tabs
180. file The default path and filename can be changed on the Directories tab of the Defaults dialog A message is displayed stating the export operation was successful if no errors occurred To export test data for select test probes from a particular test select the test in the Select tests list Then click the Select Probes button The Export Probe Data dialog is displayed Note The Select Probes button is disabled if more than one test is se lected in the Select tests list The software allows the user to customize the data to be exported To custom ize the data to be exported click the Configure button The Configure Export Fields dialog is displayed Refer to Section 15 6 2 Customizing Export Data for more details on how to customize the data to export Click the OK button to close the Export Data dialog The Export Probe Data dialog allows the test data for select test probes to be 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 210 exported The Select probes from test number list displays the mode and se rial number for all test probes that were calibrated for the indicated test Export Probe Data xi Export Probe Data Select probes from test number CE2002061 26 Model EL ESE 15614 pare Figure 115 Export Probe Data Dialog Select the test probes to export by clicking on the appropriate row s in the Se lect probes from test number list To export the test data for the selected test probe s c
181. file with the Windows Search dialog open Select or enter a keyword to search for a topic or click Cancel to go to the help file 15 10 3 Getting Started Selecting the Getting Started option opens the on line help file to the Getting Started topic 15 10 4 Technical Support Selecting the Technical Support option displays the Technical Support help topic For technical support information please refer to Section 18 1 Technical Support 226 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 227 15 10 5 15 11 15 11 1 About Selecting the About option displays the About MET TEMP II dialog This dia log states the software version number copyright and other information xl E MET TEMP II Version 4 3 Build 115 Hart Scientific Coefficient and Table Generation Software Copyright 1996 2005 All rights reserved Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division Figure 131 About MET TEMP II Coefficients and Tables Application Dialog Reports of Calibration and Tables This section describes in detail the default Report of Calibration and table that are built into this application Default Report of Calibration The default Report of Calibration was designed to meet the ANSI NCSL Z540 1 specification The default Report of Calibration contains the report number the test probe in formation calibration range received condition excitation current used if ap plicable test procedure customer name and address calib
182. formatted automatically to the same number of decimal places as the values in the UUT column when the cursor leaves each cell When the calibration data is exported MET TEMP II compares the absolute value of the Error to the absolute value of the Tolerance If the value of the Er ror is greater than the value of the Tolerance at any set point the Pass field in the calibration summary record is set to N If the Error is less than or equal to the Tolerance for all set points the Pass field is set to Y Click the OK button to export the calibration data for this asset to the MET TRACK database To abort exporting this calibration data to MET TRACK click the Cancel button 178 14 MET TRACK Export Process 179 14 2 Changing Coefficients Export Field By default the characterization coefficients for a probe and the heat source cal ibration constants are exported to the 2341 field of the calibration summary re cord when exported to MET TRACK However this field can be changed by following the process outlined below 1 Using a text editor locate and open the MT32MTIL INI file This file is located in the C WINDOWS for Windows 9x ME XP or C WINNT for Windows 2000 NT folder 2 Locate the Mapping section There should be one entry in this section Mapping CoefficientsField 2341 3 Change the field referenced by the CoefficientsField entry to the field the coefficients should be written to Ma
183. g 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide The Test Probe Configuration dialog is used to configure the test probes UUTs to be calibrated Test Probe Configuration xi Test Probe Configuration Modules Channels 1 2560 12345 2 2562 12345 4 Clear All Channels a Y Clear Channel Model number Serial number Calibration interval e e days Probe type Report units Manufacturer Current Description MT Asset number Probe Secondary Standard Figure 45 Test Probe Configuration Dialog A Important When using MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source the scanner instrument acts as the reference instrument and the test probe acts as the reference probe The calibration and recalibration date boxes are only displayed when calibrating a heat source The calibration interval and Customer button are hidden when calibrating a heat source The Scanner or Modules list in the upper left corner of this dialog displays a list of the currently configured scanner or scanner modules The Channels list displays a list of the channels on the scanner or scanner module that is cur rently selected in the Scanner or Modules list Note If the Do not use scanner prompt to manually enter all readings option on the Scanner Configuration dialog is selected the Scanner list is empty and the Probes list allows up to 100 test probes to be configured All readings for these probes must be entered manually MET TEMP II displa
184. g the Hydra series dataloggers with 4 wire probes configure the probes on the first channel that the probe is connected to For example if a 4 wire probe is connected to channels 4 and 14 config ure the probe in MET TEMP II on channel 4 and DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CONFIGURE A PROBE ON CHANNEL 14 Leave that channel blank Next select the test probe model number using the Model number drop down list The probe type manufacturer and description information is filled in auto matically when a model number is selected If the model number does not ap pear in the list enter the model number in the Model number box MET TEMP II only displays probes of the type that can be used on the selected scanner or scanner module If a scanner is not being used the user can select from all pos sible probe types Select the probe type and enter the manufacturer and descrip tion for the test probe in the Manufacturer and Description boxes MET TEMP II records model numbers probe type manufacturer and description informa tion to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over The probe type must be selected from the Probe type list Available probe types depend on the type of scanner or scanner module selected Possible probe types are e SPRT e RTD 385 3 wire or 4 wire e RTD 392 3 wire or 4 wire e RTD 2 wire 3 wire or 4 wire e Other PRT RTD 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 98 e Thermistor 3 wire or 4 wire e Other Thermistor e Therm
185. ge setting the paragraph and test notes test pro cedure company name and address manufacturer and description information order ID received condition check standard setting MET TRACK asset num ber uncertainty method of realization setting and heat source calibration coef ficient labels For more details on using this feature refer to Section 8 5 Edit Test Information Other Changes Many other small changes have been made to MET TEMP II including storing test start time end date elpased time reference and UUT standard deviation in formation raw values and more For a complete list of these changes refer to the README TXT file Requirements MET TEMP II is designed to work with a variety of thermometer readouts scanners and heat sources In order to ensure that MET TEMP II functions properly verify that the following requirements are met Communications Requirements MET TEMP II requires the use of one RS 232 COM port to interface with the test equipment The SmartSwitch box that is included with MET TEMP II needs to be connected to the computer s COM port using the cable provided Additionally every piece of interfaced test equipment needs to be connected to the SmartSwitch using a null modem cable not included with software Refer to Section 1 8 Connection of Instruments for more details MET TEMP II performs all communications at a set baud rate of 2400 baud All test equipment must be configured to use th
186. guration is to be used to perform the next test Follow the outline described in Section 2 Configuring a Test to configure the next test Open Selecting the Open option displays the Windows Open dialog for selecting an instrument configuration file to open MET TEMP II allows the current instrument set point and test probe configu rations to be saved to configuration files This feature is useful when the same set of instruments set points and or test probes are used repeatedly to perform many calibrations 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 32 3 3 3 4 To allow for maximum flexibility the instrument set point and test probe con figurations are saved separately and independently from each other Each of these configuration files is explained in Section 10 Configuration Files Selecting the Open option opens instrument configuration files only Save As Selecting the Save As option displays the Windows Save As dialog for saving an instrument configuration file MET TEMP II allows the current instrument set point and test probe configu rations to be saved to configuration files This feature is useful when the same set of instruments set points and or test probes are used repeatedly to perform many calibrations To allow for maximum flexibility the instrument set point and test probe con figurations are saved separately and independent from each other Each of these configuration files is explained in
187. hannel to read in the appropriate scale before starting a calibration test Note In order to calculate characterization coefficients and generate ta bles the test probe report units must be in one of the non temperature scales Ohms or mV The excitation current setting is shown if the test probe is a resistance type probe and the scanner instrument or module supports setting the excitation cur rent Make sure the setting for the excitation current in the scanner instrument or module matches the setting in MET TEMP II for each channel before start ing a test The excitation current must be selected from the Current drop down 5 Calibration Menu 99 list Available excitation current settings depend on the type of scanner or mod ule selected Possible currents are e 2uA 10uA 30uA e 0 05 mA 0 1mA 0 2mA 0 5mA 1mA 1 4mA 3mA 5mA e Auto or N A Note The excitation current should be set manually in the scanner instru ment before starting the calibration test because not all scanner instru ments support setting the excitation current via serial communication commands The CJC reading setting is available if the test probe is a voltage type probe This is the Cold Junction Compensation setting This setting is used to tell MET TEMP II whether or not to take CJC readings at each temperature Select Enabled if CJC readings should be taken or select N A if CJC readings are not required or compensation is handled internally wi
188. hart Hart method 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide A Important The accepted thermistor model is based upon the logarithmic resistance temperature characteristic in terms of absolute temperature Kelvin The accuracy of a model based upon degrees F or degrees C has not been tested Therefore this application always calculates polynomial coefficients for thermistor probes using Kelvin If reference readings are in degrees F or degrees C the readings are automatically converted to Kel vin values before the fit is computed Click the OK button to continue and display the Calculate Coefficients dialog refer to Section 15 5 1 4 Calculate Coefficients Dialog Click the Cancel button to abort calculating coefficients and return to the Main Display 15 5 1 3 Calculating Thermocouple Coefficients To calculate coefficients for Thermocouple probes select the Thermocouple Probe option in the Coefficients menu The Thermocouple Probe Coefficients dialog is displayed Thermocouple Probe Coefficients i xj Calculation Options Type of coefficients to calculate EN Type K Thermocouple Temperature Range 0 0Cto1372 0C Le Cold Junction Compensation Setting Cancel El Readings are in C Figure 97 Thermocouple Probe Coefficients Dialog Type K Select the type of coefficients to calculate using the Type of coefficients to cal culate drop down list For Thermocouple probes the following options are avai
189. he desired set point temperature and the current reference reading does not exceed the window parameter for the current set point If it does the heat source set point is recalculated to compen sate for the error and the stabilization process repeats MET TEMP II then begins to take measurements from the first test probe and the reference The number of readings that are taken is defined on the Test tab of the Defaults dialog Then this process is repeated for the second test probe etc When readings have been taken from all test probes MET TEMP II ad vances to the next set point A prompt is displayed if the reference and test probes need to be moved to a different heat source at this time When MET TEMP II has repeated this process for all set points the test pro cess ends Select the Close Test option in the File menu to close the test If the calibration test was configured to not use a scanner instrument the Enter Data dialog is displayed at the appropriate times to allow the readings for the indicated test probe to be manually entered Refer to Section 5 5 1 Enter Data Dialog for more information on using this dialog If MET TEMP II was configured to use an External heat source or one or more fixed point set points MET TEMP II displays a prompt at the appropriate times to manually set the heat source temperature or to place the test probes one at a time into the fixed point cell Refer to Section 12 Performing Calibra tions Using
190. he test results for heat source calibrations This custom re port can be defined as the default custom report Note This custom report does not have to be defined as the default custom re port to use The custom report can be selected manually every time a report is printed To define the custom heat source Report of Calibration as the default custom report select the Defaults option from the File menu to display the Defaults di alog Select the Reports tab User Test Fonts amp Sizes MET TRACK Gered ECTS fee Joh ETS l Paragraph Select the default paragraph that appears on the Report of Calibration Browse Filename C METTEMP2 REPORTS MYPARA PGH Report Template O Use default report template Use custom report template Browse Custom report template C METTEMP2 REPORTSSHEATSAC EXE Figure 82 Reports Tab In the Report Template section select the Use custom report template option The Custom report template box and the Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button and select the file HEATSRC EXE file in the REPORTS folder Click the OK button to close the Defaults dialog 13 2 2 Configure Communications Port The first step to configuring MET TEMP II to perform a heat source calibration is to select the COM port that the SmartSwitch box is connected to Click the COM Port button on the Equipment Info dialog or select the COM Port option 162 13 Performing H
191. heat source will never stabilize and therefore never proceed to taking measurements To change the duration parameter for the current set point enter the new value in the Duration box The duration parameter is used with the tolerance parame ter to determine when the heat source has stabilized at the current set point Setting the duration parameter too short may cause MET TEMP II to prema turely determine that the heat source has stabilized at the set point and may proceed to check the window parameter and calculate a new set point for the heat source Setting the duration parameter too long may cause MET TEMP II to determine that the heat source will never stabilize and therefore never pro ceed to taking measurements Click the OK button to accept the new parameter settings close the dialog and return to performing the test Clicking the Cancel button aborts changing the parameter values and closes the dialog Scale Menu 113 6 1 6 2 Scale Menu The Scale menu provides options for changing the scale to use for the current calibration test w Set to C Set to F Figure 54 Scale Menu Set to C Selecting the Set to C option converts the current test scale to degrees Celsius Note Although this option can be selected after the instruments and set points have been configured the scale should be selected before con figuring a test To change the scale that is selected by default when MET TEMP II runs see the
192. hen launching the application for the first time This issue has been resolved Error attempting to write coefficients to database The following error would sometimes occur when attempting to save coefficients to the database Error 3163 Couldn t insert or paste data too long for field This issue has been resolved KB0023 ITS 90 Range 5 Tables An issue regarding table generation using ITS 90 Range 5 coefficients was resolved 15 2 2 Version 4 0 A list of new features and enhancements in version 4 0 of the Coefficients and Tables application follows Matching Temperature Scales This software now displays set point requirements in the same temperature scale as the set points being selected Prior to this version set point require ments were always displayed in degrees C Customizable Export Fields This software now includes a feature that allows the test data to export to be customized In addition the export file can now be divided into three sections header section test equipment section and readings section The data to export to each of these sections can be easily customized Other Changes Many other small changes have been made to this software including addition of a0 and al coefficients on Type K Thermocouple Reports of Calibration and more For a complete list of these changes refer to the README TXT file 182 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 183 15 3 15 4 Main Display The MET
193. hs of the Test Equipment table to be adjusted Print Custom Logo on Report of Calibration A custom logo can now be added to the Report of Calibration The logo ap pears in the upper left corner of the Report of Calibration To set the logo to use select the Defaults option in the File menu in MET TEMP II and click on the Reports tab Drivers for New Instruments Added Drivers have been added to the database for the following new instruments e 9132 and 9133 IR Calibrators e 6331 7321 7341 and 7381 Deep Well Compact Baths Heat Source Calibration Configuration Files Default heat source calibration configuration files STC files for the 9132 and 9133 IR Calibrators have been created Get Model for External Heat Sources 1 Introduction When configuring an External heat source a prompt is displayed to enter the model number of the heat source This allows the correct model number to ap pear on the Report of Calibration It also allows the asset records in MET TRACK to be located properly if enabled New Excitation Currents Added The following excitation current settings have been added to the Test Probe Configuration dialog when using 1575 1575A or 1590 SuperThermometers as the scanner e 30uA e 0 05mA e 0 1mA e 0 2mA e 0 5mA Auto Generate Test Number Option An option has been added to the Setup tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dia log to automatically generate test numbers by default Bug Fixes In ad
194. ibis ontsu 71 4 4 2 Scanner Module Configuration Dialog o o o o oo 74 Heat SOUICES S65 5 rr AR Rae a eS 76 4 5 1 Heat Source Configuration Dialog s se ss ea aetas o ooo 77 4 5 2 Temperature Range Configuration Dialog 80 Equipment Info es s ka Gb eR ERA Re we 82 4 6 1 Equipment Info Dialog s 0 ke ee ee 82 5 Calibration Menu lt lt lt 85 5 1 DEEPOIM S ciu ir ra i a G 85 5 1 1 Set point Configuration Dialog oo oo 86 5 1 1 1 Auto Generating Comparison Set points 2 oo eo 89 5 1 1 2 Inserting Comparison Set points 2 2 ee 91 5 1 1 3 Inserting Fixed Point Set points ss ss 2 ee 91 SALA Removing SEEPOM S wc e gr dete hohe She Wh whee ees Gea Ss a 92 ILLES Editing Set poimtss set te a Fo es as Be i a RG ok ais 92 LLO Moving Set poittts 4 2545 eg dee Sas we ee Ses ws ee de aS ea te 93 5 2 View Set points rms a e Re eG 93 5 2 Setpoint Status Dialog s e io Gas es aa ar a a a ee er 93 5 3 Adjust Uncertamties 5 05 ee a ee a 94 5 3 1 Adjust Uncertainties Dialog o oo e e 94 5 4 Test ProbeS s ss ed ma a Ak ER Se EO 95 5 4 1 Test Probe Configuration Dialog o o ooo o 95 5 4 1 1 Customer Information Dialog o o e ee 101 3 3 Start Vests saae fe a ech ele oa e ke a A 102 5 5 1 Enter Data Dil oi o wa ea ee He eo we a 106 5 5 2 TestInformation
195. ibration and recalibration dates must be set Select the fixed point cell to edit and click the Edit button The Edit Fixed Point dialog is displayed Refer to Section 3 4 2 1 1 Edit Fixed Point for more information MET TEMP II can support any fixed point cell not only those manufactured by Hart If you want to add a new fixed point cell to MET TEMP II click the New button The New Fixed Point dialog is displayed Refer to Section 3 4 2 1 2 New Fixed Point for more information To remove support for a fixed point cell select the fixed point cell to remove and click the Delete button A prompt is displayed to confirm removing the fixed point cell Click Yes to remove the fixed point or click No to abort Click the OK button to close this dialog Edit Fixed Point Dialog The Edit Fixed Point dialog is displayed when the Edit button is clicked on the Fixed Points dialog This dialog allows the settings for a fixed point cell to be changed Edit Fixed Point xi Edit Fixed Point Enter the fixed point information Serial number 2345 Reference value Method of realization iE Triple Point 901 m o a o 3 i 3 gt oO bu EN Manufacturer Hart Scientific 0 m w SE 2 2 Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number paras y Cancel NOTE Fixed Point reference values are ALWAYS in Cl Help Figure 13 Edit Fixed Point Dialog The fixed point model number
196. iew window zoom setting determines the default size of the re port within the Print Preview window The zoom setting is limited to 40 to 190 The zoom setting can also be changed from the Print Preview window once it is displayed The Select printer before printing reports check box forces the software to dis play the Select Printer dialog when printing The user can then select the printer to which reports are printed If this check box is not selected reports are printed on the default printer To change the default printer use the Setup Printer option in the File menu The Get ambient conditions from DewK check box indicates whether MET TEMP II should take the ambient temperature and humidity readings from a Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer If this check box is not checked the ambient conditions must be entered manually on the Test Informa tion dialog before starting each test If this check box is checked MET TEMP II queries readings from the connected DewK throughout the test process and writes the average ambient temperature and humidity readings to the database when the test is complete The Channel drop down list indicates the channel or input of the DewK that readings should be taken from Select the appropriate channel The SmartSwitch port drop down list indicates the SmartSwitch port to which the DewK is connected In order for MET TEMP II to query readings from the DewK it must be
197. ignating the UUT as belonging to the company performing the calibration The customer name and address are automatically filled in if this option is selected 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide The Check standard check box is used to indicate that this UUT is a statistical check standard By selecting this option this UUT is simply flagged as a check standard The Coefficients and Tables application has some features that can be used to export test data for check standard test probes only The Customer order ID provides a place for entering a purchase order sales or der work order or other such number The Customer name is the name of the company for which the calibration is be ing performed or the company that owns this UUT The Customer address is the address of the company for which the calibration is being performed or the company that owns this UUT If the In house calibration check box is selected the Customer name and Cus tomer address boxes are filled in automatically This information comes from the User tab of the Defaults dialog Select the Save this customer to the database check box to save this customer name and address Saved customer names and addresses can be selected using the Customer name drop down list When all settings have been entered click the OK button A check is performed to ensure all required information has been entered If any information is miss ing the Incomplete Setup Test Probe Informatio
198. ilities menu allows the user to compact and repair the database and to maintain the tables used for storing the raw data and coefficients Compact Database Repair Database Maintain Test Results Figure 127 Utilities Menu Compact Database Selecting the Compact Database option allows any deleted records in the data base to be purged from the database Using this option from time to time can typically reduce the size of the database and make accessing the database faster Selecting the Compact Database option displays the Windows Open dialog Select the database file to compact and click the OK button Clicking the Can cel button aborts compacting a database When a database is compacted a copy of the database is made and given a BAK extension If a BAK file with the same name already exists it is deleted and replaced by the new BAK file Repair Database Selecting the Repair Database option allows a corrupted database to be re paired A database can become corrupted if there is a power failure or if the software terminates abnormally or crashes Typically if a database is corrupt a warning message is displayed Use this option to repair the corrupt database After the database is repaired the database is then compacted following the same process outlined in the previous section Maintain Test Results Selecting the Maintain Test Results option displays the Maintain Test Results dialog This dialog can be
199. information appears in the upper right corner 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 148 The heat source model and serial number appear in the upper left corner The As Found section is printed at the top of the second page The As Found section consists of the As Found calibration coefficients and the As Found data The As Found data is used to calculate the new calibration coefficients The As Found section is optional and can be excluded from the report by selecting the appropriate option on the Print Heat Source Report of Calibration dialog The As Found calibration coefficients vary depending on the heat source that was calibrated The As Found data consists of the set points actual reference readings error tolerance pass fail status and set point resistance columns The tolerance pass fail and set point resistance columns are optional and can be excluded from the As Found data by selecting the appropriate op tions on the Print Heat Source Report of Calibration dialog If the Stability Override menu option was used on any As Found set point during the test the set point will be marked and a footnote appears at the bottom of the As Found data section stating that the stability parameters were overridden for the set points indicated The As Left section is printed immediately below the As Found section The As Left section consists of the As Left calibration coefficients and the As Left data The As Left data is taken after th
200. ing sections describe in detail the requirements for calculating char acterization coefficients and the methods used to perform the calculations ITS 90 Requirements The following requirements must be met when ITS 90 is selected as the type of coefficients to calculate for platinum probes For more information concerning the method used to calculate the ITS 90 coefficients refer to Section 15 12 6 Methods Used for Calculating Coefficients 1 The reference probe readings must be in temperature C F or K 2 The UUT test probe readings must be in resistance Ohms or kOhms 3 Atleast 2 set points must be used but no more than 21 set points can be used The actual minimum and maximum number of set points that can be used depends on the selected low range and high range 4 There must be one set point within a few degrees of the Triple Point of Water TPW 0 01C preferably as close to it as possible 5 Low range criteria a The following low ranges can be selected i None 11 Range 4 83 8058 K to 273 16 K 111 Range 5 234 3156 K to 302 9146 K b Both ranges 4 and 5 require the Triple Point of Water TPW set point and at least 2 and no more than 10 additional set points c All set points should fall within the temperature range of the selected low range 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 6 High range criteria a The following high ranges can be selected i None ii Range 6 273 15 K to 1234 93 K 111 Range 7 2
201. ing the installation process a file may be replaced with an older ver sion that is not 100 compatible with the first This may cause the software to perform unexpectedly or fail to run at all Replacing a DLL or VBX file with a newer version does not usually cause any problems because these files are typi cally backward compatible There are however exceptions to this rule If the Shared Files Conflict dialog is displayed when you run MET TEMP II a list of the files is shown in the Conflicting Files list Select each of the files one at a time and read the information that appears in the bottom half of the dialog Depending on the information given you must decide what to do The software may continue to run without problems however there is no guarantee of this The DLL and VBX files are typically located in the WINDOWS S YSTEM or WINNTISYSTEM folder If you find it necessary to avoid conflicts these files can be copied to the folder where MET TEMP II was installed Be sure to 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide compare the files on your computer with the list of required DLL and VBX files If the link to the MET TRACK database is enabled and MET TEMP II deter mines that a compatible version of MET TRACK is installed on the computer the user is prompted to login to the MET TRACK database For more details on configuring MET TEMP II to link to the MET TRACK database refer to Sec tion 3 4 9 MET TRACK Tab 1 6 Using MET
202. ings Tabs 5 505 aso a ele ew We ih Ho and Sle See E 205 15 5 1 9 4 Template Settings Tabs a iia a he HR a Fh eee A 206 15 31 93 Export Settings Tad scores a a Rede MLTR VE o 207 15 6 Exporting Data and Coefficients 208 15 6 1 Export Data s poeni amd ees oe we AE Poe ws Bey kw 208 15 6 2 Customizing Export Data ee ee 211 15 6 3 Export Coefficients lt sos o gyal a Boake BO ee a a oe E ae a G 213 15 27 Pale MCN i e soa sete ty wad Wd Sow eS Bh eee ae Sa 216 15 7 1 Export Data s 9 0 48 stich ae ehn a wi wm Wek gO wom a ee we 216 15 72 Export Coefficients veros ia a EE ee 216 15 7 3 Defaultsis ia yale a ee dob A a Ee wR SEs ee BO 216 TS Ta General Tabs ein cda aio a Hed a Ba Papa cae E a ae A 217 15 73 52 Coethcients Tab os ek oa ete Dea eee Gas SE OR RES eee ek PS 218 ISTI Reports Tab sonas pa tine A hee dad BO eee on Salo GRR dak Re a 219 15 17 34 Tables Toba is ane a e ada eae ag oid ale le a Hale ee ae 220 15 7 3 5 Directories Tab sieaa ca eS ae Boe RE ag SS Se a 221 15 7 4 Setup Printet s eses sh FP o wow ow wh Ai Powe we wide aS 221 ISTI Print Reports and Tables 2 2 ha Deki ee a ee 221 15 7 6 Exitos ias as ma Gee o AG aa a ee GO BOR Hw 221 15 8 Coefficients Menu erosoan s ga a wee ewe BO ae E A a 222 15 8 1 Platinum Probe 664 53 4645 FS ORE SAR RR ERE HR ORES 222 15 8 2 Thermistor PrOBE s ajc ves as A A A ae ae a 222 15 8 3 Thermocouple Probe sassis a
203. int Configuration dialog and Test Probe Configuration dialog respectively Clicking the Start Test button closes this dialog and causes MET TEMP II to validate the current configuration information If the current configuration is complete the calibration process will start immediately Otherwise a message is displayed indicating that some configuration information is missing and the calibration process cannot be started yet Clicking the Close button closes this dialog Note Closing this dialog does not discard the current configuration 5 Calibration Menu 85 5 1 Calibration Menu The Calibration menu provides options for setting up the calibration set points viewing the status of the set points adjusting the uncertainties setting up the test probes starting and stopping the calibration test pausing and resuming the calibration test and overriding the stability settings for the current set point Set points View Set points Adjust Uncertainties Test Probes Start Test Pause Test Stabil Ey Override Figure 39 Calibration Menu Set points Selecting the Set points option displays the Set point Configuration dialog This dialog can also be displayed by clicking the Set points button on the Equipment Info dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 5 1 1 Set point Configuration Dialog The Set point Configuration dialog is used to configure the set points to use for the calibration
204. ion 195 15 5 1 7 of Water set point does not appear in the Set points and Residuals list because the residual at the Triple Point of Water is always 0 0 The residuals are always displayed in the same scale as the reference readings for resistance based probes or UUT readings for voltage based probes For thermistor probes residuals are always displayed in millidegrees To save the coefficients and residuals to the database click the Save button This information must be saved in order to print a Report of Calibration and or table If coefficients have been previously calculated using this test data for this test probe a prompt is displayed to confirm overwriting the existing coefficients Note To disable this prompt from appearing uncheck the Prompt before overwriting existing coefficients in database check box on the Coefficients tab of the Defaults dialog Refer to Section 15 7 3 Defaults for more in formation Click the Cancel button to close this dialog without saving the coefficients and residuals to the database If multiple test probes were selected on the Calculate Coefficients dialog the Select Set points dialog for the next test probe is displayed Otherwise you are returned to the Calculate Coefficients dialog Print Reports of Calibration and Tables After coefficients have been calculated and saved to the database a Report of Calibration and or tables can be printed To print a Report of Calibration
205. ion for the current channel Incomplete Setup Test Probe Information xi Test Probe This test probe has not been configured completely See the list below for details of Missing or incorrect information Received condition Order ID Customer name Customer address click Customer button Figure 46 Incomplete Setup Test Probe Information Dialog To open a test probe configuration file click the Open button The Windows Open dialog is displayed A previously saved test probe configuration file TPC can be opened When opening a test probe configuration file the cur rent test probe configuration settings will be overwritten Refer to Section 10 3 Test Probe Configuration File for additional information on opening a test probe configuration file To save the current test probe configuration to a test probe configuration file click the Save As button The Windows Save As dialog is displayed The cur rent test probe configuration is saved to the configuration file The extension of the test probe configuration file is TPC Refer to Section 10 3 Test Probe Con figuration File for additional information on saving a test probe configuration When all test probes have been configured click the OK button A check is performed to ensure all required information has been entered If any informa tion is missing the Incomplete Setup Test Probe Information dialog is dis played and the Test Probe
206. is baud rate The SmartSwitch included with MET TEMP II has been configured at the factory to use these settings and should not be changed 1 Introduction 1 3 2 MET TEMP II always sends commands to the test equipment when applicable to configure the test equipment as needed for performing calibrations How ever you should ensure that the following settings features and functions of your test equipment are properly configured prior to starting a calibration Reference Readouts and Scanners Averaging should be disabled Filtering should be configured as desired System units and temperature scale should be configured properly Probe conversion setting and calibration coefficients should be entered and verified Readout calibration constants should be verified Hydra Series Dataloggers All channels with probes connected must be configured manually The Hydra must be configured to operate in Scan mode scanning all channels with probes connected Heat Sources Scan function should be OFF Hold Mode should be OFF Program Control should be OFF Cutout setting should be verified Approach proportional band and calibration constants should be verified Heater refrigeration and other switches must be set properly to allow the software to control them Refer to the User s Guide of your test equipment for more information on these settings Computer Hardware Requirements The following minimum computer configuration is r
207. iskette included with MET TEMP II to add a license to MET TRACK Refer to MET TRACK documentation on adding licenses Insufficient access level Login using user ID and password with access level of 1 or higher Calibration Data Engine not running Make sure the Calibration Data Engine is running locally stand alone installations only or on the server client installations only Insufficient access rights on net work or drive not mapped Refer to MET TRACK documentation on installing and configuring stand alone and client server topographies MET TRACK asset number boxes do not appear on configu ration dialogs Menu option to ex port calibration data to MET TRACK is not enabled MET TRACK link is inactive MET TRACK link is not enabled Check status and settings on MET TRACK tab of Defaults dialog Login to MET TRACK database failed see above Unable to locate MET TRACK as set number for an instrument Model serial number and manu facturer not EXACT match Compare the model serial number and manufacturer information with values in MET TRACK database All three must match exactly Make changes in MET TRACK or MET TEMP ll as applicable No asset record exists in MET TRACK database Use MET TRACK to add an asset inventory record MET TRACK asset number is lo cated but instrument is not cur rently in calibration No current calibration record ex ists in MET TRACK database Use
208. issue has been resolved KB0001 Exporting No Reading Data to MET TRACK There was an issue regard ing exporting data to MET TRACK when a reading could not be taken during a test This issue has been resolved Aborting a Test An Error 9 Index out of bounds error would occur if a test was aborted prior to initialization of the test was complete This issue has been resolved Equipment Information Incomplete The Equipment Info dialog sometimes incorrectly reported whether the test configuration was complete This issue has been resolved CAL9141 STC File The Uncertainty parameter for the sixth set point in the CAL9141 STC file was not being read in properly This issue has been resolved Unable to Compact or Repair Database An Error 53 File not found error would occur when attempting to compact or repair the database This issue has been resolved Version 4 0 A list of new features and enhancements in version 4 0 of MET TEMP II follows Name Change MET TEMP II was previously known as Calibrate it and Generate it All of the features and capabilities of both Calibrate it and Generate it can now be found in one software package Interface with Fluke s MET TRACK Software MET TEMP II has the ability to interface with Fluke s MET TRACK software version 7 or later The added features include associating test equipment and test probes with MET TRACK assets and exporting calibration data to the MET TRACK database For mo
209. it 65432 NCR Hart Scientific Inc 2560 SPRT Module 64356 8 1 2003 Burns Engineering 5614 Secondary Standard RTD Probe 380215 8 1 2003 Hart Scientific Inc 7100 Bath Ultra Low Temp A03120 8 1 2003 Hart Scientific Inc 9112 Furnace Calibration A01343 8 1 2003 Notes This is the text that is referred to as the Notes text The notes may contain any text that needs to be displayed in this section of the Report of Calibration The notes text must be saved in an ASCII text file with a TXT extension The file to be used as the notes text is specified on the Test Information dialog Calibration Date Recall Date Temperature Humidity Customer Order This report shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval of Our Company 8 1 2002 Technician 8 1 2003 25C 30 Approved By 2345432 FG 369 Cal E Breight Figure 132 Example Default Report of Calibration ITS 90 Coefficients 231 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 8 20 2002 Temperature vs Resistance Table Report No EXAMPLE01 001 Page 2 of 2 c Resistance dr dT c Resistance dr dT c Resistance dr dT 0 00 25 548277 0 1018719 61 00 31 705813 0 0999887 122 00 37 749227 0 0981288 1 00 25 650149 0 1018408 62 00 31 805802 0 0999580 123 00 37 847356 0 0980985 2 00 25 751990 0 1018096 63 00 31 905760 0 0999274 124 00 37 945455 0 0980681 3 00 25 853799 0 1017785 64 00 32 005687 0 0998967 125 00 38 043523 0 0980378 4 00 25 955578 0 1017474 65 00 32 105584
210. it a Calibration Record Dialog MET TEMP II also utilizes the FullResults table new in MET TRACK version 7 to export the test readings MET TEMP II Data FullResults Fields Number of measurements num_meas Temperature set point and scale expv expv_p and expv_u Reference reading and scale sys_actual sys_actual_p and sys_actual_u UUT reading and scale uut_ind uut_ind_p and uut_ind_u Error and scale as applicable error error_p and error_u Uncertainty and scale exp_uncert exp_uncert_p and exp_uncert_u Tolerance and scalet tol tol_p and tol_u User defined commentst remark The user defined comment can be entered on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog The tolerance values only apply to temperature vs temperature calibration data 176 14 MET TRACK Export Process The FullResults record can be viewed in MET TRACK using the search engine to locate the asset record and calibration record and clicking on the FullResults button on the Calibration tab of the Instrument Browser dialog as show below gl Full Results Asset Number 5614 358254 8 13 2002 14 58 17 5 x View MET CAL Classic C Meas Uncertainty C Procedure Steps C Formatted Raw gl Raw Data C 0 0500 C 0 0500 C 0 0500 C 0 0500 C 1 remark This calibration performe This calibration performe This calibration performe This calibration performe This calibration performe 0 0 10 0 0
211. l be used to print the report 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Problem Possible Cause Solution Report appears too large or too small when displayed in preview window Default print preview zoom set ting needs to be adjusted Use Defaults dialog to change default print preview zoom setting Fonts on report too large or too small Default fonts to use not set properly Use Defaults dialog to setup the default fonts to use on the report Database Problems Message states database is corrupt Software crashed or power out age occurred leaving database in corrupt state Use the options in the Utilities menu to repair and compact the database MET TRACK Link Problems Unable to establish link to MET TRACK not installed or ver Install MET TRACK as stand alone or client on computer Make sure MET TRACK database sion is prior to v7 0 link is enabled on MET TRACK tab of Defaults dialog Incompatible version of MET TRACK detected MET TRACK v7 0 or later is required Make sure latest available Service Pack has also been installed Service Pack 3 or later Interface application could not be aunched Check the Check if MET TRACK is installed on startup option on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog Uncheck this option after successful login Unable to login to MET TRACK database Incorrect user ID or password Check user ID and password No licenses available Use the license d
212. lable e Type B Thermocouple e Type E Thermocouple e Type J Thermocouple e Type K Thermocouple e Type N Thermocouple e Type R Thermocouple 188 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 189 e Type S Thermocouple e Type T Thermocouple e Type AuPt Thermocouple Next select the temperature range that your UUT was calibrated over using the Temperature range drop down list The available choices depends on the type of thermocouple selected above Note The temperature ranges for thermocouple probes are always dis played here in degrees C and are intended for convenience only Select the appropriate option for cold junction readings using the Cold junction compensation setting drop down list MET TEMP II can be configured to take CJC readings for thermocouple probes This application needs to know the scale of those readings If CJC readings are not required or were not taken se lect the Do not use CJC in calculations option The CJC readings are ignored If you select any other option the test probe readings are compensated according to the CJC readings for each set point before calculating the coefficients Note For all Hart thermometer readouts cold junction readings are AL WAYS in degrees C If cold junction readings were entered manually for your UUT select the appropriate option Click the OK button to continue and display the Calculate Coefficients dialog refer to Section 15 5 1 4 Calculate Coefficients Dialog
213. lect a test probe based on Test number O Model number Test number CE200206126 E Print all reports for this test number Bist ached IX Preview report Probe Model Number Probe Serial Number Figure 69 Print Custom Report of Calibration Dialog 139 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 140 To use this custom report you must select either a test number or a model num ber on which to base the test probe selection If the test number option is selected a list of test numbers becomes available Once a test number is selected the probe model numbers and serial numbers appear below From the list entitled Select probes select the probe model num ber and serial number If the model number option is selected a list of probe model numbers becomes available Once a model number is selected the probe serial numbers and test numbers appear below From the list entitled Select probes select the probe test number and serial number Select the test probes in the Select probes list If the Print all reports for this test number check box is selected a Report of Calibration is printed for the selected test probes If not selected reports are printed only for the highlighted test probes in the Select probes list If the Preview report checkbox is selected the report is displayed in the Print Preview window If the Preview report check box is not selected the report is sent directly to the printer Clicking th
214. lected each point read from the reference probe is graphed 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 44 3 4 5 Reports Tab The Reports tab is for selecting the default report settings User Test Eonts amp Sizes MET TRACK Gnesi ECETIA Yee Joh Rego Paragraph Select the default paragraph file T YB34 9932 REPORTSS MYPARA PGH Report Template Use default report template Use custom report template B3 9932 REPORTS 9932HSI 7 Use custom logo TAIMAGESALOGONMHART F51 MF Report of Calibration Margins and Column Widths Report of Calibration margins Test Equipment table column widths Top 05 Y Ler os El Manut 1 5 3 Modet 07 El Bottom 0 5 E Right 05 E Descr 27 8 Seria 1 1 El Units Date 09 SI Total 7 0 inches Figure 17 Reports Tab The Paragraph section of this tab specifies the default text file that contains the text to appear on the report as the Paragraph Clicking the Edit button opens the file specified in the Filename box in the Text Editor so that it may be viewed or edited If there is no file specified in the File name box the Text Editor is displayed blank and ready for editing Clicking the Browse button displays the Windows Open dialog The user may select the file that contains the paragraph text The Report Template section of this tab determines the default report template that will be used when printing a Report of Calibratio
215. les and other types of probes and thermometers The software au tomates testing of multiple sensors simultaneously and supports multiple test instrument configurations MET TEMP II uses thermometer readouts scanners dry wells baths and fur naces These instruments can combine to calibrate up to 100 test probes at up to 40 temperature set points MET TEMP II is available through the Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Divi sion Hart A free demo version of this software is available on our web site http www hartscientific com As we develop new instruments support for these instruments will be added to all of our existing software as applicable by way of an upgrade or a Service Release These upgrades or Service Releases will typically be available for download from our web site Check our web site frequently for free demo software Service Releases updates and information on new products and services Features New to Version 4 Version 4 3 A list of features and enhancements in version 4 3 of MET TEMP II follows Support for using 917x Metrology Wells as Heat Sources Support has been added to MET TEMP II for using the following instruments as heat sources e 9170 Metrology Well e 9171 Metrology Well e 9172 Metrology Well e 9173 Metrology Well Branding Logo change The logos and graphics displayed in MET TEMP II have been updated Version 4 2 A list of new features and enhancements in version 4 2 of MET TEMP II fol
216. lick the Export button A prompt is displayed for entering the path and filename for the export file The default path and filename can be changed on the Directories tab of the Defaults dialog A message is displayed stating the export operation was successful if no errors occurred Click the OK button to close this dialog and return to the Export Data dialog 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 211 15 6 2 Customizing Export Data The software has a feature that allows the user to define the data to be exported This feature is accessible by clicking the Configure button on the Export Data dialog Clicking this button displays the Configure Export Fields dialog Configure Export Fields xi Configure Export Fields Header fields to export TestStart TestNo TestStart TechName TestStart TestDate TestStart StartTime TestStart EndDate Equipment fields to export TestE quipment Model TestE quipment SerialNo TestE quipment Manuf TestE quipment Descr TestE quipment CalD ate Readings fields to export TestProbeE quipment Re TestProbeE quipment De TestProbeE quipment Cal TestStart ElapsedT ime TestEquipment RecalDate TestProbeE quipment T e1 TestStart Procedure i TestProbeE quipment MT TestReadings Setpoint TestStart SetpointScale TestReadings RefReadir TestStart RefProbeScale TestReadings TestProbe TestProbeE quipment T et TestReadings RefStdDe_ Y Select table T
217. lick the Ref Probe button to configure the reference probe infor mation The Reference Probe Configuration dialog is displayed Refer to Sec tion 4 3 3 Reference Probe Configuration Dialog for more details The Drivers button allows the user to install instrument drivers If there are no models available in the Model number drop down list you must install drivers by clicking the Drivers button Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog Note The reference readout reference module if applicable and reference probe must be configured to start a calibration test Reference Module Configuration Dialog The Reference Module Configuration dialog is displayed when the Module but ton on the Reference Readout Configuration dialog is clicked This dialog is 4 Configuration Menu 67 only applicable when the selected reference readout instrument requires the use of modules or a multiplexer Reference Module Configuration xi Reference Module Configuration Enter the reference module information to which the reference probe is attached If more than one module with this model number exists the FIRST module with this model number will be used Model number Serial number fo Jees Manufacturer Description SPRT Module Ref Probe Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number 01 07 2003 g
218. ll au tomatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the description and calibration and recalibration dates may be synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset cannot be found in the MET TRACK database a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 66 4 3 2 A Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II If enabled click the Module button to configure the module or multiplexer to which the reference probe is connected The Reference Module Configuration dialog is displayed Refer to Section 4 3 2 Reference Module Configuration Dialog for more details Otherwise c
219. lows 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Support for Chinese Reports Add on for MET TEMP II Features have been added to MET TEMP II to support the Chinese Reports add on These features include e A new option has been added to the Test tab of the MET TEMP II De faults dialog to allow Reference Probe readings to be taken in raw units ohms or volts as well as in temperature This feature should be left dis abled unless you are using the Chinese Reports add on e A new table has been added to the database for the raw measurement data This table is currently not accessible to users through the MET TEMP IIT application e Additional command line arguments are now passed to custom report ap plications when using the Custom Reports feature of MET TEMP II 1 2 3 Version 4 1 A list of new features and enhancements in version 4 1 of MET TEMP II follows Support for Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer Support has been added to allow the ambient temperature and humidity to be monitored throughout the testing period using a Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer This feature can be enabled on the General tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog Adjustable Margins and Table Column Widths The top bottom left and right margins on the Report of Calibration are now adjustable To set the margins select the Defaults option in the File menu in MET TEMP II and click on the Reports tab This tab also allows the column widt
220. lows the user to determine the validity of tests and to remove test data from the database To validate or remove a test from the database select the tests from the Select tests list and click the Validate or Remove button To validate or remove all tests click the Validate All or Remove All button respec tively Test validation is explained below 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide A Important Use caution when removing tests Once a test has been re moved it no longer exists All data is deleted permanently For this reason the user is asked to confirm the removing of tests from the database MET TEMP II stores test data in separate tables within the database If a test is stopped before any readings are taken the table containing the readings has no records for that test If the database becomes corrupt some of the data for a particular test may be lost These are a couple of the reasons why the user may need to validate the test The validation feature of MET TEMP II can be used to determine if there are records for every test in every table Clicking the Validate or Validate All buttons performs a check on the selected tests to see if there are records in each of the database tables for the test If MET TEMP II determines that a test is invalid the Invalid Test dialog is dis played Otherwise a message appears stating the validity of the tests A Note This feature does not determine the validity of readings taken by MET TEMP II
221. lt calibration interval RTD 392 4 wire sl hse ll days Select the default temperature scale for the test The reference probe graph set points heat source and reference probe ranges all use this scale CHANGING this setting does not change the CURRENT TEST SCALE ec OF Figure 15 Setup Tab If the Enable communications during configuration check box is selected then the similar check box on the Communications Port Configuration Reference Readout Configuration Scanner Configuration and Heat Source Configuration dialogs is selected If selected the assumption is made that the instruments are connected and powered on Communication is initiated to the instruments dur ing the configuration process If the Show recalibration date notification messages check box is selected the user is prompted when configuring the test equipment if the recalibration date has passed The Prompt for order ID when opening Test Probe Configuration file check box determines whether or not the user is prompted for an order ID number when opening a test probe configuration file The order ID number is required to begin a test and can be entered manually from the Customer Information dialog The Use same order ID for all test probes check box determines whether the software should automatically fill in the Customer order ID box on the Cus tomer Information dialog when configuring a new test probe The Auto generate test numbers by default check box
222. lt settings EN Platinum Probe Coefficients Calculate Platinum probe coefficients DN Thermistor Probe Coefficients Calculate Thermistor probe coefficients AN Thermocouple Probe Coefficients Calculate Thermocouple probe coefficients R Help Open the help file 15 5 Calculating Characterization Coefficients This software was designed to take the test data acquired by MET TEMP II and calculate characterization coefficients The software can then use these coeffi cients to generate temperature vs resistance temperature vs ratio or tempera ture vs EMF tables Before the Coefficients and Tables application can be used you must first per form a calibration test using MET TEMP II When performing a calibration test keep in mind the following e The readings for the reference probe MUST be in a temperature scale C For K e The readings for the test probes UUTs MUST be in either resistance Ohms or kOhms or voltage mV or pV e MET TEMP II MUST acquire readings at a sufficient number of set points depending on the type of coefficients that are to be calculated refer to Section 15 12 Requirements and Methods for more details The following sections describe in detail how to calculate characterization coef ficients and print Reports of Calibration and tables 15 5 1 Calculating Coefficients Prior to calibrating the UUT using MET TEMP Il you should decide what type of characterization coefficients you want to c
223. ly Too many or not enough mea surements being taken from ref erence and UUT at each set point Default number of measurements not properly set Use Defaults dialog to set the default number of measurements to take and average at each set point No reading message appears Test probe not connected to cor rect scanner channel Make sure the test probe is connected to the correct scanner chan nel according to the current test probe configuration Test probe bad or scanner chan nel not working properly Try connecting test probe to another channel or readout device to verify if probe is good Scanner channel not properly configured Make sure scanner channel is configured properly including excita tion current CJC settings conversion type coefficients etc Heat Source Calibration Test Problems Message appears stating could not successfully write calibration coefficient s to heat source Coefficient value exceeds ac ceptable range of values of coef ficient s Typically this message indicates that some of the As Found data that was used to calculate the coefficient s is bad Make sure Dura tion time is long enough 20 minutes or more is suggested Printing Problems Report prints at original size or 4 times original size 249 Saved report is being printed us ing a different printer driver than was used to save the report Save the report using the same printer driver that wil
224. mber was not selected from the drop down list the Calibration date and Recalibration date must be entered These boxes are disabled if the se lected module or multiplexer does not require calibration If the recalibration date has passed and the Show recalibration date notification messages check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog is selected the user is warned and must change the calibration and recalibration dates before the in strument can be used When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this instrument An in ventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this instru ment before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations If the calibration and recalibration dates are required a current calibration re cord must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will au tomatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the description calibration and recalibration dates may be syn chronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset can not be found in the MET TRACK database a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset
225. ming Calibrations Using Fixed Points 157 12 3 Fixed Point Calibration Process When MET TEMP II is configured with one or more fixed point set points the test process is slightly different than when all set points are comparison set points For fixed point set points only one test probe at a time can be inserted into the fixed point cell MET TEMP II displays a prompt to insert the first test probe into the fixed point cell When the OK button on this prompt is clicked MET TEMP II begins to count down the duration time for this set point When the duration time has elapsed MET TEMP II begins to take readings from the first test probe The value that was entered as the Reference value for the se lected fixed point cell when the cell was configured is stored as the reference reading at that set point Then MET TEMP II prompts to insert the next test probe into the fixed point cell This process is repeated for all test probes at the current fixed point then for all other fixed point set points All fixed point cells used during the calibration process are listed on the Report of Calibration in the Test Equipment section 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 159 13 13 1 13 2 Performing Heat Source Calibrations MET TEMP II was originally designed to perform comparison calibrations for PRT thermistor and thermocouple probes However MET TEMP II has been modified to calibrate Liquid in Glass and bi metallic therm
226. n Matrix e Matrix e Matrix e Matrix An exact solution i e two unknowns in two equations would be arrived at with the following operation 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 15 12 6 3 15 12 6 4 15 12 6 5 15 12 7 C Solution Matrix Matrix IPTS 68 Like the ITS 90 the IPTS 68 is expressed in terms of resistance ratios The de nominator however is the resistance at the ice point 0 0C rather than the re sistance at the Triple Point of Water 0 01C This software allows only exact solutions for the IPTS 68 and uses iteration or simple algebra for the solutions Callendar Van Dusen The Callendar Van Dusen expression is basically a third order polynomial with the third coefficient B set to zero above OC The polynomial is expressed in terms of resistance vs temperature in degrees C It is solved by matrix methods in a similar manner as the ITS 90 expression shown above with temperature on the left of the equal sign and the polynomial on the right The software allows for over determined solutions Only data above OC is used for solution of the first two coefficients and 8 data both above and below OC is used for solu tion of B Polynomial and Thermocouple Polynomial solutions are arrived at using matrix methods as with the ITS 90 and the Callendar Van Dusen Platinum probes require polynomials expressed in terms of resistance vs temperature Thermistor probes exhibit exponential
227. n If the Use default re port template option is selected MET TEMP II uses the built in Report of Cali bration template The Custom report template box and Browse button are disabled MET TEMP II also allows custom report templates to be used when printing reports If the default report template isn t exactly the type of report required for your application contact Hart application specialists for information on ob taining custom report templates designed to your specifications If a custom re port template has been purchased from Hart the Use custom report template option allows the user to specify the file that contains the custom report tem 3 File Menu 45 plate The Custom report template box and Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button to select the custom report template to use MET TEMP II now comes with two custom Reports of Calibration which are installed automatically when MET TEMP II is installed The custom report files are installed in the REPORTS folder and are named PASSFAIL EXE and HEATSRC EXE For more details on using these custom reports see Section 11 2 Custom Reports of Calibration Note Custom report template files MUST be located in the REPORTS subfolder of the CAMETTEMP2 folder or the folder where MET TEMP II was installed in order to operate properly The Use custom logo check box can be used to specify a custom logo to print in the upper left corner of the Report of Calibration This
228. n dialog is displayed and the dialog is not closed Clicking the Cancel button discards any changes made and closes this dialog 5 5 a Start Test The Start Test option starts a calibration test This option is only enabled if all required information has been entered for the reference readout reference mod ule if applicable reference probe scanner scanner module s if applicable heat source s set points and test probe s If any piece of the configuration is incomplete a calibration cannot be started Once a test is running this option does not appear in the menu When starting a calibration test MET TEMP II checks for conflicts and miss ing information in the current configuration and attempts to establish communi cations with all connected instruments All instruments must be connected and powered on at this time Also make sure the SmartSwitch is connected to the selected COM port and powered on If MET TEMP II determines that some required information is missing the In complete Setup Setup Information dialog is displayed Scroll through the list to determine what information is missing The items listed need to be resolved 102 5 Calibration Menu 103 before a calibration test can start Click the OK button to close this dialog then go to the appropriate dialog to enter the missing information Incomplete Setup Setup Information x Setup Information The test cannot be started until the setup
229. n one page additional pages are automatically generated The lower portion of this dialog determines the report template that will be used when printing a Report or Calibration If the Use default report template option is selected MET TEMP II uses the built in Report of Calibration tem plate The Custom report template box and Browse button are disabled MET TEMP II also allows custom report templates to be used when printing reports If the default report template isn t exactly the type of report required for your application contact Hart application specialists for information on ob taining custom report templates designed to your specifications If a custom re port template has been purchased from Hart the Use custom report template option allows the user to specify the file that contains the custom report tem plate The Custom report template box and Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button to select the custom report template to use then click the Print button to launch the custom report template MET TEMP II now comes with two custom Reports of Calibration which are installed automatically when MET TEMP II is installed The custom report files are installed in the REPORTS folder and are named PASSFAIL EXE and HEATSRC EXE For more details on using these custom reports see Section 11 2 Custom Reports of Calibration Note Custom report template files MUST be located in the REPORTS subfolder of the CAMETTEMP2 folder o
230. name and address manufacturer and description information order ID received condition check standard setting MET TRACK asset number un certainty method of realization setting and heat source calibration coefficient labels Edit Test Information el ES Edit Test Information Select database table Locate test number TestE quipment 1529 Hart Scientific Inc 5614 Burns Engineering 1529 Hart Scientific Inc CE200206124 5614 Hart Scientific Inc CE200206124 5901 Hart Scientific Inc CE200206124 9105 Hart Scientific Inc CE200206126 1529 Hart Scientific Inc CE200206126 5614 Hart Scientific Inc CE200206126 5901 Hart Scientific Inc CE200206126 9105 Hart Scientific Inc CE200212130 1560 Hart Scientific 2560 Hart Scientific 2562 Hart Scientific Burns Engineering Hart Scientific Dry well 1560 Hart Scientific Black 2560 Hart Scientific SPRT PEANN 94194 SECO U ark Oir DOT ME Figure 61 Edit Test Information Dialog Select the database table that contains the information that needs to be edited using the Select database table drop down list Once a table is selected the grid below displays the information stored in the table The information is sorted by test number To rapidly locate a specific test number enter the test number into the Locate test number box The record is searched for as you type The current record is
231. nce probes select the probe type from the Probe type drop down list Instrument model has not been previously entered For reference and test probes manually enter the model number in the Model number box Set point parameters default to values that always need to be changed Default values for set point pa rameters not set yet Use Defaults dialog to set the default values for the set point parameters Temperature scale defaults to Celsius but want to perform tests in Fahrenheit Default temperature scale not set appropriately Use Defaults dialog to set the default temperature scale to use Technician name or company name and or address are incorrect User information was not entered correctly when MET TEMP II was installed Use Defaults dialog to set the default technician name and company information to use Unable to auto generate set points Performing heat source calibration MET TEMP II does not allow set points to be auto generated when performing heat source calibrations Unable to insert or remove set points manually Performing heat source calibration MET TEMP II requires a set point configuration file to be opened be fore allowing set points to be inserted or removed when performing heat source calibrations The required As Found set points cannot be removed Multiple set points selected Select a single set point in the set point list Maximum number of set point
232. nd As Left calibration coefficients and data The As Found and As Left data consist of the set points actual values error tolerance pass fail status and set point resistance The entire As Found section of the report and the Tolerance Pass Fail and Set point Resistance columns in the As Found and As Left sections of the re port are optional and can be printed or not by selecting the appropriate options on the Print Heat Source Report of Calibration dialog before printing the re port If all test data does not fit on the second page a third page may be created 11 Reports of Calibration The fonts sizes and styles used on the Heat Source Report of Calibration can be changed on the Fonts amp Sizes tab of the Defaults dialog The top bottom left and right margins and the column widths for the Test Equipment table on the Heat Source Report of Calibration can be set using the appropriate controls on the Reports tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog A custom logo can also be added to the upper left corner of the Heat Source Re port of Calibration using the settings on this tab To use this custom report select the Use custom report template option on the Print Test Report dialog Click the Browse button and select the HEATSRC EXE file in the REPORTS subfolder Clicking the Print button on the Print Test Report dialog launches this custom report Reports of Calibration can be saved to a report file from the Print Preview win
233. nd other informa tion Refer to Section 5 4 Test Probes for details on configuring the test probes Optional Save the current test probe configuration Once the test probe information has been entered the current test probe configuration can be saved The test probe configuration does not need to be saved to start a test However if the same test probes are going to be calibrated together in the future saving the test probe configuration provides a quick method to setup the test probes Start the test The current configuration is checked for missing informa tion and or conflicts and the Test Information dialog is displayed Fill in the remaining information for this test and click the OK button to begin Refer to Section 5 5 Start Test for details on the test process Close the test When a test is complete it must be closed Select the Close Test option in the File menu to close the test Print the Report of Calibration To print the Report of Calibration for each of the test probes select the Print Report option in the File menu Refer to Section 3 6 Print Report for details on printing a Report of Calibration Heat Source Calibrations The following section outlines the steps necessary to configure MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source ll Define the communication settings for the instruments The communica tion settings consist of the COM port to which the SmartSwitch is con 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide
234. nd probe Make sure the Preview report check box is selected Make sure the Use default report template option is selected NN A WwW N Click the Print button to display the Report of Calibration in the Print Preview window 6 When prompted select the printer to which the Report of Calibration will be printed Note Selecting the appropriate printer before saving the report file is very im portant Read Section 17 1 Limitations before continuing 7 When the Print Preview window is displayed click the button on the toolbar 8 Select the destination folder and enter the name for the report file Report files should always be saved with a RPT extension Click the OK button to save the file 9 Close the Print Preview window by clicking the button Making a Report Viewer Utility Setup Diskette MET TEMP II has a feature that allows a Report of Calibration to be saved to a report file which can then be stored on diskette CD ROM or e mailed to some one who may need to view or print the Report of Calibration The report file requires a special utility to open view and print the Report of Calibration Report files cannot be viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader word processors or other graphics applications For this reason a special report viewer utility is included with MET TEMP II This utility is automatically installed when MET TEMP II is installed This utility may be freely distributed to anyone who may need to open vie
235. ndow and have an ex tension of RPT The report viewer utility has three menus File View and Help A brief de scription of the options in each menu follows e File menu The File menu provides options for opening saving closing and printing report files e View menu The View menu provides options for navigating multi page report files and zooming e Help menu The Help menu provides an option to view the About Re port Viewer dialog 17 1 Limitations There are a few known limitations to using the report viewer utility Please read the following information to avoid potential problems e Report files are dependent on the currently selected Windows printer driver For this reason select the driver for the printer that is used to print the report prior to saving the report to a file For example if the report file 1s being e mailed to a person who prints the report on a Hewlett Packard LaserJet 4MP printer select this same print driver prior to previewing and saving the report to a file Otherwise reports may appear fine in the pre view window but print incorrectly e Report files use a proprietary format and are not viewable by any other software such as Adobe Acrobat Reader word processors or graphics applications The report viewer utility can be distributed freely to anyone who needs to view or print a report file To create a distribution diskette for the report viewer utility refer to Section 17 3 Making a Report View
236. ng MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source the scanner instru ment acts as the reference instrument and the test probe acts as the reference probe Refer to Section 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations for more in formation on configuring MET TEMP II to perform heat source calibrations Select the scanner model number using the Model number drop down list If the model number needed does not appear on the list click the Drivers button to install the driver for the scanner instrument Refer to Section 4 1 Install Drivers for more information on installing drivers The manufacturer and de scription information is filled in automatically when a model is selected Next select the serial number from the Serial number drop down list or enter the serial number in the Serial number box if it has not been entered previously MET TEMP II records serial numbers calibration dates and recalibration dates to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over If the serial number was not selected from the drop down list the Calibration date and Recalibration date must be entered These boxes will be disabled if the selected instrument does not require calibration If the recalibration date has passed and the Show recalibration date notification messages check box is selected on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog the user is warned and must change the calibration and recalibration dates before the in strument can be used 4 Configurati
237. ng readings Enter number of measurements to average to produce one reading Always discard first reading on each channel when taking measurements Prompt to calculate coefficients when closing test IX Take Reference readings in ohms volts as well as temperature Heat Source Calibration Options X Write new coefficients to heat source after calibration Set point Override Options If heat source has difficulty meeting Tolerance specification Prompt user to override settings after time specified below y How much time should the heat source be given 30 min Figure 20 Test Tab If the Self heat test probes UUTs before taking readings check box is se lected MET TEMP II allows the excitation current to run through the test probe for a period of one minute prior to taking readings If not selected MET TEMP II bypasses the self heat step of the test process The user is allowed to select the number of measurements to be averaged for each reading of a test Once stability is reached at a set point and the process of reading each test probe begins the test probe and the reference probe are sam pled the number of times specified here The test probe readings and reference probe readings are then averaged to determine the value to be used for the set point Note MET TEMP II uses oversampling which means that more than the se lected number of readings are actually taken MET TEMP II then discards the extra readings
238. nnot be paused when readings are being taken from the reference and test probes This option is disabled until all readings have been taken at the current set point 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 5 8 1 Resume Test The Resume Test option resumes the test process after being paused This op tion does not appear in the menu unless a test is currently paused 5 9 Stability Override The Stability Override option allows the parameters associated with the current set point to be changed or overridden Selecting this option displays the Stabil ity Override dialog 5 9 1 Stability Override Dialog The Stability Override dialog displays the settings associated with the current set point These parameters can be modified or overridden using this dialog Stability Override 3 x l Stability Override Take readings now Enter the new window tolerance and duration for the set point of 25 00 C Window setting 0 001 to 100 000 Tolerance setting 1 0000 0 0001 to 20 0000 A Duration setting 0 to 240 D gt minutes Figure 53 Stability Override Dialog To override the current set point parameters select the Take readings now op tion When the OK button is clicked the test process will automatically start taking readings from the reference and test probes regardless of whether the heat source has reached and stabilized at the current set point A Note MET TEMP II can be c
239. ns and shall not be used as a substitute for proper training and source of infor mation on such topics For more information on performing calibrations using fixed point cells please refer to the currently available literature Hart periodically offers training seminars on using fixed point cells NIST is also a good source of information on this topic Fixed Points Dialog The Fixed Points dialog is displayed when the Setup Fixed Points button on the Set points tab of the Defaults dialog is clicked or when the Insert Fixed Point button on the Set point Configuration dialog is clicked Fixed Points Fixed Points Select the fixed point standard to use for this set point Model Se al Description Ref Value C Method MIAss CS 12345 TPW 0 01 TP 5901 12345 TPW 0 01 TPW 0 01 TPW 0 01 25334 MPGa 29 7646 D FPIn 156 5985 12566987 FPSn 231 928 253654 FPZn 419 527 0 FPAl 660 323 0 961 78 NOTE Fixed Point reference values are ALWAYS in C Delete Cancel Figure 12 Fixed Points Dialog This dialog allows the fixed points supported by MET TEMP II to be managed By default MET TEMP II ships with support for fixed point cells manufac tured by Hart However the serial number for each of the cells defaults to 0 3 File Menu 37 3 4 2 1 1 Before a fixed point cell can be used its serial number reference value method of realization and optionally cal
240. nstalled to the METTEMP2 CONFIG CALFILES folder Select the appropriate set point configuration file Click the OK button to open the se lected file The default set points are read in and listed in the set points list 168 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 169 A Important The default set point configuration files are installed as A Read Only files Ifyou wish to modify the set points used to calibrate a heat source open the default set point configuration file for that heat source model make the necessary changes and save the configuration to a new configuration file using a different name Once the set point configuration file has been opened each set point in the set point list is labeled as either an As Found or As Left set point As Found set points are the set points at which readings will be taken to calcu late the new calibration coefficients for the heat source Depending on the se lected heat source up to four As Found set points will be required As Found set points cannot be moved or removed from the set point list The Insert Set point and Remove Set point buttons are always disabled when an As Found set point is selected The value of each As Found set point however can be changed to a new value As Left set points are optional can be moved and or removed as desired To in sert a new As Left set point click the Insert Set point button To remove the currently selected As Left set point click the Rem
241. ntered previously MET TEMP II records serial numbers calibration dates and recalibration dates to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over If the recalibration date has passed and the Show recalibration date notification messages check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog is selected the user is warned and must change the calibration and recalibration dates before the in strument can be used When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this instrument An in ventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this instru ment before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations If the calibration and recalibration dates are required a current calibration re cord must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will au tomatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the description calibration and recalibration dates may be syn chronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset can not be found in the MET TRACK database a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the informati
242. nu The Edit Test Information dialog is displayed 2 Select the TestReadings table using the Select database table drop down list 3 Locate the test number that contains the tolerance values to change Use the scroll bar on the right side of the grid to scroll through the records or enter the test number in the Locate test number box 11 Reports of Calibration 145 11 2 2 4 Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the grid to scroll to the right until the Misc data column is visible This column contains the values printed in the Tolerance column of the Pass Fail Report of Calibration 5 Enter the tolerance for each set point EXACLTY AS IT SHOULD AP PEAR ON THE REPORT in the Misc data field 6 Click the OK button to close the Edit Test Information dialog After the tolerance values have been changed the Pass Fail Report of Calibra tion can be printed again Heat Source Report of Calibration MET TEMP II comes with a custom Report of Calibration that is designed to print a Report of Calibration for heat source calibrations To print the Heat Source Report of Calibration select the Use custom report template option on the Print Test Report dialog and select the HEATSRC EXE report template Click the Print button The Print Heat Source Report of Cali bration dialog is displayed Print Heat Source Report of Calibration i x Select a Test Select a heat source based on Test number Model number Test number C
243. nufacturer do not match EXACLTY case insensitive If MET TEMP Il successfully locates the asset record the asset number is dis played in the MT Asset number box Click OK to close this dialog and continue If the MT Asset number box is empty a matching asset record was not found in the MET TRACK database and a prompt to launch MET TRACK is displayed 14 MET TRACK Export Process 175 The manufacturer information may be edited on this dialog if necessary to match EXACTLY the manufacturer information in MET TRACK Click the Locate Asset button to have MET TEMP II search the MET TRACK database for a matching asset record again When a match is found click the OK button to continue Click the Cancel button to abort exporting the calibration data to MET TRACK Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer must match EXACTLY If an asset record exists but MET TEMP II is unable to locate it you may need to modify the manufacturer information in the MET TRACK database When exporting temperature vs temperature calibration data the Tolerances dialog is displayed if this data is being exported for the first time and the appro priate option on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog is selected Enter the tolerances for each set point for each UUT to allow MET TEMP II to auto matically determine the setting for the Pass field in the calibration summary re
244. o Page 1 of 2 105 Celcius Drive Out Town USA 34567 8998 Model 9105 Customer Hart Scientific Serial A21345 799 East Utah Valley Drive Description Drywell Low Temperature American Fork Utah 84003 USA Calibration Range Limited Received Condition New Procedure HST000 0 As Left Condition Out of Tolerance The above referenced instrument was calibrated by direct measurement of generated temperatures using the reference standards listed in the Test Equipment table at the bottom of this report The internal calibration coefficients and the data abtained are shown on page 2 A Test Uncertainty Ratio TUR of at least 4 1 was maintained unless otherwise indicated This calibration is traceable to NIST or natural physical constants and is in compliance with ANSI NCSL Z540 1 and MIL STD 45662A Remarks This test was performed in accordance with the test procedure indicated above Test Equipment Manufacturer Model Description Serial Number Recall Date Fluke Corporation 2635A Fluke 2635A Hydra Data Bucket 343242 5 31 2002 Burns Engineering 5614 Probe Secondary Standard 5453 12 31 2002 Calibration Date 5 29 2002 Technician Calibration Due 5 29 2003 Cal E Breight Temperature 24C Humidity 56 Approved By Order MyOrderID This report shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval of Temp Tech Co Figure 73 Example Heat Source Report of Calibration Page 1
245. o be configured Refer to Section 4 5 Heat Sources for details on config uring the heat source instrument s 26 2 Configuring a Test 2 2 10 11 12 Optional Save the current instrument configuration Once the above in formation has been entered the current configuration can be saved The configuration does not need to be saved to start a test However if the same equipment is going to be used to perform future tests saving the configuration provides a quick method to setup the equipment Define the set points for the test The set points are the temperatures at which comparison measurements are taken The software must know the value and other specifications of each set point When using fixed points this is where the fixed point cell s to use are selected Re fer to Section 5 1 Set points for details on configuring the set points Optional Save the current set point configuration Once the set point information has been entered the current set point configuration can be saved The set point configuration does not need to be saved to start a test However if the same set points are going to be used to perform fu ture tests saving the set point configuration provides a quick method to setup the set points Define the test probes UUTs to calibrate The software must know the type of probes the scale of the readings to take the channel of the scan ner instrument to which each test probe is connected a
246. o E A 41 3 4 4 Graph TaD fis dit rs AA A EG Gas a 42 3 4 5 Reports Tabe sissy es a a a a 44 345 1 Text Editor Dialog so corea sotaan ee rd BOR SS 46 3 4 6 User Tabs opni u dugni Rs Boch oe ke BO eRe ered Re Be ee wed Gok Ree a 46 3 4 7 Teta A anne Gp Sie ahs GM A gk MIE She BY aes 48 3 4 8 Fonts amp Sizes Tabs ii a AA ye dar A Bye ceed Gao eee 50 3 4 9 MET TRACK Tab sos 4 ac bok b QAR o homed wba a es 52 3 4 10 SmartS witch Tab n s o ic fa aide ew Goh Sek D ee we we Se eo 55 Setup Printers secs e ce Se be Ee eS Yew SE eae US 55 Print Report 3 6 26 e he e Sue Sols a 56 Recall Saved Report 2 2 ee ee 58 Close TESE yas gs ee OE Sb eee we Be es 58 XU vse A Soe Ges es SG is Gs 58 4 Configuration Menu 59 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 Install Drivers lt s 2 0 4 Sie Brees Bares ees es eS 59 4 1 1 Adding Drivers ta iii cd Bde ew Ge OR Ge N 60 4 1 2 Removing Drivers sarc e an i ae hye Hea he ee a e 60 COM Pob 42 2 004 eke a coe he RED a ee ae 60 4 2 1 Communications Port Configuration Dialog 61 4 2 2 Check SmartSwitch Dialog 2 oa aa oaea ee 62 Reference spots a te eaGs deed sacedcs 63 4 3 1 Reference Readout Configuration Dialog oo 63 4 3 2 Reference Module Configuration Dialog o 66 4 3 3 Reference Probe Configuration Dialog o 68 CAMEL a ove oo a E E E 71 4 4 1 Scanner Configuration Dialog s s oe sta cpg tedy
247. o select a set point click on the appropriate row in the grid The row will be highlighted and the information at the bottom of this dialog is updated To unselect a set point simply click the appropriate row in the grid again and the row will be unhighlighted 192 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 193 To use all of the set points to calculate the coefficients click the Select All button When the set points have been selected click the Calculate button to proceed The software will compare the selected set points against the requirements If a problem or error is detected a message is displayed indicating the problem found When calculating Polynomial coefficients for Platinum probes the Select Cal culation Scale dialog is displayed Select Calculation Scale xi Select Calculation Scale Some instruments require Polynomial coefficients that are calculated using reference readings in a specific temperature scale Please select the temperature scale to use for this set of Polynomial coefficients The Reference readings will be converted to this scale before calculating the coefficients ec OF OK Figure 101 Select Calculation Scale Dialog Some instruments that use Polynomial coefficients require the coefficients to be calculated using a specific temperature scale The software allows the user to select the temperature scale to use e If the reference readings are in degrees C the user m
248. ocouple Types B E J K N R S T or AuPt e Other Thermocouple e Liquid in Glass only if no Scanner is being used e Bi metallic only if no Scanner is being used e Other Next select the serial number from the Serial number drop down list or enter the serial number in the Serial number box if it has not been entered previously Select the calibration interval report units and excitation current or CJC read ings settings for the test probe as applicable in the boxes provided MET TEMP II records serial numbers calibration intervals report units and excitation cur rent CJC readings settings to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over The calibration interval is the number of days from the date the calibration is performed until the next calibration is due The calibration interval can be in cremented in steps of 30 days using the up down buttons or entered manually The allowable range is 0 to 730 days 2 years If the calibration interval is set to O the recall date does not print on the Report of Calibration The report units are the scale of the test probe readings The possible choices are A AO Ohms except thermocouple LIG and Bi metallic probes e mV except resistance LIG and Bi metallic probes During a calibration test MET TEMP II attempts to verify that the test probe and reference probe readings are in the correct scale For this reason it is im portant to manually set each scanner c
249. of Calibration created by the Coefficients and Tables application has also been modified to use the margins and column widths specified Other custom reports may not support this feature 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 3 4 5 1 Text Editor Dialog The Text Editor dialog allows the user to edit the paragraph or notes to appear on the Report of Calibration Text Editor P xi Text Editor The above referenced instrument was calibrated by direct measurement of generated temperatures using the reference standards listed in the Test Equipment table at the bottom of this report The internal calibration coefficients and the data abtained are shown on page 2 A Test Uncertainty Ratio TUR of at least 4 1 was Save As maintained unless otherwise indicated This calibration is traceable to NIST or natural physical constants and is in compliance with ANSI NCSL 2540 1 and MIL STD 456624 Cancel Figure 18 Text Editor Dialog To open an existing file click the Open button Paragraph and note text files must be saved to a file in order to appear on the Report of Calibration To save the text displayed in the text editor to a file click the Save As button To create a new text file click the New button Clicking the OK button closes the Text Editor dialog You will be prompted to save any changes made Clicking the Cancel button closes the Text Editor dia log and aborts any changes made to the text 3 4 6
250. of Calibration and Tables for more details on printing Reports of Calibration and tables For more information on the Print Preview window and report files see Section 16 Print Preview Window Exit Selecting the Exit option exits the Coefficients and Tables application 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 8 Coefficients Menu The Coefficients menu provides options for calculating coefficients for plati num thermistor and thermocouple probes Platinum Probe Ctrl L Thermistor Probe Ctrl H Thermocouple Probe Ctri M Figure 126 Coefficients Menu 15 8 1 BA Platinum Probe Selecting the Platinum Probe option displays the Platinum Probe Coefficients dialog Refer to Section 15 5 1 1 Calculating PRT RTD Coefficients for more information on calculating coefficients for platinum probes 15 8 2 DN Thermistor Probe Selecting the Thermistor Probe option displays the Thermistor Probe Coeffi cients dialog Refer to Section 15 5 1 2 Calculating Thermistor Coefficients for more information on calculating coefficients for thermistor probes 15 8 3 EN Thermocouple Probe Selecting the Thermocouple Probe option displays the Thermocouple Probe Coefficients dialog Refer to Section 15 5 1 3 Calculating Thermocouple Coef ficients for more information on calculating coefficients for thermocouple probes 222 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 15 9 15 9 1 15 9 2 15 9 3 223 Utilities Menu The Ut
251. of OC 32F or 273 15 K preferably as close to OC as possible b One set point must be below OC c Two set points must be above OC 230 15 Coefficients and Tables Application Report of Calibration Our Company 12 Our Street Our Town USA 09876 Report No EXAMPLEO1 001 Page of 1 Customer Model 5614 Serial 358254 Description Secondary Standard RTD Probe Calibration Range Received Condition Current Procedure FULL New 1 0 mA TEST_PROC Our Customer One Customer Way This Town USA 12345 This is the paragraph The paragraph may contain any text that needs to be displayed in this section of the Report of Calibration The paragraph text must be saved in an ASCII text file with a PGH extension The file to be used as the paragraph text can be specified on the File Defaults Reports tab and on the Test Information dialog Actual Value UUT Reference Test Sensor Residuals C Ohms C 90 10000 16 23400 0 0001 38 83400 21 56750 0 0001 0 01200 25 54950 N A 156 59900 41 12680 0 0001 231 92800 48 35590 0 0001 300 00000 54 74330 0 0001 ITS 90 Coefficients RTPW 25 549296 Ohms a4 8 0074745 E 06 b4 3 7630372 E 04 a8 1 6577511 E 04 b8 2 1866045 E 06 Method of Realization COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP COMP Test Equipment Manufacturer Model Description Serial Number Recall Date Hart Scientific Inc 1560 Black Stack Base Un
252. oint Options Dialog for more information on using this dialog Set point configuration files can be saved by clicking the Save As button on the Set point Configuration dialog The user is prompted to enter a filename for the configuration file 130 10 Configuration Files 131 10 2 1 10 3 Set point Options Dialog The Set point Options dialog is used when auto generating set points or when opening a set point configuration file to resolve heat source conflicts when more than one heat source can be used for a set point Set point Options 3 xj Set point Options The set point of 25 00C can be achieved by more than one heat source Select the heat source to use Heat Source to use O 9105 6045 Extemal The set point of 25 00C will use a bath If needed the proportional band of the bath can be set when the bath is set to this temperature Proportional band X Enable proportional band 0 020100 nee Figure 65 Set point Options Dialog This dialog displays the heat sources that can be used for the indicated set point Select which heat source the indicated set point should use by click ing the appropriate option button Selecting a heat source other than a bath will cause this dialog to immediately close This is done to speed up the process of selecting heat sources to use If the selected heat source is a bath the propor tional band information is displayed and the user is allowed to set
253. omeone who is to assist with this procedure To force the Tolerance dialog to appear when printing a Pass Fail Report of Calibration 1 Run Windows Explorer 2 Locate and select the local hard drive and folder where MET TEMP II was installed typically CAMETTEMP2 3 In this folder locate the METTEMP2 INI file This file contains many settings that dictate how MET TEMP II operates Double click this file to open it in a text editor 4 Locate the ForceTolerance entry inthe General section This entry should currently be set to False 5 Change the word False to True as shown below then close and save the INI file 6 If this entry does not exist in the General section enter it now as shown below Example General ForceTolerance True Now every time a Pass Fail Report of Calibration is printed the Tolerance dia log will be displayed Note It is recommended that this procedure only be followed in case of a data entry error After correcting the error the ForceTolerance entry should be set back to False The second method is to use the Edit Test Information option in the Utilities menu Selecting this option displays the Edit Test Information dialog and al lows certain values in the MET TEMP II database tables to be edited It is rec ommended that this method be used to correct data entry errors when possible To use the Edit Test Information utility 1 Select the Edit Test information option in the Utilities me
254. ometers perform fixed point calibrations and to calibrate some heat sources Since the process of calibrating a heat source is somewhat different than that of calibrating a probe MET TEMP II must be setup slightly differently This sec tion explains in detail the steps necessary to configure MET TEMP II to suc cessfully calibrate a heat source Heat Source Calibration Process MET TEMP II can be configured to calibrate a single heat source using only a readout device probe and the heat source to be calibrated The process of calibrating a heat source is somewhat similar to calibrating a PRT probe The heat source is set to various set points one at a time allowed to stabilize and then readings are taken The readings are then fed into a set of equations to calculate new values for the calibration coefficients for the heat source If desired MET TEMP II can then write the new calibration coeffi cients to the heat source and take readings at additional set points to verify the calibration A custom report for heat source calibrations is included with MET TEMP II and can be used to print the results of the calibration The readings that MET TEMP II takes consist of temperature readings from the reference probe and set point resistance readings from the heat source The set point resistance readings are not actually resistance measurements but re sistance values that are calculated by the heat source based on the current set point temperat
255. on Menu 73 Select the SmartSwitch port to which the instrument is connected using the SmartSwitch port drop down list If the instrument is connected and powered up at this time make sure the Enable communications during configuration check box is selected and click the Check Port button MET TEMP II will at tempt to establish communications with the instrument If MET TEMP II is not able to communicate with the instrument an error message is displayed Other wise a message is displayed stating communication was established with the instrument When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this instrument An in ventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this instru ment before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations If the calibration and recalibration dates are required a current calibration re cord must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will au tomatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the description and calibration and recalibration dates may be synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset cannot be found in the MET
256. on and or tables in the Print Preview win dow select the Preview report check box 196 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 197 To print a Report of Calibration for the selected test probe s select the Print report check box To print a table for the selected test probe s select the Gen erate table check box Selecting these check boxes enables the Report Options and Table Options buttons respectively This software has many settings regard ing the Report of Calibration and tables including using a custom report tem plate customizable resolutions fonts exporting to a file and more Refer to Section 15 5 1 8 Report Options Dialog and Section 15 5 1 9 Table Options Dialog for more information on the various report and table options Note When a test probe is selected the Report Options and Table Options button captions change to reflect the type of coefficients stored in the data base for that test probe The last settings used are remembered for each type of coefficients independent of other types of coefficients When select ing multiple test probes the Report Options and Table Options buttons are based on the selected test probe closest to the top of the Select probe list Modifying the Report Options or Table Options settings only affect reports and tables for the test probes that have the same type of coefficients as the first test probe Test probes that have other coefficients will use the remem bered settings f
257. on file will most likely fail when the currently configured scanner differs from the information in the configuration file Warning and or error messages may appear in this situation When MET TEMP II opens a test probe configu ration file it attempts to retrieve scale current CJC customer name and cus tomer address information for each probe If any conflicts or errors are detected while opening an instrument configuration file messages are displayed provid ing some information as to the problems found The user must enter the order ID number for each test probe when a configura tion file is opened If the Prompt for order ID when opening Test Probe Config uration file check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog is selected the Enter Order ID dialog appears If the Prompt for Order ID when opening Test Probe Configuration file check box is not selected the user must manually en ter this information on the Customer Information dialog by clicking the Other Info button on the Test Probe Configuration dialog Refer to Section 10 3 1 Enter Order ID Dialog for more information on using this dialog Test probe configuration files can be saved by clicking the Save As button on the Test Probe Configuration dialog The user is prompted to enter a filename for the configuration file 10 Configuration Files 133 Enter Order ID Dialog The Enter Order ID dialog is used when opening a test probe configuration file to associate an or
258. on in MET TEMP II 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 76 4 5 A Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you may be able to modify the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II Click the Test Probes button to configure the test probes The Test Probe Con figuration dialog is displayed Refer to Section 5 4 1 Test Probe Configuration Dialog for more details Note The Test Probes button is not shown on this dialog when MET TEMP II is being configured to calibrate a heat source The Drivers button allows the user to install instrument drivers If there are no models available in the Model number drop down list you must install drivers by clicking the Drivers button Clicking the OK button accepts the selected settings and closes this dialog Clicking the Cancel button ignores any changes made and closes this dialog Heat Sources Selecting the Heat Sources option displays the Heat Source Configuration dia log This dialog can also be displayed by clicking the Heat Sources button on the Equipment Info dialog 4 Configuration Menu 77
259. on the Scanner Module Configuration dialog are auto matically configured accordingly Otherwise Defaults each of the tabs to 1 2 etc and the module model numbers must be configured manually 4 Configuration Menu 75 All scanner modules are initially disabled by default To use a module it must be enabled To enable a scanner module select the tab of the module to enable then select the Scanner module is used for the test check box Once a scanner module is enabled the Model number box is enabled Select the scanner module model number using the Model number drop down list If the required model number does not appear on the list click the Drivers button to install the driver for the scanner module or multiplexer Refer to Sec tion 4 1 Install Drivers for more information on installing drivers The manu facturer and description information is filled in automatically when a model is selected The model number is also displayed on the tab Note The scanner modules must be entered in the same order as they are at tached to the scanner instrument If a particular scanner module is not to be used it still needs to be configured to act as a place holder This is done by se lecting the Scanner module is used for the test check box selecting the model number then unchecking the check box Next select the serial number from the Serial number drop down list or enter the serial number in the Serial number box if it has not been e
260. onfigured Refer to Section 13 Performing Heat Source Cali brations for more information on configuring MET TEMP II to perform heat source calibrations The Enable communications during configuration check box is provided to en able verifying communications with test equipment during the configuration process The default state of this check box is determined by the state of the 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 78 Enable communications during configuration check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog The Use heat sources as reference check box specifies that the heat source s entered are to be used as the reference the sensor s in the heat source s act as the reference probe When using the heat source s as the reference the cali bration and recalibration dates are required When using MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source the Use heat sources as reference check box must be checked This enables the Calibrate heat source check box To calibrate a heat source select the Calibrate heat source check box When this feature is enabled only one heat source can be configured Re fer to Section 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations for more information on configuring MET TEMP II to perform heat source calibrations When con figuring MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat source the calibration interval box and Customer button are displayed and the calibration and recalibration date boxes are hidden If not calibrating a heat
261. onfigured to automatically override the set point parameters after a certain period of time on the Test tab of the Defaults dialog 110 5 Calibration Menu 111 When overriding set point parameters the current set point is marked as over ridden Set points that have been overridden appear on the Report of Calibra tion with a special marker and a note indicating that the set point parameters were overridden for that set point To change the window parameter for the current set point enter the new value in the Window box The window parameter is used to determine if a new set point needs to be calculated for the heat source If MET TEMP II gets stuck in a loop recalculating the heat source set point this parameter can be changed to widen the acceptable window Typically however when MET TEMP II gets stuck in such a loop the tolerance and duration parameters need to be changed To change the tolerance parameter for the current set point enter the new value in the Tolerance box The tolerance parameter is used with the duration param eter to determine when the heat source has stabilized at the current set point Setting the tolerance parameter too large may cause MET TEMP II to prema turely determine that the heat source has stabilized at the set point and may proceed to check the window parameter and calculate a new set point for the heat source Setting the tolerance parameter too small may cause MET TEMP II to determine that the
262. or later must be installed MET TEMP II does not in terface with previous versions of MET TRACK Make sure the latest Ser vice Pack has been installed MET TEMP II will display prompts if it determines that the installed version of MET TRACK needs to be up graded If the link to the MET TRACK database is enabled every time MET TEMP II starts the MET TRACK database login prompt is displayed 1 Introduction 13 Important MET TEMP II requires a MET TRACK access level of 1 or higher Connect to Adaptive Server Anywhere 2 xi Login opec Database Network Advanced C Use integrated login Supply user ID and password User ID ebreight Password KIRAI I Encrypt password Cancel Figure 2 MET TRACK Database Login Dialog Enter the MET TRACK user ID and password If login is successful a prompt is displayed indicating the name and access level of the user currently logged in If the name of the user does not match the current technician name MET TEMP II asks if you want to update the default technician name Click 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Yes to update the default technician name in MET TEMP II or click No to pre serve the current default technician name MET TEMP II xi Q Login to the MET TRACK database was successful User Cal E Breight Level 3 Do you want to make Cal E Breight the default technician in MET TEMP II Yes No Figure 3 Prompt to Synchronize Technician Name
263. or that type of coefficients If you wish to customize the set tings for each individual Report of Calibration and or table you may want to only print the Report of Calibration and or table for one test probe at a time After the test probe has been selected and the Report Options and Table Op tions have been set click the Print button to print the Report s of Calibration and or table s Refer to Section 15 11 1 Default Report of Calibration and Section 15 11 2 Default Table for more information on the default Report of Calibration and table that ship with this software Click the Cancel button to close this dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 5 1 8 Report Options Dialog The Report Options dialog is displayed when the Report Options button is clicked on the Print Reports and Tables dialog x Report Options for 1TS 90 reports Report Sections Template Settings Report Sections X Print raw data section X Print residuals in set point section Figure 104 Report Options Dialog The Report Options dialog allows the user to specify options for the Report of Calibration for each type of coefficients by selecting either of the three tabs Report Sections Template Settings and Fonts amp Sizes The last settings used for each type of coefficients are remembered When this dialog is displayed the last settings for the indicated type of coefficients are shown Change the settings as d
264. ous page of the report if more than one page gt Next Page Navigates to next page of the report if more than one page gt Last Page Navigates to last page of the report if more than one page Be Zoom In Zooms in to enlarge the report A Zoom Out Zooms out from reduce the report e oolbar also indicates the current page and the number of pages in the cur rent report 17 Report Viewer Utility 241 17 Report Viewer Utility MET TEMP II has a feature that allows a Report of Calibration to be saved to a report file which can then be stored on diskette CD ROM or e mailed to some one else The report viewer utility allows report files to be opened viewed and printed This utility can be installed on any computer where report files need to be accessed The report viewer utility is very similar to the Print Preview window with a few enhancements This utility allows a single report file to be opened and viewed at a time The currently open report file must be closed before another file can be opened i Report Viewer C METTEMP2 REPORTS EXAMPLERPT olx File View Help IKRE Page of Bapore ol Ca l ration Tapers CRONE Es Pal TRE REPORT E POR DEMO USES ONLY AMD DOES MIT CONTAIN OCT UML DaTa Steet ome y ppsa Come Cid Dim Terr and maim rm rc Cp Figure 135 Report Viewer Utility 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide Report files can be saved only from the Print Preview wi
265. out Configuration Dialog The Reference Readout Configuration dialog is used to select the instrument 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide used as the reference readout instrument or the instrument to which the refer ence probe is connected Reference Readout Configuration xi Reference Readout Configuration Drivers Check Port X Enable communications during configuration Use heat sources as reference Enter the reference readout information Model number Serial number SmartSwitch port m aee JE y Manufacturer Ref Probe Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number Cancel Figure 30 Reference Readout Configuration Dialog The Enable communications during configuration check box is provided to en able verifying communications with test equipment during the configuration process The default state of this check box is determined by the state of the Enable communications during configuration check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog The Use Heat Sources as reference check box is provided for specifying that a reference readout and reference probe are not needed because the sensor s in the heat source s will be used as the reference probe When this check box is selected no further reference configuration is required on this dialog and all other controls are disabled Click the OK button to close this dialog Note When using MET TEMP II to calibrate a heat sour
266. ove Set point button The Set point Window Tolerance Duration and Uncertainty settings for any set point can be changed as desired The Window Tolerance and Duration settings are used in the same manner as when performing comparison calibrations Refer to Section 5 1 1 Set point Configuration Dialog for more details When setting the Window and Tolerance keep in mind the resolution of the readings on the display of the heat source i e do not attempt to set the Window or Tolerance to 0 010 if the resolution on the display of the heat source being calibrated is only 0 1 When setting the Duration be sure to allow plenty of time for the heat source to soak at the set point temperature A minimum of 20 to 30 minutes is sug gested for most heat sources When performing a heat source calibration the Uncertainty is used to deter mine the pass fail status This value should be set to the heat source s accuracy specification at each set point This value will print in the Tolerance column on the Heat Source Report of Calibration Note The values for the Window Tolerance and Duration in the default set point configuration files are suggested settings only There is no guar antee that these default settings will work perfectly in every case You may need to modify these settings and create your own set point configuration files to meet the specific needs of your heat sources 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide A Note When calibra
267. ox if it has not been entered previously MET TEMP II records serial numbers calibration dates and recalibration dates to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 70 If the serial number was not selected from the drop down list the Calibration date and Recalibration date must be entered If the recalibration date has passed and the Show recalibration date notification messages check box is selected on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog the user is warned and must change the calibration and recalibration dates before this reference probe can be used Select the channel of the reference readout instrument or reference module or multiplexer to which the reference probe is connected using the Channel drop down list For reference modules or multiplexers the channel selection is with respect to that module or multiplexer Important When using the Hydra series dataloggers with a 4 wire probe select the first channel that the probe is connected to For example if the probe is connected to channels I and 11 select channel 1 in the channel drop down list Select the report units for the reference probe using the Report units drop down list The possible choices are e C eo F ek Enter the minimum and maximum range of the reference probe in the Min temperature and Max temperature boxes The minimum temperature defaults to 330 and the maximum temperature defaults to 2650 when en
268. p process any existing test data is copied to the MET TEMP II database Also any existing configura tion files CFG TPC STF STC from the CONFIG folder and all re port files RPT PGH TXT from the REPORTS folder are copied to the MET TEMP II CONFIG and REPORTS folders respectively A Important Before installing MET TEMP II make sure the date time and number formats are set according to how you want the dates times and numbers to appear If test data is being copied from a previous version da tabase all data is formatted according to the current settings when the data is copied Installing MET TEMP II 1 Insert the MET TEMP IT CD ROM into your CD ROM drive The Setup program should run automatically 2 Follow the on screen instructions to install MET TEMP II 3 When prompted enter the product serial number The serial number is provided on a sticker typically located on the CD pouch on the inside back cover of the MET TEMP II User s Guide 4 After all files have been installed a program group is created with icons for the software the Help file the README TXT file and an icon to uninstall the software The installation process is complete 5 The README TXT file can be displayed by checking the appropriate check box before the setup program finishes Read this file for important information that was not available when the User Guide was printed 6 Ifyou are upgrading from Calibrate it to MET TEMP II
269. page of the report should be printed If this option is not selected the As Found section is not printed Selecting the Print Tolerance and Pass Fail data in As Found amp As Left sections option indicates that the Tolerance and Pass Fail columns in both the As Found and As Left sections on the second page of the report should be printed If this option is not selected the Tolerance and Pass Fail columns are not printed Selecting the Print Set point Resistance data in As Found amp As Left sections option indicates that the Set point Resistance column in both the As Found and As Left sections on the second page of the report should be printed If this op tion is not selected the Set point Resistance column is not printed Clicking the Print button prints the Heat Source Report of Calibration for the selected heat source Clicking the Exit button closes the Print Heat Source Report of Calibration dialog The Heat Source Report of Calibration is designed in a two page layout The first page consists of the report number the heat source information calibra tion range received condition test procedure As Left condition customer name and address calibration test paragraph and remarks a list of the test equipment calibration date recall date ambient temperature and humidity customer order ID technician name and a place for technician and approval signatures The second page consists of As Found calibration coefficients and data a
270. pieces of informa tion are concatenated together with a dash The test probe information consists of the test probe model number serial num ber and description This information is printed at the top of the first page along with the calibration range received condition excitation current used and test procedure number The paragraph text follows the test probe information The raw data section contains the readings taken by MET TEMP II that were used to calculate the coefficients and the resulting residuals Note The Method of Realization column prints only if the test was performed using MET TEMP II v4 0 or later The coefficients print immediately below the raw data section The Test Equipment section lists each of the instruments that was used to per form the calibration Each instrument s manufacturer model description serial number and recall date is indicated For instruments that do not require calibra tion NCR is printed in the Recall Date column The notes text follows the coefficients The recall date is the date the test probe or test equipment is due for recalibration Recall date is synonymous with recalibration date Note If the calibration interval was set to 0 the recall date is omitted from the Report of Calibration for that test probe The technician is the name of the person who performed the test To see an example of the default Report of Calibration see Figure 132 15 11 2 Default Table
271. ported and becomes the starting date the next time this dialog is displayed The ending date defaults to the current date Therefore the list of tests in the Select tests list should default to all tests since the last export was performed 208 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 209 To change the starting and or ending dates use the drop down calendars to se lect new dates The tests listed will update automatically Select the delimiter to use when exporting the data using the Export delimiter drop down list The software supports using either a Tab or Comma as the delimiter Note The software recognizes and uses the International Regional settings such as the date time and number formats as set in the Windows Control Panel s Regional Settings or International icon If a comma is being used as the decimal separator the Tab option must be selected as the export delimiter in order for the data to be properly imported into other software A warning mes sage is displayed when the Export button is clicked If you wish to export only data for test probes that were marked as check stan dards in MET TEMP II select the Export only Check Standard data from se lected tests check box Select the test to export by clicking on the appropriate row in the Select tests list To export the test data for the selected test s click the Export button A prompt is displayed for entering the path and filename for the export
272. pping CoefficientsField 2354 4 Save and close the file The next time coefficients are exported to the MET TRACK database any probe coefficients or heat source constants should be written to the referenced field Important MET TEMP II does not attempt to validate the field type or length Be sure to map the coefficients to a field of type SPVAL with enough characters to hold the type of coefficients or constants being writ ten to it or the export process may fail 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 181 15 15 1 15 2 15 2 1 Coefficients and Tables Application What is the Coefficients and Tables Application The Coefficients and Tables application formerly known as Generate if is an add on for MET TEMP II formerly Calibrate it MET TEMP II is designed to acquire and store data from reference probes and test probes UUTs This data is used by this software to calculate characterization coefficients print Reports of Calibration and generate tables This software calculates characterization coefficients for platinum thermistor and thermocouple probes The types of coefficients that can be calculated are ITS 90 for platinum probes IPTS 68 for platinum probes Callendar Van Dusen for platinum probes Polynomial for platinum and thermistor probes and coefficients for thermocouple probes types B E J K N R S T and AuPt This software also generates temperature vs resistance temperature vs ratio
273. ption opens the MET TEMP II help file with the Windows Search dialog open Select or enter a keyword to search for a topic or click Cancel to go to the help file Getting Started Selecting the Getting Started option opens the MET TEMP II Help file to the Getting Started topic Technical Support Selecting the Technical Support option displays the Technical Support help topic For technical support information please refer to Section 18 1 Technical Support 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 9 5 About MET TEMP Il Selecting the About option displays the About MET TEMP II dialog This dia log states the software version number copyright and other information x WE MET TEMP II Version 4 3 Build 141 Hart Scientific Automated Calibration Software Copyright 1996 2005 All rights reserved Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division Figure 64 About MET TEMP II Dialog 128 10 Configuration Files 129 10 10 1 Configuration Files MET TEMP II supports writing current configuration information to configura tion files to make the test instrument set point and test probe configuration process much easier Instrument set point and test probe configuration files can be saved independent of each other to provide maximum flexibility Each of the sections below describes the configuration files supported by MET TEMP II Instrument Configuration File An instrument configuration file contains information conc
274. r chooses to launch the Coefficients and Tables application to calculate characterization coefficients when prompted the calibration data will NOT be automatically exported to the MET TRACK database when the test is closed Select the Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK option from the Utilities menu after all coefficients are calculated to export the calibration data with the coefficients The next few options are used to indicate the setting for the Pass field in the calibration summary record when calibration data is exported to the MET TRACK database For temperature vs temperature data there are two options e Prompt for tolerance and determine Pass field setting automatically e Always set Pass field to If the first option is selected the first time a set of calibration data is exported the Tolerances dialog is displayed for each UUT The user is allowed to enter 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 54 the tolerance at each set point for that UUT The tolerance is then recorded in the MET TEMP II database and the Pass field setting is determined based on whether the calculated error at each set point falls within the entered tolerance If the error at each set point for a UUT is less than the entered tolerance at that set point for that UUT the Pass field for that UUT is set to Y If the error at any set point exceeds the tolerance the Pass field is set to N for that UUT If the Always set Pass field to option is s
275. r the folder where MET TEMP II was installed in order to operate properly Click the Fonts amp Sizes button to specify the names sizes and styles of the fonts to be used when printing the default Report of Calibration and the custom Reports of Calibration that ship with MET TEMP II Clicking the Fonts amp Sizes button displays the Defaults dialog with the Fonts amp Sizes tab selected The font settings can be changed to produce a more customized look to the Re port of Calibration or to keep the Report of Calibration from printing on more than a single page Note The Fonts amp Sizes options only apply to the default Report of Calibra tion and to the custom Reports of Calibration that are included with MET TEMP II The Browse button allows a custom report template file to be selected Custom report templates can be designed to meet your specific needs Contact Hart ap 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 58 3 7 3 8 plication specialists for more information on ordering a custom report for MET TEMP II Click the Print button to print the Report of Calibration for the selected probes if the Use default report template option is selected or to run the custom report template if the Use custom report template option is selected Click the Cancel button to close this dialog Recall Saved Report Selecting the Recall Saved Report option allows previously saved report files to be opened viewed and printed from the Print P
276. r to specify the file that contains the custom report template The 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 207 15 5 1 9 5 A Custom report template box and Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button to select the custom report template to use Note Custom report template files MUST be located in the REPORTS subfolder of the CAMETTEMP 2 folder or the folder where MET TEMP II was installed in order to operate properly Export Settings Tab The Export Settings tab allows the user to specify export options to use when generating tables Type and Range Other Settings Template Settings Export Settings Export Settings Print table to printer Export table to ASCII text file Export delimiter Tab y Export file __EEQP Figure 113 Export Settings Tab By default the application sends tables to the printer The Print table to printer option is selected However the software can export the table to a text file by selecting the Export table to ASCII text file option Select the delimiter to use when exporting the table using the Export delimiter drop down list Either a Tab or Comma are supported as the delimiter Enter the default path and filename for the export file in the Export file box or click the Browse button When the table is exported the user is prompted to specify the path and filename of the file and the table exported to that file The path and filename default to
277. ration test paragraph and notes the actual data used to calculate coefficients the characterization co efficients a list of the test equipment calibration date recall date ambient tem perature and humidity customer order ID technician name and a place for technician and approval signatures The actual data consists of the actual values reference readings UUT values test probe readings the calculated residuals and method of realization The fonts sizes and styles used on the default Report of Calibration can be changed on the Fonts amp Sizes tab of the Defaults dialog The top bottom left and right margins and the column widths for the Test Equipment table on the Report of Calibration can be set using the appropriate 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide controls on the Reports tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog A custom logo can also be added to the upper left corner of the Report of Calibration us ing the settings on this tab Reports of Calibration can be saved to a report file from the Print Preview win dow and opened viewed and printed by selecting the Recall Saved Report Ta ble option from the File menu or by running the Report Viewer utility See Section 17 Report Viewer Utility for more details The report number is printed on each page of the Report of Calibration The re port number is a unique number consisting of the test number and the scanner channel to which the test probe was connected These two
278. re details on using this feature refer to Section 1 6 Using MET TEMP II with MET TRACK Fixed Point Calibrations MET TEMP II now includes the capability of performing calibrations using fixed point cells MET TEMP II can perform calibrations using fixed point cells only or fixed point set points can be mixed in with comparison set points For more details on using this feature refer to Section 12 Performing Calibra tions Using Fixed Points 1 Introduction A Important MET TEMP II allows calibrations to be performed using fixed point cells only or by mixing fixed point set points with comparison set points as a convenience to the user It is assumed that if you are using these features you are familiar with the process and theory of performing calibrations using fixed point cells This User s Guide does not provide any detailed information as to how to perform fixed point calibrations and shall not be used as a substitute for proper training and source of infor mation on such topics For more information on performing calibrations using fixed point cells please refer to the currently available literature Hart periodically offers training seminars on using fixed point cells NIST is also a good source of information on this topic Heat Source Calibrations A new feature has been added to allow some of the heat sources that are sup ported by MET TEMP II to be calibrated This feature includes reading heat source calibration coe
279. re displayed If during the process of a test a set point is overridden by clicking the Take reading now check box on the Stability Override dialog the value in the Toler ance and Duration columns for that set point contain the word OVERRIDE and a footnote will appear on the Report of Calibration stating that the stability pa rameters were overridden for the indicated set point s Click the OK button to close this dialog Adjust Uncertainties Selecting the Adjust Uncertainties option displays the Adjust Uncertainties dia log for conveniently viewing and or changing the uncertainties associated with each set point Adjust Uncertainties Dialog The Adjust Uncertainties dialog displays a list of the currently configured set points and the associated uncertainties Adjust Uncertainties xi M Adjust Uncertainties Set point Uncertainty Cancel Figure 44 Adjust Uncertainties Dialog When this dialog is displayed the uncertainties can be viewed and changed To change the uncertainties click the Modify button The Modify button changes to a Save button The uncertainties can then be changed Select the cell for the 5 Calibration Menu 95 5 4 5 4 1 uncertainty to change and enter the new uncertainty value To set an uncertainty to N A clear the contents of the cell then use the arrow keys or click to move to another cell Click the Save button to s
280. reference probe last 10 readings check box is selected the last ten reference probe readings are averaged to produce the current point on the graph Averaging provides a smoother looking graph If not selected each point read from the reference probe is graphed Clicking the Reset Axes To Defaults button resets the X axis and Y axis values to their default values as defined on the Graph tab on the Defaults dialog Clicking the Save As Defaults button saves the current X axis and Y axis val ues as the default values Click the OK button to accept the new settings and close this dialog Clicking the Cancel button discards any changes and closes this dialog Print Graph Selecting the Print Graph option sends the current graph to the default printer The Setup Printer dialog is displayed for selecting printer settings Start Display Selecting the Start Display option begins displaying and graphing the reference probe reading The reference probe is displayed and graphed in degrees C or degrees F only The Start Display option is only enabled after the COM port reference readout reference module if applicable and reference probe are configured The Start Display option does not appear in the menu after the display has been started Stop Display Selecting the Stop Display option causes the reference to stop being displayed and graphed The Stop Display option does not appear in the menu until the display has been started Utiliti
281. review window For more information on the Print Preview window and report files see Section 16 Print Preview Window Close Test Selecting the Close Test option closes the current calibration test This option is enabled only after a test has completed or been aborted Exit Selecting the Exit option exits MET TEMP II If any changes were made to the configuration the user is prompted to save the current configuration The cur rent configuration is always saved upon exit to the file 9938LAST CFG 4 Configuration Menu Configuration Menu The Configuration menu provides options for installation of instrument drivers setting up test equipment and displaying current configuration information Install Drivers Ctrl I COM Port Reference Scanner Heat Sources Equipment Info Figure 25 Configuration Menu Install Drivers Selecting the Install Drivers option displays the Install Drivers dialog This dia log can also be displayed by clicking the Drivers button on the Reference Read out Configuration Reference Module Configuration Scanner Configuration Scanner Modules Configuration or Heat Source configuration dialogs Install Drivers 3 xj Install Drivers Select the type of drivers to install Reference Readouts O Reference Scanner Modules O Scanners O Heat Sources Available drivers Installed drivers 1529 Chub E 4 Thermometer 2 1560 Black Stack Base Unit 26354 Fl
282. rm fixed point only calibrations a single heat source must be configured Select the Heat Sources option in the Configu ration menu to display the Heat Source Configuration dialog Heat Source Configuration xi Heat Source Configuration X Enable communications during configuration Use heat sources as reference Calibrate heat source Ur Lhec ort How many heat sources will be used for this test One Two Three Four Fixed Points Model number Serial number SmartSwitch port a Manufacturer Description Calibration date Recalibration date MT Asset number A A Cancel Test Calibration Compatibility Figure 77 Heat Source Configuration Dialog Select the One option to indicate that a single heat source is to be used Select the Fixed Points pseudo driver using the Model number drop down list If the Fixed Points option does not appear in the Model number drop down list click the Drivers button to display the Install Drivers dialog and install the Fixed Points Pseudo driver Click the OK button to close the Install Drivers dialog When the Fixed Points driver is selected in the Model number box all other controls on this dialog are disabled 154 12 Performing Calibrations Using Fixed Points Note The Fixed Points Pseudo driver only needs to be configured if a calibra tion test does not include any comparison set points If a calibration test uses one or more comparison
283. robe last 10 readings Figure 16 Graph Tab The X Axis of the graph in MET TEMP Il is displayed as time Select the amount of time the X Axis should display The X Axis can be set to display from 1 to 480 minutes 8 hours The Y Axis is always displayed in degrees C or degrees F There are four op tions for setting the Y Axis values 3 File Menu 43 e Use reference probe range Sets the Y Axis minimum and maximum values to the minimum and maximum temperature values entered on the Reference Probe Configuration dialog e Fixed range Sets the Y Axis to the minimum and maximum values en tered by the user in the boxes provided e Show band around current reading Allows the user to enter a value of a band to show around the most recent reference probe reading e Auto scaling always keep min and max readings on the graph Maintains the minimum and maximum values of the visible plot on the graph during the time shown The Auto determine number of decimal places to show option determines whether MET TEMP II should automatically determine the resolution of the Y axis values If this check box is not checked the resolution of the values on the Y axis is fixed at 4 decimal places If the Use averaging when graphing reference probe last 10 readings check box is selected the last ten reference probe readings are averaged to produce the current point on the graph Averaging provides a smoother looking graph If not se
284. s Reference data must be in tem perature and UUT data must be in resistance or voltage Unable to calculate coefficients using acquired data Recalibrate test probe and acquire data in proper units Selected data does not meet requirements Refer to Section 15 12 Requirements and Methods for requirements Residuals are much larger than expected Data at one or more points is invalid Recalibrate test probe to acquire new data Select other points to use to calculate coefficients 251 Index Index BAK file 119 BMP file 45 CFG file 21 83 129 DLE files 10 15 RPT file 242 243 STC file 88 130 STF file 88 130 TPC file 100 132 VBX files 10 15 WAV file 33 WMF file 45 1620 5020A 2 15 17 22 34 83 105 109 9938LAST CFG file 58 105 129 A Abort 49 109 About 128 227 Add drivers 60 Adjust Uncertainties 94 ambient humidity 2 15 17 22 34 83 105 109 ambient temperature 2 15 17 22 34 83 105 109 As found 146 169 171 As left 146 161 169 171 ASCII text file 207 Asset number 6 Auto Generate Set points 87 89 Auto generate test numbers 41 Auto scale 43 117 Averaging 43 48 117 Band 43 Baud rate 6 26 247 Bi metallic 98 106 159 Bold 51 201 Build 128 227 C Calculating coefficients 184 190 Calculation scale 193 CALFILES folder 168 Calibrate it 193 208 216 228 Calibration 1 22 26 27 85 145 Calibration date 38
285. s RTD 392 4 wire y Manufacturer Current om y Description MT Asset number Probe Secondary Standard 5614 360984 12 04 2002 o3 04 2003 f i Calibration date Recalibration date Figure 84 Test Probes Configuration Dialog 164 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 165 13 2 6 When calibrating a heat source MET TEMP II actually uses the test probe as if it was the reference probe MET TEMP II only allows a single test probe to be configured If more than one test probe is configured MET TEMP II will not allow a heat source calibration test to start Select the model of the test probe reference probe to use to calibrate the heat source Fill in the serial number probe type report units manufacturer de scription and current CJC boxes Note that the report units are limited to C and F Next select the calibration and recalibration dates for the test probe reference probe When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this probe An inven tory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this probe before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations A current calibration record must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will automatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset num
286. s 0 050 COMP 99 9709 99 9985 0 0276 0 050 Pass 0 050 COMP 124 9844 125 0321 0 0477 0 050 Pass 0 050 COMP Test Equipment Manufacturer Model Description Serial Number Recall Date Hart Scientific Inc 1529 Chub E4 Thermometer 2 RTD 2 TC A23564 6 30 2002 Hart Scientific Inc 5614 Secondary Reference Temperature Std 1 4 360984 1 17 2003 x 12 Hart Scientific Inc 5901 TPW 123456 2 1 2003 Hart Scientific Inc 9105 Drywell Low Temperature A23765 NCR Notes This test was performed in accordance with the test procedure indicated above Calibration Date 6 3 2002 Technician Recall Date 6 3 2003 Cal E Breight Temperature 21C Humidity 25 Approved By Customer Order 54543 5448 This report shall not be reproduced except in full without written approval of Temp Tech Co Figure 70 Example of Custom Pass Fail Report of Calibration 142 11 Reports of Calibration 143 11 2 1 1 11 2 1 2 Tolerance Dialog The Tolerance dialog allows the tolerance value for each set point on the Pass Fail Report of Calibration to be entered xi l Tolerance Enter the tolerance to use for the indicated set point UUT Model 5614 UUT Serial 367543 Set point 25 00 Tolerance Enter the Tolerance value EXACTLY as it should c appear on the report Use this value for remaining set points on this report Cancel Figure 71 Tolerance Dialog The tolerance value must be entered exac
287. s reached Delete one or more set points Unable to insert fixed point set point Performing heat source calibration MET TEMP II does not allow fixed point set points to be used when performing heat source calibrations Unable to move reorder set points 248 Performing heat source calibration MET TEMP II does not allow the required As Found set points to be moved Multiple set points selected Select a single set point in the set point list 18 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Common Problems Problem Possible Cause Solution Unable to set Uncertainty param eter to N A Uncertainty box must be empty Clear the contents of the Uncertainty box then press lt TAB gt or lt ENTER gt Unable to assign set point to de sired heat source Heat source has not been added to configuration Make sure the heat source has been configured on the Heat Source Configuration dialog Heat source range does not in clude set point Check the temperature range for the heat source by clicking the Range button on the Heat Source Configuration dialog Test number is not unique Test number was used previously Enter a new test number on the Test Information dialog Use the Generate test number automatically option to generate unique test number Unable to locate MET TRACK asset number for an instrument See MET TRACK Link Problems section below Calibration Test Problems Con
288. s try connecting the instrument directly to the computer s COM port and use a terminal program to send commands to the instrument Refer to the instrument s User s Guide for communication commands and settings If the current instrument configuration has not been saved MET TEMP II prompts to save this configuration Clicking Yes displays the Windows Save As dialog Enter the filename and click the OK button If this configuration does not need to be saved Click No 5 Calibration Menu 105 A Note The current configuration is always saved at this point to a file named 9938LAST CFG Opening this configuration file will always restore the configuration settings most recently used to run a calibration test The Test Information dialog is then displayed Refer to Section 5 5 2 Test In formation Dialog for more information Once all of the information on the Test Information dialog has been entered and the test is running MET TEMP II prompts to make sure that all of the refer ence readout and scanner channels are configured to read the correct scales and to insert the reference probe and all test probes into the heat source for the first set point MET TEMP II then waits for the heat source to reach the set point and stabilize according to the tolerance and duration parameters for the current set point Be fore taking measurements from the reference and test probes MET TEMP II checks to ensure that the difference between t
289. s accidentally Click the OK button to close the Edit Test Information dialog Coefficients and Tables The Coefficients and Tables option is used to run the Coefficients and Tables application formerly Generate it for calculating coefficients and for generat ing Temperature vs Resistance Temperature vs Ratio or Temperature vs EMF tables on the test readings taken from a calibration test MT Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Selecting the Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK option displays the Ex port Calibration Data to MET TRACK dialog and allows test data to be ex ported to Fluke s MET TRACK software database This option is only enabled if the link to the MET TRACK database has been configured on the General tab of the Defaults dialog Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 126 The Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK dialog allows test data to be ex ported to the MET TRACK database Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Xx Esport Calibration Data to MET TRACK Test number CE200212131 Instruments calibrated Probe model Probe serial MT Asset p 5614 _ 123456 5614123456 123457 5614 123457 Figure 62 Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Dialog To export calibration data select the test containing the data to export using the Test number drop down list The Instruments calibrated list displays the model serial number and M
290. s on the graph Start Display Graph the reference probe Export Calibration Data to MET TRACK Export calibration data to the MET TRACK database Help Open the help file MET TEMP Il Introduction Dialog The MET TEMP II Introduction dialog is displayed when the software is exe cuted for the first time This dialog is also displayed on subsequent executions 1 Introduction 21 1 12 if the Show introduction dialog on startup check box is selected on the General tab of the Defaults dialog MET TEMP II Introduction x l Configuration Options Create new configuration Open existing configuration Cancel Do not display this dialog when program starts Figure 6 MET TEMP II Introduction Dialog The MET TEMP II Introduction dialog provides a starting place for the user to configure a test From this dialog an existing configuration file can be opened or a new configuration can be created To create a new configuration select the Create new configuration option and click the OK button This option should be selected when executing the soft ware for the first time The Equipment Info dialog is displayed and a new con figuration can be created Refer to Section 2 Configuring a Test for additional information on creating a new configuration To open a configuration file that was previously created and saved to a CFG file select the Open existing configuration option and click the OK button The
291. same data over and over If the serial number was not selected from the drop down list the Calibration date and Recalibration date must be entered These boxes are disabled if the se lected instrument does not require calibration If the recalibration date has passed and the Show recalibration date notification messages check box on the Setup tab of the Defaults dialog is selected the user is warned and must change the calibration and recalibration dates before the in strument can be used Select the SmartSwitch port to which the instrument is connected using the SmartSwitch port drop down list If the instrument is connected and powered up at this time make sure the Enable communications during configuration check box is selected and click the Check Port button MET TEMP II will at tempt to establish communications with the instrument If MET TEMP II is not able to communicate with the instrument an error message is displayed Other wise a message is displayed stating communication was established with the instrument When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this instrument An in ventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this instru ment before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations If the calibration and recalibration dates are required a current calibration re cord must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II wi
292. se drop down list e Increase or decrease the size of the font by selecting a setting from the Font Size drop down list e Change the font style options by checking or unchecking the Bold Italics and or Underline boxes e The current settings are displayed in the Example Text box at the bottom of this tab Click the Reset Defaults button to restore the default settings The default set tings are as follows 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide e Title font settings Times New Roman 14 point Bold e Body font settings Times New Roman 10 point Note Changing these settings does not change the font settings used on custom Reports of Calibration that are not included with MET TEMP II The changes are applied only to the default Report of Calibration which is built into MET TEMP Il and to the custom Reports of Calibration that ship with MET TEMP II 3 4 9 MET TRACK Tab The MET TRACK tab is used for selecting the default settings for linking to the MET TRACK database Use MET TRACK Snatch MET TRACK Defaults LINK ACTIVE Check if MET TRACK is installed on startup X Enable link to MET TRACK always login on startup IX Synchronize calibration and recalibration dates with MET TRACK X Synchronize instrument description with MET TRACK IX Synchronize technician name with MET TRACK user name Automatically export calibration data do not prompt when closing test When exporting temperature vs temperature calibration da
293. selected test probe check box tells the software to take one measurement from the selected test probe and display the reading in the box provided The time at which the measurement was taken appears below the box This check box is automatically unchecked after the measurement is taken to prevent this feature from slowing down the test process Selecting a different scanner mod ule multiplexer or test probe clears the reading box Note These controls are all disabled if a scanner is not being used for the current test A test may be paused at any time To pause a test select the Pause Test option in the Calibration menu The test should be paused anytime the computer needs to be used to perform another function while a calibration test is running Pausing the test does not impact the outcome of the test however to ensure the integrity of the test the test should not be paused for long periods of time To resume the test select the Resume Test option in the Calibration menu Note The Pause Test option is disabled while the test probe and reference probe readings are being taken to ensure that all measurements are taken consecutively without interruption The test may also be stopped aborted at any time by selecting the Stop Test option in the Calibration menu The user will be required to confirm stopping the test Once a test has finished successfully or has been stopped the reference probe readings continue to be graphed until the
294. source select the number of heat sources to be used The maximum number of heat sources is four The number of tabs displayed corresponds to the number of heat sources selected Select the tab for the first heat source Heat source model numbers must be selected from the Model number drop down list The manufacturer and description information is filled in auto matically when a model is selected The model number is also displayed on the tab If the selected model is a Hart 9112 or 9113 furnace the controller address box is displayed If the heat source is external which means MET TEMP II does not communi cate with the heat source select External from the Model number drop down list The External Heat Source Model dialog is displayed Enter the model num ber of the external heat source and click OK External Heat Source Model xi External Heat Source Model Enter the model number for this external heat source Model 6789 12 Figure 36 External Heat Source Model dialog 4 Configuration Menu 79 When using MET TEMP II to perform a calibration using only fixed point cells the Fixed Point heat source driver must be setup as a heat source No other heat source drivers need to be setup When mixing fixed points with com parison points the Fixed Point heat source driver may optionally be setup but is not required Next select the serial number from the Serial number drop down list or enter the serial
295. st process If this option is se lected MET TEMP II always looks ahead one set point to determine if that set point is assigned to a different heat source than the current set point If so the heat source is set to its first set point If an External heat source is being used the user is prompted to manually set the set point of the heat source This feature can save time in performing calibrations If only one heat source is be ing used selecting this option has no effect The Reference UUT reading resolution drop down list is used to specify the resolution that MET TEMP II should use to format all reference and test probe readings This setting applies to temperature resistance and voltage readings All reference and test probe readings taken by MET TEMP II for the current test will be formatted to the selected number of decimal places This setting should be set appropriately according to the configured resolution of the read ings for each instrument as well as the calibration test requirements An exam ple reading is displayed next to the drop down list If the Generate test number automatically check box is selected the test num ber is automatically generated by using the initials of the technician performing the test the four digits of the current year two digits of the current month and a three digit sequence number The test number box is disabled If the Generate test number automatically check box is not selected the test num
296. st starts and when the software terminates regardless of whether or not the user explicitly saves the configuration Important The format of the instrument configuration file has changed slightly in this version of MET TEMP II from previous versions formerly Calibrate it due to enhancements and newly supported instruments For this reason MET TEMP II may not be able to successfully read in instru ment configuration files from previous versions Therefore any instrument configuration file from a previous version of this software should be saved in this version using the same filename 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 10 2 Set point Configuration File A set point configuration file contains a set of set points that can be used for a test The default extension for a set point configuration file is either STC or STF Set point configuration files with a STC extension are for set points in C and STF files are for set points in F These files are usually saved in the CONFIG subfolder When calibrating a heat source a set point configuration file MUST be opened When MET TEMP II was installed the default heat source calibration set point configuration files were written to the CALFILES subfolder in the CONFIG subfolder Set point configuration files can be opened by clicking the Open button on the Set point Configuration dialog A Important Opening a set point configuration file completely replaces the current set point configura
297. start a test Start the test The current configuration is checked for missing informa tion and or conflicts and the Test Information dialog is displayed Fill in the remaining information for this test and click the OK button to begin Close the test When a test is complete it must be closed Select the Close Test option in the File menu to close the test Print the Report of Calibration To print a Report of Calibration for a heat source select the Print Report option in the File menu Select the Use custom report template option and choose the custom report for heat source calibration 3 File Menu 31 3 1 3 2 File Menu The File menu provides options for creating a new instrument configuration opening an existing instrument configuration saving a configuration file set ting up program defaults setting up the printer printing a test report closing a test and exiting the program New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Save As Ctrl S Defaults Ctrl D Setup Printer Ctrl R Print Report Ctrl P Recall Saved Report Close Test rl Exit Figure 9 File Menu The following sections describe each of these options New Selecting the New option discards the current configuration settings and dis plays the Equipment Info dialog for starting a new test equipment configuration The New option should be selected whenever a test equipment configuration that is different from the current confi
298. stem administrator for assistance in setting up Windows login accounts with full access to these folders 1 3 4 Firmware Requirements 1 4 The reference readouts scanners modules and heat sources supported by MET TEMP II all require firmware to operate MET TEMP II will not always operate properly with instruments that have old versions of firmware installed in them MET TEMP II always checks the version of firmware installed in each instrument prior to performing calibrations to ensure that the firmware installed in the instrument is sufficient for MET TEMP II to utilize the instrument prop erly If the firmware installed in an instrument needs to be updated a warning message is displayed indicating the currently installed firmware version and the minimum required firmware version If this message is displayed contact an Authorized Service Center as indicated in Section 18 1 Technical Support for information on updating the firmware in the instrument Installation A backup should always be made of your hard disk drive and registry before in stalling any software and all running applications should be closed 1 Introduction A Note To successfully install MET TEMP IT you must be logged into Win dows as an Administrator When installing MET TEMP II setup attempts to locate a previous version of this software Calibrate it on the computer MET TEMP II should be installed to a different folder than Calibrate it During the setu
299. stom report template files MUST be located in the REPORTS subfolder of the CAMETTEMP 2 folder or the folder where MET TEMP II was installed in order to operate properly 219 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 220 15 7 3 4 Tables Tab The Tables tab is for selecting default preferences pertaining to tables General Coefficients Reports Tables Table Template Use default table template Use custom table template Custom table template Po Figure 124 Tables Tab The options selected on this tab determine the default table template used when printing a table If the Use default table template option is selected the soft ware uses the table template that is built into the application This option is se lected by default This software also allows custom table templates to be used when printing ta bles If the default table template isn t exactly the type of table required for your application contact Hart application specialists for information on obtain ing custom table templates designed to your specifications If a custom table template has been purchased from Hart the Use custom table template option allows the user to specify the file that contains the custom table template The Custom table template box and Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button to select the custom table template to use Note Custom table template files MUST be located in the REPORTS subfolder of
300. struments from the MET TEMP II database select the item or items in the Instruments or Test probes list and click the Remove button A prompt is displayed to confirm removing the selected items Confirm removing the selected items by clicking Yes or click No to abort 8 Utilities Menu 121 8 4 8 4 1 Note Once an instrument or probe is removed that instrument or probe will no longer appear in the appropriate drop down list s To use that instrument or probe again the information for that instrument or probe must be entered man ually again To remove all instruments or probes listed click the Remove All button Click the OK button to close this dialog Maintain Test Results Selecting the Maintain Test Results option displays the Maintain Test Results dialog This option can be used to validate tests and remove unnecessary test data from the database Maintain Test Results Dialog The Maintain Test Results dialog can be used to validate tests and remove un necessary test data from the database Removing test data from the database is permanent and cannot be undone Maintain Test Results a xi l Maintain Test Results Select tests Test number Test date 19 n af Validate CE200205102 5 02 CE200205103 5 21 2002 CE200205104 5 21 2002 Validate All 5 23 2002 5 28 2002 5 28 2002 CE200205113 5 29 2002 Remove Remove All Figure 59 Maintain Test Results Dialog This dialog al
301. t 01 07 2004 gt 2560 4 Cancel Figure 31 Reference Module Configuration Dialog When the Module button is clicked on the Reference Readout Configuration di alog and the Enable communications during configuration check box is se lected MET TEMP II attempts to query the selected reference readout instrument when possible to determine what modules are attached If success ful MET TEMP II ensures that the proper drivers are installed for the modules or multiplexer Select the reference module model number using the Model number drop down list If the model number needed does not appear in the list click the Drivers button to install the driver for the module or multiplexer The manufacturer and description information is filled in automatically when a model is selected Note If the reference readout is a model 1560 and there is more than one mod ule with the same model number as the module to which the reference probe is connected MET TEMP II always assumes that the first module closest to the base unit with that model number is being used as the reference module Next select the serial number from the Serial number drop down list or enter the serial number in the Serial number box if it has not been entered previously MET TEMP II records serial numbers calibration dates and recalibration dates to avoid having the user reenter the same data over and over 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide If the serial nu
302. t UUT s data is written followed immediately by the second UUT s readings etc Each of the sections is separated by a blank line If multiple tests are being ex ported to the same export file each test s data is separated by two blank lines If no fields have been defined to export to a section of the export file that sec tion is simply skipped An example of an export data file is shown below CE200206126 Ca1 E Breight 6 3 2002 11 01 51 AM 6 3 2002 1 07 35 PM 2 05 31 HSTOOO 0 1529 A23564 Hart scientific 5614 360984 Hart Scientific 5901 123456 Hart Scientific 9105 A23765 Hart Scientific Inc Chub E4 Thermometer 2 RTD 2 TC 5 1 2002 6 30 2002 Inc Secondary Reference Temperature Std 1 4 x 12 1 17 2002 1 17 2003 Inc TPW 2 1 2002 2 1 2003 Inc Drywell Low Temperature CE200206126 001 5614 367543 Probe secondary Standard 365 C SAMPLE 732 25 00 C 24 9713 C 25 0231 C C C 0 0518 C 0 050 C N A COMP CE200206126 001 5614 367543 Probe Secondary Standard 365 C SAMPLE 732 0 01 C 0 0100 C 0 0102 c C C 0 0002 C 0 010 C N A TP CE200206126 001 5614 367543 Probe Secondary standard 365 C SAMPLE 732 50 00 C 49 9907 C 50 0212 C C C 0 0305 C 0 050 C N A COMP CE200206126 001 5614 367543 Probe secondary Standard 365 C SAMPLE 732 100 00 C 99 9709 C 99 9985 C C C 0 0276 C 0 050 C N A COMP CE200206126 002 5614 365232 Probe secondary standard 365 ohms 5614 365232 25 00 C 2
303. t can be used by more than one heat source The Prompt for heat source conflicts check box allows the user to select the heat source to which a given set point is assigned in the case that the ranges of two or more heat sources overlap This check box defaults to the state of the same check box on the Set points tab of the Defaults dialog The Starting and Interval tab allows set points to be generated based on a start ing set point an interval between set points and the number of set points En ter the starting set point in the Starting set point box Enter the interval between set points in the Interval between set points box Enter the total num ber of set points to auto generate in the Number of set points box The Starting and Ending tab allows set points to be generated based on a start ing set point an ending set point and the number of set points Enter the start ing set point in the Starting set point box Enter the ending set points in the Ending set point box Enter the total number of set points to auto generate in the Number of set points box Clicking the OK button auto generates the set points If the Prompt for heat source conflicts check box is selected each set point is compared to the heat source ranges as it is generated If the set point could be assigned to more than one heat source the Set point Options dialog is displayed and a heat source 5 Calibration Menu 91 5 1 1 2 5 1 1 3 must be chosen Re
304. t list The window tolerance duration and uncertainty parameters are automatically set to their default settings as defined on the Set points tab of the Defaults dialog To abort inserting a new set point press lt Esc gt If the new set point falls outside the defined temperature range of the config ured heat sources a message appears and the set point is not inserted into the list If two or more heat sources can be used for the new set point the set point is inserted into the list and the user must select the heat source for the set point to use If only one heat source can be used the heat source is automatically se lected and appears in the set point list with the set point If the window tolerance duration uncertainty or heat source settings need to be changed follow the instructions in Section 5 1 1 5 Editing Set points Inserting Fixed Point Set points MET TEMP II was originally designed to do comparison calibrations only but support has been added for fixed points also To insert a fixed point set point to the set point list manually first select the set point in the set point list that the new fixed point set point should come be fore To add a fixed point set point to the top of the set point list select the first set point in the list To add a fixed point set point to the end of the list select the lt new set point gt item in the list 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Fixed point set points can be manuall
305. ta Prompt for tolerance and determine Pass field setting automatically Always set Pass fieldto El When exporting other calibration data set Pass field to y y Write the following comment to all Calibration Summary records C2329 This calibration performed by MET TEMP II Figure 22 MET TRACK Tab The upper right corner of this tab indicates the current link status If the link to the MET TRACK database is currently active the status indicates LINK AC TIVE If the link is not active the status indicates LINK INACTIVE If the Check if MET TRACK is installed on startup check box is checked ev ery time MET TEMP II is launched it checks to see if MET TRACK is in stalled on the local computer If so it makes sure that the version of MET TRACK is sufficient for MET TEMP II to establish the link If an older version of MET TRACK is detected prior to version 7 0 a message is dis played on startup indicating MET TRACK must be updated to a later version before the link can be established This check box should only be checked to 52 3 File Menu 53 allow MET TEMP II to locate a newly installed version of MET TRACK Once MET TEMP II has determined that MET TRACK is or is not installed this check box should be unchecked If the Enable link to MET TRACK always login on startup check box is checked MET TEMP II will attempt to login to the MET TRACK database ev ery time MET TEMP II is launched If not checke
306. tatus box in the upper left corner displays the elapsed time current test status and a progress bar indicating the percentage of the test set points completed The Set point box in the upper right corner displays the current set point win dow tolerance duration and the model of the heat source being used The bottom portion of the window displays a list of the scanner modules or multiplexers if applicable and a list of test probes on the left side The right side displays the name of the technician performing the test the test date test number current date and time and ambient conditions When using a Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer to monitor the ambient temperature and humidity the ambient conditions information indi cates the most recently measured values New measurements are taken roughly every 2 minutes during the testing period by default Otherwise the ambient conditions information indicates the ambient temperature and humidity values entered on the Test Information dialog before the test was started 22 1 Introduction MET TEMP II Test Display 23 A Note To configure MET TEMP II to monitor ambient conditions through out the testing period using a DewK refer to the settings on the General tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog The current reading of the selected test probe can be displayed by selecting the Display reading of selected test probe check box Checking the Display reading of
307. tering a new probe When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this probe An inven tory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this probe before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations A current calibration record must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will automatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the description and calibration and recalibration dates may be synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset cannot be found in the MET TRACK database a message is displayed Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II 4 Configuration Menu 71 4 4 4 4 1 A Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial number and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to
308. the CAMETTEMP 2 folder or the folder where MET TEMP IT was installed in order to operate properly 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 221 15 7 3 5 15 7 4 15 7 5 15 7 6 Directories Tab The Directories tab is for setting default directory locations General Coefficients Tables Directories Directories Select the location of the Calibrate it database Database directory C HART9932 DATABASES Select the default path and filename for exporting test data Browse Export path and filename C HART9932 EXPORTSEXPORT TXT Figure 125 Directories Tab The Export path and filename specifies the path and filename to use when ex porting test data to a text file By default this path and filename are set to the EXPORT directory and to EXPORT TXT respectively To change the default export path or filename enter the new path and filename in the Export path and filename box or use the Browse button Setup Printer Selecting the Setup Printer option displays the Print Setup dialog that allows the user to select the default printer to which Reports of Calibration and tables should be printed If you are using the default report template the Orientation must be set to Portrait The Paper Size should be set to Letter 8 1 2 x 11 in Print Reports and Tables Selecting the Print Reports and Tables option displays the Print Reports and Ta bles dialog Refer to Section 15 5 1 7 Print Reports
309. the Calculate Coefficients dialog and return to the Main Display 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 5 1 5 Select Set points Dialog The Select Set points dialog is displayed when the Continue button is clicked on the Calculate Coefficients dialog Select ITS 90 Set points for 5614 358254 xi Select Set points Select At Least 5 Set points One set point at or near 0 0 C TP Between 2 and 10 set points Range 4 189 3442 C to 0 0100 C Between 2 and 10 setpoints Range 8 0 0000 C to 419 5270 C Set point Reference Reading Test Probe Reading Select All MIS a fre EEN Cancel Select up to 1 more set point s Figure 100 Select Set points Dialog The Select Set points dialog displays all of the test data that was acquired by MET TEMP II for the test probe model and serial number indicated in the title bar Select the set points to use to calculate the selected type of characterization coefficients for this test probe Instructions pertaining to the requirements are displayed at the top of this dialog For more information on these requirements see the following sections e Section 15 12 1 ITS 90 Requirements e Section 15 12 2 IPTS 68 Requirements e Section 15 12 3 Callendar Van Dusen Requirements e Section 15 12 4 Polynomial Requirements e Section 15 12 5 Thermocouple Requirements Information about the number of set points that can be selected also appears at the bottom of the dialog T
310. the ambient temperature temperature scale and humidity in the boxes provided This information is printed on the Report of Calibration Clicking the OK button checks to make sure the test number is unique and then begins the test process Note If the test number is not unique a test already exists with that test number the user is prompted to overwrite the existing test or to enter a new test number Selecting to overwrite the existing test must be confirmed because overwriting a test is permanent all data from the existing test is deleted Clicking the Cancel button returns to the MET TEMP II Main Display without starting a test O Stop Test The Stop Test option aborts the current calibration test This option does not appear in the menu unless a test is currently running When aborting a test a prompt is displayed to confirm aborting the test Once a test has been aborted it cannot be resumed Select the Pause Test option to pause a test temporarily MET TEMP II continues to take readings from and graph the reference after a test has been aborted until the Close Test option in the File menu is selected Oo Pause Test The Pause Test option suspends the test process This option does not appear in the menu while a test is paused This feature can be used to temporarily pause the test for any reason Important A calibration test should not be paused for long periods of time such as overnight Note A calibration test ca
311. the method of realization for this fixed point cell using the Method of re alization drop down list Many fixed point cells can be used at either the melt ing point MP freezing point FP or triple point TP This setting is printed on the Report of Calibration 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 40 Enter the manufacturer and description information for this fixed point cell in the boxes provided The Calibration and Recalibration dates are optional and can be selected using the drop down calendars provided If the Calibration and Recalibration dates are not entered NCR appears on the Report of Calibration in the Recall Date column Click the Reset button to clear dates from these boxes When the MET TRACK link is active the MT Asset number box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this fixed point cell An inventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this fixed point cell before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations If the calibration and recalibration dates are required a current calibration record must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will automatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the manufactur
312. the values entered in the Export file box 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 6 Exporting Data and Coefficients The software has a feature that allows the test data acquired by MET TEMP II to be exported to a text file Also the characterization coefficients can be ex ported to a text file The following sections describe in detail how to export data 15 6 1 Export Data The software has a feature that allows the test data acquired by MET TEMP II to be exported to a text file This can be useful if you have analysis software that you want to use to analyze graph or manipulate the acquired test data To export test data select the Export Data option in the File menu or click the Export Data button on the toolbar The Export Data dialog is displayed Export Data xi Export Settings _ceriowe Configure Starting date Ending date 05 01 2002 05 31 2002 Export delimiter Comma M Export only Check Standard data from selected tests Select tests Test Number Test Date CE200205120 5 30 2002 a CE 9 E Select Probes 5 29 2002 5 29 2002 CE200205112 2002 CE 200205111 5 28 2002 Figure 114 Export Data Dialog The Export Data dialog allows the user to specify a date range using the Start ing date and Ending date drop down calendars These dates are used to filter the list of tests displayed in the Select tests list The last used ending date is re membered every time data is ex
313. thin the Scanner instrument for this test probe Generally the CJC option should be set to N A when the report units for a given test probe are in temperature and Enabled when the report units are in voltage Hart instruments automatically account for CJC when configured to display measurements in temperature but do not account for CJC when config ured to display measurements in voltage Note For the Hart Model 1560 Black Stack and Model 1529 Chub E4 CJC readings are ALWAYS taken in degrees C See the instru ment s User s Guide for more information about the CJC settings When calibrating a heat source the Calibration date and Recalibration date boxes are displayed Enter the calibration and recalibration dates for this probe Clicking the Customer button displays the Customer Information dialog for en tering more information about the selected test probe Refer to Section 5 4 1 1 Customer Information Dialog for more information Continue configuring the other channels or test probes one by one in this same manner 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide A Note If the user attempts to select a new channel in the Channels or Probes list before completing the configuration for the current channel or probe the Incomplete Setup Test Probe Information dialog is displayed Check the list to determine what information still needs to be filled in Then click the OK button and proceed to complete the test probe configu rat
314. ting a micro bath you also need to be aware of the temperature range of the calibration and the fluid being used in the mi cro bath Be sure to use a fluid that covers the entire range of the calibra tion or limit the calibration to the range of the fluid being used If you changed any of the set point configuration settings and you wish to use the current settings again click the Save As button to save the current set point configuration to a new configuration file Click the OK button to close the Set point Configuration dialog 13 2 8 Start Heat Source Calibration Once the COM port scanner heat source test probe and set point configura tions are complete the heat source calibration test can be started The Equip ment Info dialog displays the current instrument configuration Equipment Info xi Equipment Info Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Reference Scanner Cal Heat Source Model 1560 Heat Source 1 _saweas S N 423543 MT Asset 1560 4 Port A Module 1 Model 2560 Step 5 Step 6 Close COM Port com Figure 87 Equipment Info Dialog Click the Start Test button on the Equipment Info dialog or select the Start Test option from the Calibration menu to start the heat source calibration test After checking the configuration information and verifying communications with the test equipment the Test Information dialog is displayed 170 13 Performing Heat Source Calibrations 171
315. tinuously recalculating heat source set point Reference and or heat source not capable of meeting Window parameter Increase the Window parameter to allow for larger error between set point value and reference reading Tolerance and Duration parame ters set too tight for heat source being used MET TEMP II thinks heat source has stabilized at set point based on Tolerance and Duration settings for current set point Decrease Tol erance and or increase Duration to allow changes in heat source temperature to be recognized by MET TEMP II Taking readings before heat source reaches or stabilizes at set point Tolerance and Duration parame ters set too loose for heat source being used MET TEMP II thinks heat source has stabilized at set point based on Tolerance and Duration settings for current set point Decrease Tol erance and or increase Duration to allow changes in heat source temperature to be recognized by MET TEMP II Heat source never stabilizes test does not continue Tolerance and Duration parame ters set too tight for heat source being used Increase Duration and or decrease Tolerance parameters for current set point Incorrect scale message appears Reference readout and or scan ner channels not properly configured Configure all reference readout and scanner channels to read the proper scales MET TEMP II is not always able to completely config ure reference readout and scanner channels automatical
316. tion Set point configuration files contain the set point values window tolerance duration uncertainty fixed point cell and proportional band information as ap plicable for each set point Information regarding the heat source assignment is not saved in this file If the configuration file being opened is not of the same temperature scale as the heat sources a message is displayed Click Yes to con vert the heat sources to the same scale as the set points or click No to abort opening the set point configuration file When a set point configuration file is opened MET TEMP II automatically at tempts to assign each set point to a heat source if the Prompt for heat source conflicts check box on the Set points tab of the Defaults dialog is selected If a set point does not fall within the temperature range of any of the configured heat sources a message is displayed and the set point is excluded from the test If the Prompt for heat source conflicts check box is not selected set points are not automatically assigned to heat sources Each set point must be assigned to a heat source manually using the Set point Configuration dialog A Important A test cannot begin until all set points have been assigned to a heat source If more than one heat source can be used for that set point the Set point Op tions dialog is displayed The user is asked to choose the heat source to use and or the proportional band setting Refer to Section 10 2 1 Set p
317. tion template is used The Custom report template box and Browse button are disabled This software also allows custom report templates to be used when printing re ports If the default report template isn t exactly the type of report required for your application contact Hart application specialists for information on obtain ing custom report templates designed to your specifications If a custom report template has been purchased from Hart the Use custom report template option allows the user to specify the file that contains the custom report template The Custom report template box and Browse button are enabled Click the Browse button to select the custom report template to use A Note Custom report template files MUST be located in the REPORTS subfolder of the CAMETTEMP 2 folder or the folder where MET TEMP II was installed in order to operate properly 200 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 15 5 1 8 3 Fonts amp Sizes Tab The Fonts amp Sizes tab is used for selecting the default font names sizes and styles to be used when printing the default Report of Calibration Template Settings Fonts amp Sizes Fonts amp Sizes Default Report of Calibration Title Select the font to use Font size Style options X Bold Italics Underline Default Report of Calibration Body Select the font to use Font size Style options Bold Italics Underline Example Text
318. tly as it should be printed on the Pass Fail Report of Calibration The allowable range for the tolerance value is 0 0 to 1000 0 If all remaining set points on the current report require the same tolerance value check the Use this value for remaining set points on this report checkbox Otherwise this dialog is displayed once for each set point on the report Click the OK button to save the tolerance value Once the tolerance value is ac cepted it is permanently associated with that set point If a value is entered in correctly refer to Section 11 2 1 2 Changing Tolerance Values for information on changing the tolerance values Click the Cancel button to close the dialog without changing the current toler ance value Changing Tolerance Values On the Pass Fail Report of Calibration included with MET TEMP II the toler ance values that appear on the report are manually entered by the user the first time the report is printed Once entered these tolerance values are saved and permanently associated with the respective set points In case a tolerance value is entered incorrectly MET TEMP II provides two methods to fix the value 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 144 The first method forces the Tolerance dialog to be displayed every time a report is printed and allows the tolerance values to be changed This procedure re quires some basic computer knowledge If you are unfamiliar with Windows INI files you may want to find s
319. to enter UUT data check box determines whether the computer continually beeps or plays a WAV file when the dialog for entering UUT readings is displayed This dialog is only displayed when the scanner instrument is not being used i e for calibrating LIG or bi metallic thermometers If this check box is selected the following options are available e Use default system beep If this option is selected the computer contin ually beeps using the system speaker when the dialog for entering UUT readings is displayed e Play WAV file If this option is selected the computer plays the selected WAV file when the dialog for entering UUT readings is displayed Select the WAV file to be played by clicking the Browse button To test the WAV file click the Play button 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 34 Note The computer must have a sound card or other sound driver installed to play a WAV file If no drivers are installed the selected WAV file cannot and will not be played The Enable print preview window check box forces the reports to be displayed in a preview window on screen when printing If this check box is not selected reports are printed directly to the printer when the print button is clicked The Maximize print preview window check box determines whether the Print Preview window is maximized when displayed If this check box is selected the Print Preview window is maximized when it is displayed The Print prev
320. to the heat source prior to taking readings at the configured As Left set points when performing a heat source calibration If selected MET TEMP II writes and verifies the new coefficients prior to taking As Left data The Set point Override Options settings indicate what MET TEMP II should do if the heat source is unable to achieve the Tolerance setting at a particular set point The user may select between the following options e Continue trying until specification is met e Abort test after time specified below e Prompt user to override settings after time specified below e Override settings and continue test after time specified below The Continue trying until specification is met option is the default When this option is selected MET TEMP II continually monitors the reference probe readings until the tolerance specification is met regardless of how long it takes MET TEMP II does not take readings from the reference probe and UUTs until this specification is met Prior to version 3 1 of Calibrate it the software be haved this way This option may be recommended when test requirements are very strict The Abort test after time specified below option allows the user to automati cally abort a test if the tolerance specification is not met within a specific time frame This time frame can be specified using the How much time should the 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide heat source be given box The software begins to count down this
321. trols are hidden and a new calibration test can be configured 5 5 1 Enter Data Dialog The Enter Data dialog allows the readings for non interfaced test probes such as Liquid in Glass or bi metallic probes to be manually entered Enter Data E xi Enter Data Enter the current reading for test probe UUT model 5614 serial number 367543 25 0231 E Figure 51 Enter Data Dialog The test probe model and serial number are indicated Enter the current reading for the test probe in the indicated scale For thermocouple probes when prompted to enter the CJC reading readings may be entered in any scale C F K mV etc but all CJC readings should be entered in the same scale If calcu lating characterization coefficients for a test probe using this data all CJC read ings must be entered in the same scale Click the OK button to accept the entered reading and continue 106 5 Calibration Menu 107 5 5 2 A Note This dialog will appear for each test probe the number of times in dicated on the Test tab of the Defaults dialog When manually entering data you may wish to set this value to 1 reading Test Information Dialog The Test Information dialog displays some general settings that apply to all test probes for this test Most of the settings on this dialog are remembered from the settings that were used for the previous test Test Information i x Test Information Full
322. u bar allows access to the various features of the software A general description of the options in each menu is given below File Open and Save configuration files change default settings printing op tions exit the software Configuration Configure COM port reference scanner and heat sources Calibration Configure set points and test probes view current set points ad just uncertainties start stop pause and resume a test and override current set point s parameters Scale Change temperature scale Graph Change graph settings print graph and graph reference probe Utilities Compact and repair databases maintain databases calculate coeffi cients and tables and export test data to MET TRACK software Help Display help topics and About dialog The MET TEMP II Main Display is the main window for the software Once a reference readout and reference probe have been configured the reference 1 Introduction 19 1 10 probe readings can be displayed and plotted on the graph by selecting the Start Display option from the Graph menu Toolbar The toolbar provides quick access to many of the most common functions such as instrument configuration installing drivers opening and saving configura tion files and starting stopping a test The function of each toolbar button can be found by placing the mouse pointer over the button and waiting for approximately 1 2 second A help balloon ap pears indic
323. uke 26354 Hydra Data 1502 Tweener Thermomete a 15024 Tweener Thermomet 1503 Tweener Thermomete 1504 Tweener Thermomete 1521 LLK Handheld Thermom 1522 LLL Handheld Datalogg 1529 Chub E 4 Thermomete 1529 Chub E4 Thermome 1529 71 Chub E4 Thermome Add All gt gt en 1560 Black Stack Base Uni 1575 Super Thermometer lt lt Remove All Figure 26 Install Drivers Dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide The Install Drivers dialog allows the communications drivers to be installed for the reference readout reference module scanner scanner modules and heat sources Installing a driver for an instrument allows the software to display that instru ment as a choice in the Model number drop down list on the Reference Read out Reference Module Scanner Scanner Modules and Heat Source Configuration dialogs By the same token uninstalling a driver removes that in strument from the Model number drop down list To keep the Model number drop down list short only install drivers for the instruments that are to be used The Available drivers list shows all drivers available for the type of driver se lected The Installed drivers list shows all drivers currently installed 4 1 1 Adding Drivers To install add drivers follow the instructions below 1 Select the type of drivers to install 2 To install all drivers click the Add All gt button or To install selected drivers select the
324. umber box is displayed This box indicates the asset number that is assigned to this fixed point cell An inventory record must exist in the MET TRACK database for this fixed point cell before MET TEMP II can use it to perform calibrations If the calibration and recalibration dates are required a current calibration record must also exist in the MET TRACK database MET TEMP II will automatically attempt to locate the records in the MET TRACK database when the model serial number and manufacturer information have been entered If the asset number is found MET TEMP II displays the asset number in the MT Asset number box Depending on the settings on the MET TRACK tab of the Defaults dialog the manufacturer description and calibration and recalibration dates may be synchronized with the information in the MET TRACK database If the asset cannot be found in the MET TRACK database a message is dis played Click Yes to launch MET TRACK to create or modify asset records or click No to edit the information in MET TEMP II Important When MET TEMP II attempts to locate an asset in the MET TRACK database the model serial namber and manufacturer infor mation must be an EXACT case insensitive match If the manufacturer information in MET TEMP II does not match the manufacturer informa tion in MET TRACK you may need to modify the manufacturer informa tion in the MET TRACK inventory record in order for MET TEMP II to locate it Where applicable you
325. umn is less than or equal to the value in the Tolerance column Otherwise the word Fail is displayed in this column An example of a custom report calibration can be seen in Figure 70 on page 142 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide Report of Calibration Report No CE200206126 001 Temp Tech Co Page of 1 105 Celcius Drive Out Town USA 34567 8998 Model 5614 Customer Our Customer Serial 367543 One Customer Way Description Probe Secondary Standard Technology Drive Any Town USA 23456 Calibration Range Full Received Condition New Current 1 0 mA Procedure HST000 0 The above referenced instrument was calibrated by direct measurement of generated temperatures using the reference standards listed in the Test Equipment table at the bottom of this report The internal calibration coefficients and the data abtained are shown on page 2 A Test Uncertainty Ratio TUR of at least 4 1 was maintained unless otherwise indicated This calibration is traceable to NIST or natural physical constants and is in compliance with ANSI NCSL Z540 1 and MIL STD 45662A Actual Value UUT Reference Test Sensor Error Tolerance Result Uncertainty Method of C C C C Pass Fail C Realization 24 9713 25 0231 0 0518 0 050 Fail 0 050 COMP 0 0100 0 0102 0 0002 0 050 Pass 0 010 TP 25 0119 25 0231 0 0112 0 050 Pass 0 050 COMP 49 9907 50 0212 0 0305 0 050 Pass 0 050 COMP 75 0049 75 0021 0 0028 0 050 Pas
326. up the pro portional band settings at this time In this case the OK button must be clicked to accept the settings and continue The Enable proportional band check box is visible only when the indicated set point is assigned to a bath If this check box is selected a proportional band value is expected to be entered The proportional band value is sent to the bath during the test process when the bath is set to the indicated set point Click the OK button to accept the current settings and close this dialog Click ing the Cancel button leaves the indicated set point unassigned Test Probe Configuration File A test probe configuration file contains information concerning the set of test probes to be calibrated including scanner channel information probe model numbers serial numbers and customer information The default extension for a 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 132 test probe configuration file is TPC These files are usually saved in the CONFIG subfolder Test probe configuration files can be opened by clicking the Open button on the Test Probe Configuration dialog Important Opening a test probe configuration file completely replaces the current test probe configuration Test probe configuration files are partially dependent on the scanner instrument configuration Because some scanner information is saved in the test probe con figuration file for compatibility reasons attempting to open a test probe config urati
327. ure and the heat source s current calibration coefficients Note Because not all heat sources supported by MET TEMP II have a com mand to read set point resistance values not all heat sources can be calibrated by MET TEMP II By the same token even heat source models that can be cal ibrated by MET TEMP II may require a firmware upgrade to support the set point resistance command Configuring MET TEMP II to Perform Heat Source Calibrations The following sections describe in detail the steps that must be followed to con figure MET TEMP II to perform a heat source calibration Because MET TEMP II was originally intended to calibrate probes not all of the config uration steps are obvious or intuitive Please read the following sections care fully and be sure you understand this process before attempting to calibrate a heat source 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 13 2 1 13 2 1 1 160 Figure 80 shows one possible instrument configuration for performing a heat source calibration When configuring a heat source calibration you may use the Equipment Info dialog to gain quick access to the various configuration dialogs or you may select the appropriate options from the Configuration and Calibration menus Before beginning select the New option from the File menu to clear any current configuration information To Serial Port Computer lr a Scanner
328. used to validate and or remove information from the database 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 9 3 1 Maintain Test Results Dialog The Maintain Test Results dialog can be used to determine the validity of test probe data and to remove data from the database Maintain Test Results xi Maintain Test Results Select probes Report Number MPLE01 001 Model CE200001005 002 5626 m CE200206126 002 5614 7 CE200001005 001 5626 5614 Serial 0040 0033 365232 35825 Validate Al Validate Al Remove All Figure 128 Maintain Test Results Dialog Note This feature does NOT determine the validity of coefficients calcu lated by the software It determines only if a test probe is valid based on the presence or absence of information for the test in the database To validate or remove test probes from the database select the test probes from the Select probes list and click the Validate or Remove button To validate or remove all test probes click the Validate All or Remove All button respectively Test probe validation is explained in the following section Important Use caution when removing test probes Once a test probe has been removed the software will not be able to print Reports of Calibration or tables for that test probe All coefficient data is deleted permanently For this reason the user must confirm removing records from the data base 15 9 3 2 Test
329. values of these parameters are automatically used when new set points are generated or inserted When all set points have been configured click the OK button A check is per formed to ensure all comparison set points have been assigned to a heat source before closing the dialog If any information is missing a prompt is displayed and the dialog is not closed Clicking the Cancel button discards any changes made and closes this dialog Auto Generating Comparison Set points Comparison set points can be generated automatically by clicking the Auto Generate Set points button All set points generated using this process are considered comparison set points Clicking the Auto Generate Set points but ton displays the Auto Generate Set points dialog 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 90 Note When calibrating a heat source the auto generate feature cannot be used The Auto Generate Set points button is disabled 4uto Generate Set points x l Auto Generate Set points Starting and Interval Starting set point Ending set point Number of set points X Prompt for heat source conflicts Cancel Figure 42 Auto Generate Set points Dialog The Auto Generate Set points dialog provides two methods for automatically generating set points The two methods are 1 Starting and Interval or 2 Start ing and Ending The user may also select whether to be prompted for heat source conflicts in the case that a set poin
330. ve indicated no significant loss in accuracy when using the Steinhart Hart method eliminating the squared term over the range of 2C to 70C 28F to 158F The formula used when the Steinhart Hart method is selected is gt a bin R din R For more information on this topic refer to Worldwide Capability in Thermistors Thermometrics Inc 1993 pages 14 15 5 For normal calculations at least 4 set points must be used but no more than 10 set points can be used 6 For Steinhart Hart calculations only 3 set points should be used The minimum number of set points used must exceed the order of the polynomial by at least 1 i e for a 5th order polynomial at least 6 set points must be used 8 The residuals are calculated for each set point used in calculating the co efficients Residuals are always in the same scale as the reference probe readings For platinum probes the residuals are in degrees For thermis tor probes residuals are in millidegree 15 12 5 Thermocouple Requirements The following requirements must be met when calculating coefficients for Thermocouple probes For more information concerning the method used to calculate the Thermocouple coefficients refer to Section 15 12 6 Methods Used for Calculating Coefficients 1 The reference probe readings must be in temperature C F or K Note The algorithm used to calculate thermocouple coefficients forces the EMF at OC to 0 0uV Therefore using a
331. w and print a Report of Calibration from a report file To distribute this utility a setup diskette needs to be created To create a setup diskette follow the instruc tions below 1 Insert the MET TEMP II CD ROM into your CD ROM drive 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 244 2 Using Windows Explorer locate the 9938 VIEWER folder 3 Copy all of the files from this folder to a blank floppy diskette Label the diskette Hart Report Viewer Utility Setup Diskette 1 of 1 4 From the floppy diskette run the SETUP EXE program to install the utility Optionally you may create a ZIP file which includes all of the files from the 9938 VIEWER folder to facilitate attaching the utility to an e mail Note MET TEMP II may NOT be freely distributed 18 Troubleshooting Hart Authorized Service Centers 245 18 18 1 Troubleshooting The following sections describe in detail some troubleshooting topics possible causes and solutions Hart Authorized Service Centers Please contact one of the following authorized Service Centers to coordinate service on your Hart product Fluke Corporation Hart Scientific Division 799 E Utah Valley Drive American Fork UT 84003 9775 USA Phone 1 801 763 1600 Telefax 1 801 763 1010 E mail support hartscientific com Fluke Nederland B V Customer Support Services Science Park Eindhoven 5108 5692 EC Son NETHERLANDS Phone 31 402 675300 Telefax 31 402 675321 E mail S
332. w The zoom setting is limited to 40 to 190 The zoom setting can also be changed from the Print Preview window once it is displayed 9938 MET TEMP Il User s Guide 15 7 3 2 Coefficients Tab The Coefficients tab is for selecting default preferences pertaining to the calcu lation of coefficients Gered Cascient l Coefficient Default Settings X Preview coefficients and residuals before writing to database X Prompt before overwriting existing coefficients in database Figure 122 Coefficients Tab The Preview coefficients and residuals before writing to database check box de termines whether the user is prompted before the coefficients are written to the database If this check box is selected the coefficients and residuals are dis played on the Coefficients and Residuals dialog before being written to the da tabase The user may choose to save the coefficients to the database or to cancel without saving If this check box is not selected the coefficients and residuals are automatically written to the database without being displayed The Prompt before overwriting existing coefficients in database check box de termines whether the newly calculated coefficients automatically overwrite ex isting coefficients for the same report number If this check box is selected and a set of coefficients with the same report number already exists in the database the user is prompted whether to overwrite the existing co
333. w much time should the heat source be given box allows the user to specify the amount of time that must elapse before the action selected above occurs The allowable range is from 1 minute to 120 minutes Note This time does not apply if the first option is selected 3 4 8 Fonts amp Sizes Tab The Fonts amp Sizes tab is used for selecting the default font names sizes and 50 3 File Menu styles to be used when printing the default Report of Calibration and the cus tom Reports of Calibration that ship with MET TEMP II User Test Fonts amp Sizes MET TRACK SmartSwitch Fonts amp Sizes Default Report of Calibration Title Select the font to use Font size Style options X Bold Italics Underline Default Report of Calibration Body Select the font to use Font size Style options f Bold Italics Underline Example T ext Figure 21 Fonts amp Sizes Tab To set the font that is used when printing the title on the default Report of Cali bration and the included custom Reports of Calibration change the settings in the Default Report of Calibration Title section To set the font that is used when printing the rest of the text main body on the default Report of Calibration and the included custom Reports of Calibration change the settings in the De fault Report of Calibration Body section e Select the name of the font to use from the Select the font to u
334. which the software is installed CAMETTEMP 2 by default and all subfolders If the folders have read only access errors will occur when MET TEMP II attempts to access its database and or configuration files Contact your system administrator for assistance in setting up Windows login accounts with full access to these folders Every time this software is run it checks to make sure that all of the required DLL and VBX files are found on your computer If the software detects that 1 Introduction 11 an older file has replaced one or more of these files or that the file is not found the Shared Files Conflict dialog is displayed detailing the problems found Shared Files Conflict x MET TEMP II has detected that some of the files required for proper operation have been changed See the list below for details of the differences between the required files and the files found on this computer Conflicting files click on a file to see details OCBASED DLL QCRTD DLL Detail description of conflict Reference File Date 9 26 1996 2 59 00 4M Reference File Version Actual File Found Actual File Date Actual File Version No matching file was found Figure 1 Shared Files Conflict Dialog Every time you install any software on your computer it is a good idea to make a backup of your important files including all files in the WINDOWS or WINNT and WINDOWS SYSTEM or WINNT SYSTEM folders Some times dur
335. witch port to which the instrument is connected Heat Sources to SmartSwitch If you are using Hart baths dry wells or furnaces supported by MET TEMP I as heat sources connect the serial port of each instrument to one of the SmartSwitch ports typically ports C H using a null modem cable When con figuring the heat sources select the SmartSwitch port to which each of the in struments are connected If you are using other heat sources such as fixed points or non supported heat sources which are referred to as External heat sources no connection is required Important If using one or more External heat sources MET TEMP II cannot be configured to use the heat sources as the reference Model 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer to SmartSwitch If you are using a 1620 5020A DewK Thermohygrometer to monitor ambient conditions connect the serial port of the DewK to one of the SmartSwitch ports typically port F or H using the serial cable provided with the DewK On the General tab of the MET TEMP II Defaults dialog select the SmartSwitch port that the DewK is connected to 9938 MET TEMP II User s Guide 18 1 9 MET TEMP II Main Display The MET TEMP II Main Display consists of the menu bar toolbar and a workspace area 2 MET TEMP II B x File Configuration Calibration Scale Graph Utilities Help ade tical SESS E Figure 5 MET TEMP II Main Display The men
336. x The step size is the increment between each temperature value on the table and must be between 0 01 and 100 00 Below the temperature settings are various options for the selected type of table e For Temperature vs Resistance tables the first derivative column can be printed by selecting the Print first derivative dr dT option e For Temperature vs Ratio tables the inverse difference column can be printed by selecting the Print inverse difference dT dW option e For Temperature vs EMF uV or mV tables the error column can be printed by selecting the Print Error uV or mV option Resolutions Tab The Resolutions tab allows the resolutions of the data in each column of the ta ble to be set Export Settings Resolutions Template Settings Type and Range Other Settings l Resolutions Use default resolutions Use custom resolutions Temperature esistance T st derivative dr dT Figure 110 Resolutions Tab 15 Coefficients and Tables Application 205 15 5 1 9 3 If you want to use the default resolution settings when printing the table select the Use default resolutions option The drop down lists are disabled When the Use default resolutions option is selected the values on the table are printed using the default method temperature values are always 2 decimal places and all other values depend upon the magnitude of the value e For values b
337. y inserted into the set point list by click ing the Insert Fixed Point button The Fixed Points dialog is displayed Select the fixed point cell to use and click the OK button to close this dialog Clicking the Cancel button closes this dialog and aborts inserting the fixed point set point Refer to Section 3 4 2 1 Fixed Points for more information on con figuring fixed point information When inserting a fixed point set point the set point value defaults to the refer ence value for the selected fixed point cell and the Set point box is disabled The duration and uncertainty parameters are automatically set to their default settings as defined on the Set points tab of the Defaults dialog The window and tolerance parameters are disabled and do not apply to fixed point set points If the duration or uncertainty settings need to be changed follow the instruc tions in Section 5 1 1 5 Editing Set points Note When calibrating a heat source fixed point set points cannot be used The Insert Fixed point button is disabled 5 1 1 4 Removing Set points Set points can be removed from the set point list by selecting the set point to remove and clicking the Remove Set point button A message always appears to confirm removing the set point Click Yes to remove the selected set point or click No to abort removing the set point To remove all set points from the set point list click the Remove All Set points button A message appears to confirm
338. ys a prompt for the data to be entered at the appropriate times during the calibration process 96 5 Calibration Menu 97 If the same instrument is being used as both the reference readout and the scan ner the channel that is currently configured with the reference probe appears in the Channel list with the lt Reference gt marker A test probe cannot be config ured on this channel When this channel is selected the Clear Channel button Model number Serial number and other controls on this dialog are disabled Clicking the Clear All Channels button removes all test probe configuration in formation from all channels regardless of the scanner or scanner module that is currently selected This button may be clicked to make sure all channels are cleared before beginning to configure test probes Clicking the Clear Channel button removes test probe configuration informa tion from the currently selected channel only To configure a test probe select the appropriate scanner or scanner module from the Scanner or Modules list as applicable Then select the channel to which the test probe is connected in the Channels list If MET TEMP II is con figured to not use a scanner simply click any entry in the Probes list The order of the test probes is not important but MET TEMP II will prompt for the data for each test probe to be manually entered in the order in which the test probes are configured in this list Important When usin

9938 MET/TEMP II

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents